Prinect ColorToolbox Users Guide Us

Color Toolbox
Equipment
User’s Guide.
Prinect Color Toolbox 2017.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Prinect Signa Station 1

Color Toolbox 1
Table of Contents
3
Before you start ...

About This Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Structure of this Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

What you should already know . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Further Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
What's New?
What's New and Enhanced in Prinect Color Toolbox Version 2017? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Functionality of Prinect Color Toolbox

What is Prinect Color Toolbox? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Header/Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Main Function Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
'Measure' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
'Compare' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
'Analysis' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
'Create' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
'Edit' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
'Process standard' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Central Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Button Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Explorer Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Status panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Zoom in View of Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
HTML5 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Video Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Controls in the Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Prinect Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
Measure
Working with 'Measure' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Views and functions in the 'Measure' main function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Print, Measure Test Chart and Save Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Analysis of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Series of Measurements .............................................. 35
Colorimeters
Types of Colorimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Densitometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Spectrophotometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Dotmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Color measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Overview of the Colorimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Notes on the measurement conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Modification of the ISO Measurement Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Konica Minolta FD-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
X-Rite i1Pro 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Measure with tray and scan ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
X-Rite i1Pro 2 - IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
TECHKON SpectroDens Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
X-Rite eXact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Spot mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Scan mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Special Test Charts for X-Rite eXact, X-Rite i1Pro 2 and TECHKON SpectroDens Premium
(in the Scan Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ColorScout A+ Automatic Measuring Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
X-Rite i1 iSis 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Overview of Test Elements and Measuring Devices
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Spot Color Evaluation

Measuring and Evaluating Spot Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Basic Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Measurement and Evaluation of a Spot Color with the Color Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4 Version 2017
Table of Contents
Creating a Process Standard for Spot Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Multicolor
What is Multicolor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Definition of the Process Colors for Multicolor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Multicolor Features in Prinect Color Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Process standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Creating Multicolor Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Multicolor test charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Procedure for Measuring Data in Prinect Color Toolbox: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Importing the Measured Data from Prinect Image Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Smoothing of the Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setup and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Match a Multicolor Profile to Other Print Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Measure - Functions
'Test chart' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Right-click Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Viewing Locked Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
'Process standard' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
'Substrate' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
'Color values' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
'Dot gain' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Printing Characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
'Gray values' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Minispots for the evaluation of gray balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

'Ink zones' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Show density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Show Delta E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Show density table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Table of Contents
Show Delta E table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

'Gradual fading' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Show density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Show Delta E ...................................................... 83
Show density table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Show Delta E table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
'ab diagram' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
'Dot gain table' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
'Color Toolbox - New measurement file' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
'Edit control strip' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Loading a Combined Test Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

'Color measurement of test chart' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
'Mean calculation of test chart data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
'Color patch editor' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Easy Way to Modify Several Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Calculate from profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
'Extracting test chart data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Procedure ....................................................... 94
'Smoothing of color data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
'Correction of color data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
'Conversion of color data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Information about the Conversion of Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

'Conversion of color data - color values' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
'Conversion of color data - paper white' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
'Conversion of color data - Test chart values' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Conversion of color data - Calibration data Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Measure - Check compliance with process standard
'Process standard' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setting the Process Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Individual Quality Index (IQI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
CIELab color values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ab diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6 Version 2017
Table of Contents
Substrate (paper white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Gray balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Process Standards: Proof Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Supported mini spots and test charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Selecting, Administrating and Editing Various Proof References in a Single Process
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Process Standards: Digital Print Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Supported mini spots and test charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Measuring a Digital Press with the Digital Printing Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Process Standards: G7 check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Supported Mini Spots and Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Compare
Working with 'Compare' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Views and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Notes on the Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

'Test chart' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
View with Absolute Values and Marked Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
View with Differential Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
'xy diagram' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
'ab diagram' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
'La/Lb diagram' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
'3D color space' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Examples: 3D displays of the layers ('Stacks' diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Examples: 2D sections throughout the color space ('Sections' diagram) . . . . . . . . . . 131
Examples: 'Show wire model' view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3D display of the color space (with central projection and/or animation) . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Examples: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
'Statistics' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Display of the Error Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Display of the error distribution (trend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Display of the error distribution (trend with mean) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
'CIE report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Total results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Table of Contents
Dot gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Density values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
CIELab Color Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Proof report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
'Proof statistics' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Display of the Error Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Display of the error distribution (trend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
'Color values' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
'ΔLab report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
'ΔLCH report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
'Tonal values' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Display of the dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Display of the printing characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Display of the density curves (density profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
'Data table' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
'Save table as CSV file' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Analysis
Working with 'Analysis' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Information about Long-term Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Hotfolder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
'Change entry' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Display of the result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Notes on the Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Zoom Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
'CIE report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
'Dot gain report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
'Density report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Production check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
'PV Overview' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8 Version 2017
Table of Contents
'PV CIE report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

'PV dot gain report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Quality Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Create
Working with 'Create' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Creating an ICC output profile based on the data of a test chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
'Profile calculation' dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Set Parameters for Print or Proof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

'Print process parameters' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
'Color composition / Black generation' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
'GCR setting/Black generation' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
'Gamut mapping' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
'Correction of color data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
'Smoothing of color data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Example of correction or smoothing of measured data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Views and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
'Test chart' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Right-click Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Viewing Locked Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
'xy diagram' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
'ab diagram' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
'La/Lb diagram' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
'Dot gain' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Printing Characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
'Gray balance/Density curves' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Display of the gray balance curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Display of the density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Edit
Working with 'Edit' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Table of Contents
'Profile info.' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Display Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Profile Information - Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
ProofTuner (Visual Correction of Proof Profiles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
View profile parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Profile Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Process Color Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

'Dot gain' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Dot gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Printing Characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Editing the Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
'Gray balance' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Gray balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Editing the Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
'Global gradation' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Gradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Editing the Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
'Lightness' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Lightness gradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Editing the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
'Proof correction' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Principle of Proof Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Notes on 'Keep paper white' option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
'Process param.' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Process standard
Working with 'Process standard' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Notes on the Shipped Process Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

'Overview' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
'Overview' - View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

'Overview - Edit (Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
How to Create a Spot Color/Multicolor Process Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
'Administration' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Import a standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
10 Version 2017
Table of Contents
Export a standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Calculate wet process standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Procedure for the Wet-Dry Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

"Use tonal values from Calibration Manager" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Migrate local process standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tools
Functions of the 'Tools' Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Color calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Color calculator > Calculate color values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Color calculator > Compare color values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
DeviceLink Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Profile smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
'Correct profile by smoothing' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Process parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
'Store parameter set' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

'Load parameter set' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Ink Limit Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Spot color control strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
3D spot color view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Gray balance calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
General Information about Gray Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Gray Balance in Real Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Gray balance calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Calculate correction data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Gray balance optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Gray balance optimization in the Prinect workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Preferences and Print
General Information about Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
'Preferences' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

'General' tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Table of Contents
'Measurement' tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

'Test chart' tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
'Compare' tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
'Hotfolder' tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
'MDS' tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
'License Server' tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
'CIE Report' Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
'Tol [%]' (tolerance) tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
'Individual Quality Index (IQI)' tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
General Information about Printing Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
'Print' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Change Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Test Charts and Control Strips
Test Charts and Control Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
How to Record a Printing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

What are Test Charts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Overview of the Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Overview of the Control Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Overview of the Linearization Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
CMYK Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
'ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3' Test Chart with 928 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Test chart structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
'ISO 12642 / IT8.7/3 Random' Test Chart
(Rearranged IT8.7/3) with 928 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Test chart structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
'ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual' Test Chart with 1617 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
'ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Random' Test Chart with 1617 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
ISO 12647-2 plus Test Chart with 1700 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
'ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual' Test Chart with 1485 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Test chart structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
'ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random' Test Chart with 1485 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
12 Version 2017
Table of Contents
'PrintOpen Standard 210' Test Chart with 210 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

'PrintOpen Extended 840' Test Chart with 840 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
'PrintOpen Basic 210' Test Chart with 210 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
'PrintOpen Basic 135' Test Chart with 135 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
CMY Test Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
'PrintOpen Standard' Test Chart with 135 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

RGB test charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
'PrintOpen RGB Standard' Test Chart with 135 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

'PrintOpen RGB Extended' Test Chart with 840 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
General Information about Special Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Special Test Chart for Strip Readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Multicolor Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Test Charts for Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Control Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
'Ugra/FOGRA media strip' Version 1.2 with 52 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

'Ugra/FOGRA media strip V2-agx' Version 2.0 with 46 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
'FOGRA MKV 3' for Epson Printer (1-2 Rows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
'PCS control strip 40AB/40A' with 40 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
'PCS control strip 60AB/60A' with 60 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
'MB_100_70_40_CMYK' and 'MB_100_80_40_CMYK' Color Control Blocks
with 13 Patches and 'MB_100_75_50_25_CMYK' with 17 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
DIPCO 'Prinect 4GS strip' with 28+1 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
'Prinect/Fogra 4 strip' with 40+1 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
'HD Proof Color Bar' with 32 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
'PCS 19_100_80_40_Gray' with 19 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
'ECI_GrayConL', 'ECI_GrayConM' and 'ECI_GrayConS' with 52, 32 or 6 Patches . . . . . 310
'PCM_GrayConL_i1' Control Strip with 56 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
'PCS40_Gray_i1' Control Strip with 52 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
"TECHKON" Control Strip with 16 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Table of Contents
'User-Spot-Paperwhite' Block with 2 Patches for Evaluation of Spot Colors . . . . . . . . . 313

CMY-K Linearization Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
'PCM 13 CMYK' and 'PCM 25 CMYK' Four-color Linearization Strips each

with 13 or 25 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
'MB_Process_13' and 'MB_Process_25' Single-color Linearization Strips
with 13 and 25 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Linearization Strips for Color Proof Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
'HDM_Inkjet' Linearization Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Index
14 Version 2017
About This Documentation

This documentation applies to Prinect Color Toolbox version 17.0. The manual contains all the infor-
mation you need to work with Prinect Color Toolbox.
i
i
Note: Remember that the printed documentation may differ in its contents from the online
documentation (PDF, Online Help) as it is not always possible for technical reasons to incor-
porate the latest modifications into the printed manuals. You can always find the latest
information in the online documentation.
Structure of this Documentation

This description refers to the fully licensed Prinect Color Toolbox 17.0 with its programs:
• Quality Monitor 17.0: Program for the analysis and quality control of color standards for printing
and proofing based on color measurements
• Profile Tool 17.0: Program for creating ICC press and proof profiles
Some functions of Prinect Color Toolbox 17.0 are not available or they have constraints if all the com-
ponents are not enabled by the relevant license keys.
What you should already know

We assume that you are familiar with the Windows® operating systems that are supported.
Further Documentation
You can find more information in the following documentation:
• in the enclosed "How to get started" leaflet
• in the Heidelberg Prinect Licensing - User's Guide
• in the description of the "Prinect Color Tools" installation
• in the "Calibration Manager / Calibration Tool" Reference and User's Guide
• in the "Prinect Image Control" User's Guide
• in the "UserGuide" PDF files for experts

("Start > All Programs > Heidelberg Prinect Color Tool > Documentation (en) > Workflow Docu-
mentation")

• in additional information, e.g. "Prinect Color Toolbox Colorimeters.pdf"

("Start > All Programs > Heidelberg Prinect Color Tool > Documentation (en)")
In "Prinect Color Toolbox Colorimeters" you will find information about all older measuring
devices that can be used with Prinect Color Toolbox and information about the data formats of
the measured data.
Typographical conventions
The following typographical conventions are used in this manual:
• References to other chapters and sections are blue (on the screen) and underlined.
Example: See section "Typographical conventions", page 16.
• Quotes are used to indicate menus, folders, names of functions, hardware conditions, switch
settings, system messages, etc.
Example: Set the switch to "off".
• Menus, functions and sub-functions are separated by ">".
Example: Select "File > Open...".
• A plus sign is used to indicate that several keys have to be pressed at the same time.
Example: Press Alt+A.
Important Information
Important information in the text is marked by symbols at the side which are used as follows:
Warning: Contains information that must be taken into consideration to protect the user
from injury.
Caution: Contains information that must be taken into consideration to prevent damage to
hardware or software.
i
i
Note: Contains important general or supplementary information about a specific topic.
Prerequisite: Lists requirements which must be fulfilled before the steps which follow can
be performed.
16 Version 2017
What's New?
What's New?
What's New and Enhanced in Prinect Color Tool-

box Version 2017?
In this chapter, we would like to highlight to you briefly the main enhancements and changes in the
current Prinect Color Toolbox. The blue links will take you directly to more details on the topics.
New user interface
The user interface has a new design as of version 2017. The new dark interface lets you focus more
on the actual contents, e.g. layouts, images, and is less tiring on the eyes when working longer peri-
ods at the screen and in different ambient conditions.
Online Help with Videos
The Online Help has been revised to a context-sensitive "responsive HTML5 Help". There are numer-
ous benefits with such a help, e.g. window size can be changed dynamically, Help can be printed,
films integrated, Help updateable, etc (see "HTML5 Help", page 28).
The Online Help now also contains videos that briefly explain important functions and new features
visually.
You will find these films in "Video Tutorials".
Prerequisite: To be able to play the videos, the Windows Media Player as of version 12 must
be installed on your operating system. Normally, this is the case on all operating systems as
of Windows 7.
New released measuring devices

Automatic "ColorScout A+ xy measuring table" for X-Rite Eye-One Pro 2, X-Rite eXact, Konica
Minolta FD-7 and Techkon SpectroDens (see also "ColorScout A+ Automatic Measuring Table",
page 49 and the video tutorial in the Online Help).
Automatic X-Rite i1 iSis 2 in two versions for different sheet sizes (see "X-Rite i1 iSis 2", page 50
and the video tutorial in the Online Help).
Simplified creation of profiles from measured data

Setup and calculation were grouped in a clear structure and given various defaults that provide
usable profiles in the majority of cases. In this way, even untrained users can create profiles in
a fast and uncomplicated way (see "Creating an ICC output profile based on the data of a test
chart", page 172 and the video tutorial in the Online Help for details).
New functions in the "Tools" menu

• Ink Limit Calculation
Defines the maximum inking, mainly for ink jet and digital presses (see "Ink Limit Calculation",
page 253)

What's New?
• Spot color control strips
For creating and editing custom spot color controls strips. These custom control strips let you
compare the spot colors you use with the desired result in a quick way, allowing you to check
deviations in paint pot batches or the quality when replaced by CMYK or Multicolor.
You can then use these custom control strips in "Control strip > User-defined" in the "Color Tool-
box > New measurement file" dialog as reference data for new measurements (see "Spot color
control strips", page 254).
• 3D spot color view
A 3D view for comparison of the locations of the spot colors from a table with the color gamut
of an ICC profile (see "3D spot color view", page 255).
Simplified operation
• Display of a detail was added to the test chart view, letting you zoom in parts of the test chart
to make it easier for you to select single color patches (see "Zoom in View of Test Charts", page
27).
• "Keep color", new function in the color calculator, "Compare color values" tab (see "Keep color",
page 246). You can buffer as many as eight imported color values.
• "Color values" view was added to the tabs in "Compare" for an easier comparison of spot color
control strips with reference data. All colors that have Lab values display (see "'Color values'
View", page 145).
• "HDM_Inkjet", new linearization strip

Two versions of the "HDM_Inkjet" linearization strip were created especially for digital web
presses like Gallus Labelfire 340 (see "'HDM_Inkjet' Linearization Strips", page 316).
Special Features
The minimum value for "Total dot area" in profile calculation was reduced from 210% to 110%.
This can be necessary on ink jet machines for hardware reasons (see "'Color composition /
Black generation'", page 175).
Other
• New process standards for FOGRA 51 and 52
· FOGRA51 – PSO Coated v3 – print condition 1, premium coated paper (ISO 12647-2:2013
PC 1); replaces FOGRA39
· FOGRA52 – PSO Uncoated v3 (FOGRA52) – print condition 5, woodfree uncoated white
paper (ISO 12647-2:2013 PC 5); replaces FOGRA47
• New test chart, ISO 12647-2 plus
ISO 12647-2 plus was developed on the basis of ISO 12642 ANSI IT8.7/4 Random with additional
cross-centered dot gain patches. This gives you an even better check of gradual fading and ink
stability in the measurements.
18 Version 2017
What is Prinect Color Toolbox?

Prinect Color Toolbox consists of two components:
• Profile Tool
• Quality Monitor
Profile Tool lets you create ICC-based profiles of calibrated and controlled prints and proofs. The pro-
files contain information about the devices and processes plus their parameters that can be used for
accessing the correct profiles during production. The software helps you generate the profiles in an
easy way.
Details about all the relevant process parameters (plates, substrates, inks, color order) are saved in
the profiles. This includes the relevant process standard in the form of dot gain curves and solid den-
sities or the color data of the process colors. You can also use these details for quality control and
setup of the press. Different procedures make a quality check systematic and simple and allow you
to record the devices and applications involved in the color workflow.
Quality Monitor lets you check and evaluate device and process calibrations, ICC profiles and proof
corrections and lets you document the results. The focal point of this software is to check the process
parameters of the imagesetters and platesetters, printing processes and proofers you use. The mea-
sured data required for this are recorded using defined test equipment.
The software helps you record and evaluate the measured data in an easy way and gives you tips
about possible problems and their elimination.
Different procedures make a quality check systematic and simple and allow you to record the devices
and applications involved in the color workflow.
The quality assessments are based on a comparison of the color data sets of defined test charts and
test strips (e.g. ECI 2002, ISO 12642-2/ANSI IT8.7/4, ISO 12642/ANSI IT8.7/3, HDM, Ugra/FOGRA).
Prinect Color Toolbox lets you measure test charts or control strips directly, either manually or auto-
matically with online spectrophotometers, densitometers or dotmeters. Densities or screen percent-
ages can also be measured in addition to the spectral values of the control element. The measured
color data are saved in the "ISO 12642" data format. This data format lets you use color data from
external sources (e.g. from measuring devices that are not supported). The color data can be inter-
changed by means of an export function.
Prinect Color Toolbox (Quality Monitor) calculates quality characteristic values, e.g. statistical param-
eters from Delta E (ΔE) evaluations, based on a comparison of color data sets. The results are shown
in different lists and diagrams in an easy-to-understand way and can also be printed as a record. This
lets you create quality reports, for example, as are required for certified businesses.
Test strips on the calibrated devices and/or processes are output and measured (spectral values, den-
sity values, screen percentages) to check device and process calibrations. The measured data are
then compared with the rated values.
A quick-to-measure test chart or a test strip is output and then measured to check proofer calibration.
Its spectral values are then compared with the color data saved in the proofer profile at the time the
profile was created.

The color data of a print test chart and a proof simulation are compared to check the accuracy of the
proof.
In addition to the comparison of two color data sets, a large number of color data sets created during
a certain period can also be evaluated. The results of this time series analysis are displayed in dia-
grams and tables and can also be printed as a record.
User Interface
The user interface of Prinect Color Toolbox consists of "static" and "dynamic" elements. The static
elements are always visible while the dynamic elements can change their appearance and contents
depending on the main application function that is currently in progress (see Main Function Bar).
• 1: Caption bar
• 2: Header/Menu Bar
• 3: Main Function Bar
• 4: Tabs
• 5 and 6:Central Workspace
20 Version 2017
• 7: Button Bar
• 8: Explorer Panel
• 9: Status panel
Header/Menu Bar
The menu bar is below the caption bar (1) and contains various menu items for operation. These vary
depending on the main function selected.
You can invoke the "Tools" menu in all of the main functions.
Main Function Bar
You will find the main function bar at the top of the central workspace:
• 'Measure'
• 'Compare'
• 'Analysis'
• 'Create'
• 'Edit'
• 'Process standard'
The tabs of those functions you have not licensed are hidden.

'Measure'
This is where you start operation for measuring colors in test charts or control elements. Measuring
is manual or automatic with spectrophotometers, densitometers and dotmeters.
In this section, you can also import and export color data in an ASCII text format in compliance with
the "ISO 12642:1996" standard on the import/export of color data. You can import the color data of
Prinect Image Control directly.
The color data and process parameters can be shown in diagrams and tables and also printed as
records.
'Compare'
This is where you start operation for comparing two color data sets or ICC profiles to check the qual-
ity. Two and three-dimensional diagrams allow you to assess the data in the color space.
The quality assessment results are shown in diagrams and tables and can also be printed as quality
reports.
In this main function, the data about the current patch and the reference values are shown in a sep-
arate window.
'Analysis'
This is where you start operation for comparing several color data sets for long-term analyses (time
series) and for a production run check.
The quality assessment results are shown in diagrams and tables and can also be printed as quality
reports.
'Create'
This is where you start operation for creating profiles.
The color data and process parameters can be shown in diagrams and tables and also printed as
records.
'Edit'
This is where you start operation for editing profiles ( view and change profile entries).
'Process standard'
This is where you start operation for selecting and editing a process standard. You can create custom
process standards for CMYK, multicolor and spot colors.
The nominal values and tolerances can be shown in diagrams and data tables and also printed as
records.
You can also import and export existing or new process standards with this main function.
22 Version 2017
Tabs
The tabs are located on the left beside the central workspace (5). These tabs allow you to switch
between different view modes for the current color data files or the profile documents. The number,
appearance and functions of the tabs depend on what main function is selected.
The test charts or control elements, color space diagrams, quality assessment diagrams and tables
are shown in the central workspace.
These functions can also be called up from the menu bar (3).
Central Workspace
The central workspace displays test charts or test strips during color measurement, your data files or
profile documents, and color space and characteristic diagrams. The content depends on what main
function is selected. In most cases, the central workspace has an area that displays diagrams and
tables (5) and to the right an area for other operation and view options (6).
Parts of the area can be covered by dialogs that you can move. These GUI dialogs are called up via
buttons or menu commands.
Probes function: When test charts or test strips are being viewed and measured, dynamic color data
(CMYK, RGB, XYZ, LAB) appear when the color patches are selected with the mouse pointer.
Button Bar
The button bar is located below the central workspace. It contains buttons for frequently used options
that depend on the main function selected. These functions can also be called up from the menu bar
(3). The order of operation is normally from left to right.
Explorer Panel
The central workspace (5 and 6) of the user interface can be enhanced by an Explorer panel that is
normally hidden. This allows you to select your data faster. Drag the vertical bar to the left with the
mouse. You then see the Explorer panel where you can look for and open the folders and files you
want with a double click.
After you selected your file, you can push the Explorer panel back again to the right until you can only
see the vertical bar. The view you selected in the panel remains unchanged even if you open other
files or folders with menus or buttons in the meantime. We recommend that you select files/folders
in the Explorer panel especially if they are located in different sources to the default folders, e.g.
through your network or on other data media.

Files are sorted by their creation/modification date (most recent file first) and not by alphanumeric
order when you check the "Sorting by date" box.
The Explorer bar also displays the five recently used folders.
You find them in "Recent Folders".
Status panel
The status panel is always positioned along the lower edge. The status bar lets you set the following
parameters in a fast and simple way:
• Process standard (offset, proof, digital or G7/CGATS)
• Color type (CMYK, spot color or multicolor, only for offset process standards)
• Printing material/paper grade (this is where you can select the five paper grades from ISO
12647-2:2007 PT1 - PT5, normally with PT1 = PT2: glossy and matt coated and PT4: uncoated
white)
The status panel shows various details, depending on the main function selected:
· in "Compare": the file names of the reference and comparison data.
The filter setting also displays after the file name (select in the "Preferences" dialog,
'Measurement' tab, page 266).
· in "Create": the file names of the loaded color data file and of the calculated profile (if
available)
· in "Analysis": the file name of the series and the name of the current process standard
(if any)
· in "Measure / Check for compliance with process standard": the file names of the loaded
color data file and of the current profile (if available)
• a thumbnail of the test chart or control strip (in "Compare" and "Create"); if different types of
test charts or test strips are open, only those patches that are in both files display.
The full path is then shown as a tooltip when you move the mouse pointer to a name. In the case of
the process standard, not only the name of the standard and printing material display but also a com-
ment and the set order of printing. Process standards included in the shipment are write-protected.
This is displayed in red letters ("THIS PROCESS-STANDARD IS WRITEPROTECTED").
24 Version 2017
The icons can have the following colors:

• green: The file is unchanged or changes were saved.
• yellow: The file was changed and not yet saved.
Drag & Drop

You can drag files and ICC profiles and drop them directly onto the Prinect Color Toolbox status panel
to automatically open them there. You can do this from the Windows Explorer without having to use
the "Open" function of Prinect Color Toolbox.
i
i
Note: Automatic opening works only if you drag and drop a file onto the status panel. It will
not open if you drop it on any other UI element of the Prinect Color Toolbox.
Depending on the module you are currently using, you can open the following files or ICC profiles with
Drag & Drop:
• Measure: Test chart files, ICC profiles
• Compare: Test chart files as reference data; as comparison data if Ctrl key is also held down
• Analysis: several test chart files with multiple selection (like the "Add" function)
• Create: Test chart files, ICC profiles
• Edit: ICC profiles
• Process standard PSO ini data (saved process standards) as new process standard
"Analysis" example
With the "Analysis" option, you can use the drag & drop function very efficiently in combination with
multiple selection.
1. Open an Explorer window showing the files to analyze
2. Use multiple selection to select all files to analyze
3. Use drag-and-drop to place these files onto the Prinect Color Toolbox status panel
Prinect Color Toolbox will open and analyze the files automatically.

Folder Structure
You can select the view mode for folders and files in this list:
• 1: Details
• 2: List
• 3: Profiles
Click on...
to go up one level.
to go to the home directory of the current user.
to create a new folder in the current folder which you can name as desired.
26 Version 2017
Zoom in View of Test Charts

The system automatically matches the display of the open test charts to the size of the window to uti-
lize the view as optimally as possible. In particular, the view of test charts with a large number of
color patches can be so small that it is difficult to select, analyze and edit single patches. In such a
case, you can zoom in the view.
You divide the view into two sections by moving the separating line. On top you see the overall view
of the test chart (1), below you see a detail of the test chart that you can zoom in at several levels up
to 128 times its size by clicking the plus button (2).
Click the up arrow: The detail view covers the whole view area.
Click the down arrow: The detail view closes and the overall view once again takes up the whole view
area.

HTML5 Help
HTML5 Help is designed as "responsive Help". In other words, the view fits automatically to the
screen size and the size of the Help window,
When you invoke Help from one section of the program using F1 or a Help button, Help opens auto-
matically showing you contents matching this section.
Video Tutorials
HTML5 Help provides you with the option of starting short videos directly from the Help that illus-
trates various topics visually. You can find all the videos available in HTML5 Help in the "Video Tuto-
rials" chapter in the table of contents.
Controls in the Online Help

You use the section toggles to go between the "Contents", "Index", "Glossary", "Content Filter" and
"Full Text Search" functions. The content of the navigation pane changes accordingly when you click
one of these buttons.
28 Version 2017
Contents: When you click an item, the related Help page

displays. You can open lower levels by clicking the nav-
igation triangle in front of an item and close them by
clicking the triangle again.
In the Contents, the item of the currently open Help
page is highlighted by a bar.
If the size of the Help window is small, only the content
of the chapter you are currently in displays in the navi-
gation pane. The complete table of contents displays
when you click the folder icon in front of the topmost
chapter header.

Index: When you click an item, the related Help content

displays in the main window. Click the contents to dis-
play the position of the item.
Glossary: A list with glossary items displays. When you
click an item, the related definition of the term displays.
Click again to close the definition.
Content filter: You can toggle between the filter settings
if the Help contents can be filtered by content.
This lets you confine the contents to those sections rel-
evant to you, for example, if you have different user
roles or applications where the functionality depends on
the license.
Full text search: A text box displays where you can enter
a search item. When you hit the Enter key, all Help
pages containing the search item are listed in the navi-
gation pane together with the number of items found.
When you click an item, the related content displays in
the main window. The search item is highlighted in color
in the main window.
Click the contents to display the position of the search
result.
The search window also displays at the top right in the
navigation bar in the Large view of the desktop Help
(Windows, Mac OS).
Click the Heidelberg icon to open the start page of the Online Help.
The arrow buttons in the header of the Help window let you move forwards
and backwards from one content page to the next. This means that you can
browse through the whole Online Help from page to page like a book.

The "Go to start of page" button at the bottom right of the content windows
(only in the Large view in Windows and Mac OS) lets you go to the start of
the current Help page fast.
The "Expand/Collapse" button lets you show or hide the contents, making
the view of the main window bigger when shown.
You can use the "Print" button to print the current Help window to a con-
nected system printer (only in the Large view in Windows and Mac OS). The
printout can have several pages depending on the content of the Help win-
dow.
30 Version 2017
Measure
Measure
Working with 'Measure'
i
i
Note: Some functions are not available or they have constraints if you have not licensed all
the integrated programs (Profile Tool and Quality Monitor) of Prinect Color Toolbox.
Prinect Color Toolbox lets you measure test charts or control elements directly, either manually or
automatically with online spectrophotometers, densitometers or dotmeters.
Densities or screen percentages can also be measured in addition to the spectral values of the control
element. The measured color data are saved in the "ISO 28178" data format. This data format lets you
use color data from external sources (e.g. from measuring devices that are not supported). The color
data can be interchanged by means of an export function.
The properties of a printing process must be known in order to create an ICC output profile. You get
this information by printing a test chart and then measuring it with a colorimeter.
"Measure" contains all the steps you need for measuring a test chart or a control element with online
spectrophotometers, densitometers and dotmeters. The values measured are saved to a test chart file
in a format that complies with the ISO 28178 specification.
You can create a new data file by measuring a test chart or test strip or by importing existing data if,
for example, you wish to extract the color data from a large test chart, convert color data for a mod-
ified process or find the mean of several measurements. In this way, you can create a new test strip
that you then can use as a reference for a comparison with another test strip or for a long-term anal-
ysis.
To calculate an ICC output profile, you need a test chart with at least 100 color patches.
Views and functions in the 'Measure' main function:

• Test chart: You can display the currently loaded test chart, control elements or linearization
strips with color patches and view information about the current patch. See "'Test chart' View",
page 71.
• Process standard You can display an overview of CIELAB color values (color bars and ab dia-
gram), dot gain curves and gray balance for the currently loaded test chart or test strip with tol-
erances for a printing standard that you selected. See "'Process standard' View", page 103
(single views with details in the "Substrate", "Color values", "Dot gain" and "Gray values" tabs).
• Substrate: You can display the substrate CIELAB color values (paper). See "'Substrate' View",
page 73.
• Color values: You can display the CIELAB color values, especially for primaries (CMYK) and sec-
ondaries (RGB). See "'Color values' View", page 73.
• Dot gain: You can view the dot gain or printing characteristic. See "'Dot gain' View", page 74.
• Gray values: You can display the gray values (gray balance). See "'Gray values' View", page 77.

Measure
• Ink zones: You can view the ink stability in all ink zones as ΔE values or density values. The pro-
cess standard is also shown. See "'Ink zones' View", page 78.
• Gradual fading: You can view the gradual fading of ink on the entire sheet as ΔE values or den-
sity values. The process standard is also shown. See "'Gradual fading' View", page 82.
• ab diagram: Display of the ab plane of the print process in the L*a*b* color space (as in "Com-
pare"); see "'ab diagram' View", page 84.
• Dot gain table: Table of the dot gains in each color; see "'Dot gain table' View", page 84.
You can find more details in:

• Measuring and Evaluating Spot Colors, page 53
You can interrupt your work at any time, save the settings you have made to your measured data file
and resume your work later on. You can repeat individual steps (for example, measure the data with
a different device) or change certain settings. However, you cannot change the profile and test chart
type during your work. If you want to do this, you must create a new color data file or open an existing
one.
Print, Measure Test Chart and Save Measured

Data
With Prinect Color Toolbox, we provide you with a large range of test charts for various purposes (see
also "Test Charts and Control Strips", page 277). The range goes from one color patch, e.g. for mea-
suring spot colors, up to test charts with several thousand patches.
As a general rule: The larger the test charts, the better it is to use automatic colorimeters like Col-
orScout A+ or X-Rite i1 iSis 2.
32 Version 2017
Measure
Measurement of the test charts always consists of the following steps:

1. Print the test chart to the press.
The test chart or control strip is not printed directly from Prinect Color Toolbox but using a layout
or image editing program. You must make a proof print or proof of separation films or plates you
created.
You need special test charts for some colorimeters (e.g. strip readers). These charts are also
located as data sets in "Testcharts".
2. Open this test chart/type ("New" button, "New measurement file" dialog) in the "Measure" tab.
3. Select the colorimeter used and the measurement condition with the "Measure" button, set up
the connection and start measurement with the "Connect" button.
i
i
Note: Check "Start automatically" in "Save and Repeat chart measurement" (see Series of
Measurements, page 35) if you wish to measure a number of test charts or control strips
with the same measuring device.
4. Measure the printed test chart with the colorimeter.

How measurement runs depends on the colorimeter used, for example, whether and how the mea-
suring device is to be calibrated and how the test chart will be processed.
5. Finally, you must save the finished measurement as a file to be able to use the data for other
steps.
Notes on measurement
• You can measure the values either online or offline. Normally, the instrument is connected to
your PC, allowing the measured data to be transferred directly to Prinect Color Toolbox (online
measurement). The data can also be measured with another program (e.g. supplied by the man-
ufacturer of the instrument) and saved in the "ISO 28178" format (offline measurement).
• In the case of X-Rite DTP41, the special test chart with its stripes is shown. Here you must specify
whether a strip will have 15, 30 or 45 color patches.
• You also measure strips with the GretagMacbeth iCColor. Pay attention to the instructions in the
display. You will be asked to have the test chart at hand and to follow the instructions.
• If you use a device for automatic measurement, the test chart will appear as a diagram. As many
as three patches are marked (depending on the device). You must set reference positions at
these points on the printout used for measuring the data. Use the arrow keys to go to these posi-
tions. The "question marks" are replaced by "OK" in the diagram.
More information about the different colorimeters can be found in the respective user documentation
and in "Types of Colorimeters", page 37.
i
i
Note: If necessary, you can interrupt the measuring process by clicking "Stop", for example,
if you chose the wrong position.
Double-click the correct patch and continue measuring by clicking "Start".
Color patches measured after the "bad patch" are measured again.

Measure
Analysis of Measurement
After you save the measurement, you can continue processing as follows:
• View three different CIE color spaces in "Compare":
· "'xy diagram' View", page 126
· "'ab diagram' View", page 127
· "'La/Lb diagram' View", page 128
• Check the data for compliance with the process standard and/or create a user-defined printing
standard (see "Working with 'Process standard'", page 219) if you also measured density values.
• Set process parameters (see Process parameters, page 251)
• Correct the measured data
· by smoothing (see 'Smoothing of color data' Dialog, page 94)
· by correcting the fluorescent whitening effect (see 'Correction of color data' Dialog, page
95)
• Convert the measured data in three different ways
· see 'Conversion of color data - color values' Dialog, page 98
· see 'Conversion of color data - paper white' Dialog, page 98
· see Conversion of color data - Calibration data Dialog, page 100
• View the dot gain or printing characteristics (see "'Dot gain' View", page 74)
• Check ink stability (ink zones) and gradual fading (see "'Ink zones' View", page 78 and "'Gradual
fading' View", page 82)
• Run quality checks (see "Working with 'Compare'", page 119 and "Working with 'Analysis'", page
153).
• Find the mean of data if you measured several test charts of the same type (see 'Mean
calculation of test chart data' Dialog, page 91).
• Compare the measured data with data from color tables using the color calculator (e.g. for
assessing spot colors; see "Color calculator", page 239)
34 Version 2017
Measure
Series of Measurements
You can check "Start automatically" below "Save and Repeat chart measurement" after you con-
nected the measuring device and ran white calibration in the "Color measurement of test chart" dia-
log. If you wish to measure a number of data directly one after the other, the advantage of this option
is that you do not have to save the data manually after each measurement.
After you enable the option, you are prompted to set a file location and a base name for the color data
files. The suggested default name consists of the element name (e.g. "FograV3"), the measurement
condition (M0, M1, etc.) and the time stamp (year-month-day-time). You can modify this name, for
example, by replacing the time of the time stamp with information about the background specifica-
tion and the measuring mode.
The dialog closes after you click "Save" and you start measuring.
• Position the measuring device on the first patch and start measuring by clicking "Start".
• You can now measure all your data in succession. Prinect Color Toolbox automatically saves
each of the measured data by the name you set and numbers the files in the order the data were
measured (e.g. "FograV3_M0_2015_02_03-WB-Scan-01.txt", "FograV3_M0_2015_02_03-WB-
Scan-02.txt", etc.).
• Click "Stop" in the "Color measurement of test chart" dialog to end the series of measurements.
• The last of the data you measured opens in "Test chart" after you "close" the dialog.

Colorimeters
Colorimeters
Types of Colorimeters
This chapter will provide you with information about the devices that you can use for measuring test
charts and control strips in Prinect Color Toolbox.
You can use all devices that can furnish the measured values in a file format based on the ISO 28178
specification (CIEXYZ or CIELab).
The most important devices for measuring color, density or screen percents are:
• Densitometer
• Spectrophotometers
• Dotmeters
Densitometer
Densitometers measure the optical density of a color layer. Optical density increases the darker this
color layer is.
Reflective densitometers measure the density of the process colors. Color filters (red, green or blue)
are used when measuring process colors.
Spectrophotometers
Spectrophotometers that work with the CIE color system are used to measure the spectral reflectance
or transmission. XYZ or CIELab color data are determined from this.
Dotmeters
The dotmeters supported by Prinect Color Toolbox use a video camera system to determine the dot
area, dot size, screen frequency, screen angle and, if necessary, dot display and plate characteristic.

Colorimeters
Color measurements
Color measurements are basically influenced by the two parameters "Illuminant" and "Observer". For
that reason, you must set these two parameters:
• D50: Standard illuminant with a color temperature of 5000 K. This illuminant is often used in
the graphic arts industry for the assessment of originals, proofs and prints.
• Observer angle 2: Standard angle at which colors are perceived
Spectrophotometers are capable of calculating density values from spectral values.

You have two options for measuring a test chart with a colorimeter:
• Online measurement: The values measured in the color patches are transferred directly to
Prinect Color Toolbox via a serial or USB port.
• Offline measurement using the user program of the colorimeter in question. The values mea-
sured must be saved as a text file based on the ISO 28178 specification.
• Text files in this format can then be opened directly in Prinect Color Toolbox.
Overview of the Colorimeters

You will find information about the colorimeters listed below in this Online Help. You can find infor-
mation about all older measuring devices that can be used with Prinect Color Toolbox in the PDF doc-
ument named "Colorimeters" in "Start > All Programs > Heidelberg Prinect Color Tool > Documenta-
tion (e)".
• "Konica Minolta FD-7", page 40
• "X-Rite i1Pro 2", page 40
• "TECHKON SpectroDens Premium", page 45
• "X-Rite eXact", page 47
• "X-Rite i1 iSis 2", page 50
i
i
Note: For trouble-free operation, you should use short cables when connecting the colorim-
eters directly to the PC. In addition, if you have a power adapter, a colorimeter should also
always be connected to it if power is to be supplied via the interface.
38 Version 2017
Colorimeters
Notes on the measurement conditions

The conditions defined in ISO 13655 for measuring colors and the emergence of papers with UV opti-
cal brighteners for greater brilliance are the reasons for the use of the new colorimeters. The human
eye perceives these papers as "white" whereas the colorimeters detect some blue.
Spectral measurement conditions for CIELa*b* values compliant with the ISO-13655 standard
resulted from this:
• M0
UV conditions undefined; the majority of older measuring devices work with this measurement
condition
• M1
D50 - daylight illumination; optimal measurement condition for the new process standard, ISO-
12647-2:2013. The UV optical brighteners used in modern papers, however, greatly affect mea-
surements using this measurement condition.
• M2
UV cut filter; when this measurement condition is used, the UV optical brighteners used in mod-
ern papers are fully suppressed and do not affect the measured data (e.g. Image Control).
• M3
M2 + polarization filter; optimal measurement condition for measuring wet colors (e.g. InPress)
i
i
Note: You set the type of filter you wish to use in the "Preferences" in "Measurement > Fil-
ter" and this displays in the print report on the title page and in the status bar in "Measure"
(see "'Measurement' tab", page 266).
Modification of the ISO Measurement Condition

You can change the ISO measurement condition not only in the Preferences but also in the "Color
measurement" dialog. This change is then applied as a new setting in the Preferences. This lets you
measure paper white directly in the test chart under different conditions, for example, to determine
the degree of fluorescent whitening in the paper.
For example, if there is a significant amount of fluorescent whitening agents, there will accordingly be
negative b* values for M1 (D50) whereas the values for M2 (UV cut filter) are around 0 or even in the
positive range.
You can use the ISO measurement condition with "Compare > CIE report" for an analysis by defining
the data of one ISO measurement condition as the reference and the data of the other setting as the
comparison data (great difference = significant amount of fluorescent whitening agents).
i
i
Note: We recommend that you first change the ISO measurement condition and then con-
nect the measuring device. If you don't, the connection to the measuring device may be lost
after you change the ISO measurement condition.

Colorimeters
Konica Minolta FD-7

Konica Minolta FD-7 is the first spectrophotometer that supports not only M0 and M2 but also M1
conform with ISO 13655. It can be used for both strip and spot measurements. In addition, an auto-
matic measuring table XY table ColorScout A+ (dimensions 445 mm x 365 mm) is available.
This device can be used to measure any test charts or minispots flexibly and automatically. In other
words, special test charts are no longer needed. To measure a test chart, fix it in place on the mea-
suring table and mark it for flexible measurement:
• Select the base plate (white calibration tile) as the reference.
• Mark the top left and right corner of the test chart as well as the bottom right corner.
X-Rite i1Pro 2
X-Rite i1Pro 2 also supports the following filter conditions conform with ISO 13655:
• M0: non-specified illumination (measurement used to date)
• M1: D50 daylight illumination (optimal illumination of new standard)
• M2: UV cut filter (IC-NG, fluorescent whitening agents in papers have no impact)
In this case, the device has an additional UV LED and a position sensor.
The status LED on the device guides you through measuring: White = ready to measure, green = mea-
surement successful.
i
i
Note: If necessary, you must open the base plate before calibration.
Strip and spot (single) measurement are supported as well as measurement with an automatic mea-
suring table. In strip measurement with an automatic measuring table, there are restrictions with
regard to the patch sizes.
X-Rite i1Pro 2 can run in three modes:
• Spot (single measurement)
40 Version 2017
Colorimeters
• Strip (strip or scan mode)
• IO (as a chart device on the measuring table)
i
i
Note: IO devices before the E series only support the M0 measurement condition in the
strip mode. M1 and M2 can be processed only in the spot mode.
While M0 can measure in one run, M1 and M2 need two runs. The internal UV LED switches on during
the second run. In a single measurement and with the automatic measuring table, this switching hap-
pens so fast that no significant difference in time can be noticed. On the other hand, in the scan mode
two separate scans are needed to measure using M1 and M2 conditions.
During a spot measurement for M1 and M2, the two internal illumination runs are done in succession
unnoticed by the user. For that reason, with M1 and M2 you should wait until the status LED switches
to white again before measuring again.
Measure with tray and scan ruler

Besides using X-Rite i1Pro 2 with the automatic measuring table, you can also operate it with a tray
and scan ruler. The position sensor in conjunction with the strip on the scan ruler makes measure-
ment of smaller patches possible and, consequently, the double scan runs mentioned above that are
required for M1 and M2. The tray and scan ruler are essential for measuring in the scan mode with
M1 and M2.
Scan process for M1 and M2:
Important: When scanning, start before the first patch to be measured and finish after the last one.
1. Status LED white = ready to measure
2. Press the measure button, the LED goes out = ready for the first scan run
3. After the first scan run: Status LED green (briefly) = first measurement successful
4. Status LED blue = ready for second scan run (LED lights up on one side to indicate direction)
5. Press the measure button again, LED goes out = second scan run (with UV LED) can start
6. Status LED green (briefly with additional ring tone) = measurement successful
7. Status LED white = ready for new measurement
• Status LED red (briefly) = measurement not successful, e.g. scan too slow or too fast or auto-
matic internal synchronization of both runs failed
Notes:
• It is extremely important that the positions of the start and end patches are not changed during
scanning so that the measured patches can be synchronized with each other.
Scan start: in white before the first patch
Scan end: in white after the last patch
• The tray is too small for minispots ECI_BVDM_TVI_10 and ECI_GrayConL.

Colorimeters
• Field work has shown that the two scan runs cannot always be coordinated exactly and this
results in faulty measurement results. For that reason we recommend that you measure the data
twice to be sure.
Caution: Make absolutely sure that the scan ruler is inserted the right way round into the
tray because your results will be back-to-front if this is not the case.
X-Rite i1Pro 2 - IO
Using the IO device as of the "E" series, you can measure both in the slower but flexible spot mode
and in the faster strip mode in M0 thru M2 (in both cases, single illumination in M0 and double illu-
mination in M1 and M2).
Remember the following items when using the device:
• Restrictions in the size of the patch to be measured
The new strip mode supports only patches greater than 6x6 mm and as a result is released only
for:
· UGRA/FOGRA MKV3
· IDEAlliance (Type 2013)
· In addition, you can also use the strip mode with G7-P2P25.
• Different positioning during initialization
· In the spot mode, the device must be positioned in the middle of the patches at the
top left, bottom left and bottom right.
42 Version 2017
Colorimeters
· In the strip mode, the device must be positioned on paper white to the left of the
topmost and bottommost left patch and then to the right of the bottom right patch.
• Test chart for G7-P2P25
· The contrast in G7-P2P25 is too low for the strip mode, resulting in the yellow separating
line not being detected correctly in rows 4 and 5 for the five light patches. You must
blacken these separating lines for measuring in the strip mode.

Colorimeters
· When you use G7-P2P25 in the strip mode, select "User defined" and the reference file
for G7-P2P25. The view of the chart in the display is mirrored; the view in the Assistant
shows the correct orientation when measuring starts.
• Test charts for IT8.7-4 CMYK i1_iO_1_2 and IT8.7-4 CMYK i1_iO_2_2
You must use a special chart to measure IT8.7-4 in the scan mode in M0 (can be found in
"Prinect Profile Tool Test Charts", "\Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\ISO 12642-2 (IT8.7-4) Charts\i1-
iO"). To measure, position both pages with the text at the top position (see illustration).
44 Version 2017
Colorimeters
To measure in the spot mode, use the standard test chart installed with Color Tool.
Overview of the supported measuring processes with the IO.

IO Mode Measurement Condi- Elements Positioning
tion
Spot M0 - M2 All Old method (in the mid-
dle of the patches)
Scan M0 Test charts with Old method
6x6 mm
Scan M0 - M2 FOGRA MKV3 (7x7mm) New method (on paper
IDEAlliance (7x7mm) white beside the
G7-P2P25 (7x7mm) patches)
* see Different positioning during initialization, page 42

The Assistant automatically toggles between the positioning methods, depending on the selected
parameters and elements.
TECHKON SpectroDens Premium

The TECHKON SpectroDens supports all four measurement conditions M0 thru M3 without an exter-
nal filter. It can run in the spot mode and in the scan mode and is easy to use. The selected mode and
the measured data display on the integrated display. This way you can avoid working in the wrong
mode and letting measurement errors go undetected.

Colorimeters
The drivers and the service application for the device must be installed before you use the device for
the first time:
1. Select "Start/Programs/Heidelberg Prinect Color Tool x.0: Support:USB_Drivers".
2. In the "USB-Drivers:TECHKON" folder start
• "TechkonDriver32Bit.exe" or "TechkonDriver64Bit.exe" (this depends on whether you have a
32-bit or 64-bit operating system)
• and "TDService.exe".
Prerequisites:
• Hardware version ≥ 3
• Driver ≥ 1.7.0.2
• Firmware ≥ 9.13
Please read the information in the ReadMe file for details about connection.
i
i
Note: Special test charts are required for measuring test charts in the scan mode. The lay-
out of the patches is different in these charts. You will find all the test charts and elements
you need on the application DVD in the various subfolders of the "Testcharts" folder.
Measure
1. Click "Start". A dialog showing you the number of color patches per strip displays.
(2). If necessary, enter the number of patches on your printed test chart.
3. Click "OK".
4. Place the measuring device on the first patch, press the measure button and wait until you hear
a signal to start.
5. Guide the measuring device over the strip, keeping the measure button pressed down while you
do so.
6. When you are at the last patch of this row, let go of the button.
7. Measure all the strips one after the other in this way. The measured patches display in the file
if their number matches the strip definition.
(8). You must measure the strips again if patches there do not display or are empty. To do this, click
"Stop".
(9). Select the patch in the faulty strip and click "Start again. The Assistant shows you automatically
which strip must be measured again.
(10).Measure the indicated strip again.
(11). Continue with the other strips.
12. When all your measured data are correct, finish measurement and save the data to a file.
46 Version 2017
Colorimeters
i
i
Note: You can still make corrections after you finished measuring. Proceed as described
above and click "Stop" after you measured the faulty strip. 
You must reinitialize measurement after you save the data.
X-Rite eXact
X-Rite eXact supports all filter conditions compliant with ISO 13655:
• M0: non-specified illumination (measurement used to date)
• M1: D50 daylight illumination (optimal illumination of new standard)
• M2: UV cut filter (IC-NG, fluorescent whitening agents in papers have no impact)
• M3: Polarization filter
X-Rite eXact does not need any external filters, making it easy to use. It has an external switch for the
M1 filter condition. If you select M1 in Prinect Color Toolbox and the M1 switch is not set, you will see
an error message about this when you go to connect the device. In this case, you must set the switch
from "M0-M2-M3" to "M1". After that, you must connect the measuring device again in Prinect Color
Toolbox.
The reference white tile is built into the sensor head and is swung into the beam path when required.
For calibration, place the measuring device in its support and start calibration in Prinect Color Tool-
box.
You can switch between the spot mode (single measurement) and the scan mode using X-Rite eXact.
In Prinect Color Toolbox you must also select the correct mode and run calibration again after you
switch mode.
Spot mode
1. After calibration, you place the measuring device on the color patch you wish to measure.
2. On its integrated display, the device tells you that it is connected to the PC.
3. You start measurement by lowering the measuring device. The display shows you the measuring
process during measurement.
4. At the end of measurement, you will hear a beep and see a message, informing you that mea-
surement is finished.
The displays let you monitor the current measurement condition.
If the device does not measure for a certain period, it automatically switches to the "sleep mode", and
the display dims and is empty. You must switch it on again before you connect it for a repeat mea-
surement in Prinect Color Toolbox.

Colorimeters
Scan mode
i
i
Note: The "eXact-Scan" option is required for the scan mode.
To use it, the "X-Rite_eXact_Driver.exe" driver software in "...\Prinect Color Tool-
box\USB_Drivers\XRite" must have run.
1. Select "X-Rite-eXact (Scan)" in Prinect Color Toolbox and calibrate it.

(2). In M0, M2 and M3 you must measure printing material again to conclude calibration (confirm
the message and measure paper white).
3. When you click the "Start" button in Prinect Color Toolbox, the device goes to the scan mode
(can be seen by the LED of the sensor).
4. Position the sensor on the first patch of the element you wish to measure.
5. Press the sensor down and start measuring.
The display first shows the initialization icon, then a white circle for every correct scan. Make sure to
move the device evenly and at the right speed. If you move too quickly or too slowly, there is not
enough contrast for the sensor and a red circle appears as an error message on the display.
The sensor automatically detects the last measure patch and finishes measurement correctly if you
move the device too far.
48 Version 2017
Colorimeters
Special Test Charts for X-Rite eXact, X-Rite i1Pro 2 and TECH-
KON SpectroDens Premium (in the Scan Mode)
Use the test charts in the folders listed below in "ColorToolbox:Prinect Profile Tool Test Charts" if you
wish to measure a test chart with one of these devices in the scan mode:
• ISO12642-2/IT8.7/4 chart: folder "...Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\ISO 12642-2 (IT8.7-4)
Charts\i1"; each row has 25 or 15 columns. The version with 25 columns comprises three DIN A4
pages, the version with 15 columns has eight pages.
• ISO12642-2/IT8.7/3 chart: folder "...Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\ISO1242 (IT8.7-3) Charts\i1";

each row has 30 columns.
• ECI2002 chart: folder "...Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\ECI 2002 Charts\i1"; each row has 30 col-
umns.
ColorScout A+ Automatic Measuring Table

The ColorScout A+ measuring table lets you measure large test charts automatically. ColorScout A+
can incorporate various hand-held instruments. At present, you can use the following measuring
devices with Prinect Color Toolbox and ColorScout A+:
• Konica Minolta FD-7

Colorimeters
• X-Rite i1Pro 2
• TECHKON SpectroDens Premium
• X-Rite eXact
Prerequisite: ColorScout A+ is released for Windows 7 and 8.

You must install the driver before using it for the first time (http://www.ftdichip.com/Driv-
ers/VCP.htm).
X-Rite i1 iSis 2
You can use the X-Rite i1 iSis 2 to automatically measure large A4 and A3 test charts as well as strips
distributed on three charts from web presses (e.g. "IT874_Visual_iSis_1_3", "..._2_3", "..._3_3").
You have to cut A3 test charts and test chart strips to size before they are scanned. Remember the
following items when cutting to size:
• Cut the test charts as straight as possible.
• Cut as accurately as possible along the broken lines of the test charts.
i
i
Note: With the XL version of the X-Rite i1 iSis 2, you can read in sheets up to A3+/US Tab-
loid without cutting them to size.
Prerequisites: 
- The USB driver for the X-Rite Eye-One iSis is installed on the Color Toolbox computer.
- The X-Rite is connected to the power supply and switched on.
- The X-Rite is connected to the Color Toolbox computer via a USB cable.
50 Version 2017
Overview
Measuring Measurement Test Charts Control Strips Lineariza-

Device Condition tion Chart
M0 M1 M2 M3 ISO12642 ISO12647-2 ISO12642 ISO 12642 HD Pack- PrintOpen FOGRA ECI Gray PCM ECI Gray PCS40 ECI TECHKON P2P25 IDEA PCM (+ Mul-
ANSI plus ANSI ECI 2002 aging MultiColor V3 Control Gray Control Gray i1 bdvm Alliance ticolor)
IT8.7/4 IT8.7/3 4Color L/M/S Control M i1
L i1
i1 ISis x -- x -- x x x x x x -- *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** x
(scan)
i1 ISis 2 x x x -- x x x x x x -- *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** x
I1 Pro V2
spot x x x -- x* x* x* x* x* x x x x x x x x x x
scan x x x -- x x x x x x x x x x x
& Color- x x x --- x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Scout A+
(spot)
i1-iO
spot x x x -- x x x x x x x x x x x x x
strip x x x -- -- -- -- -- -- x -- -- -- -- -- x --
eXact

Measuring Measurement Test Charts Control Strips Lineariza-

Device Condition tion Chart
spot x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x x x x x x x x x x
strip** x x x x
& Color- x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Scout A+
(spot)
SpectroEye x -- x x x**** x**** x**** x x x x x x x x x x
SpectroDens
spot x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x x x x x x x x x x
scan x x x x x x x -- -- -- -- x x x x x x x x
not Multi-
color
& Color- x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Scout A+
(spot)
x: possible
--: not supported
* not recommended, use scan version
** not yet tested
*** not yet documented, but normally possible because of ISIS measuring procedure
**** recommended; measure using additional table
52 Version 2017
Measuring and Evaluating Spot Colors
Basic Issue
Various issues can occur in the field when working with spot colors:
• Deviations between the spot color fan and the spot color Lab table
• Deviations when a paint pot from a new batch of the spot color is used
• Differences between the color fan and the print because the color data depend on the printing
material and the material used in print is almost always different to that of the color fan.
To answer these questions, you must measure and evaluate the current spot color.
Other items to remember are:
• Is the current spot color within the gamut of the current process/profile?
• Can it be replaced by the process/profile and in what quality?
• What process stability does the spot color have in print?
Measurement and Evaluation of a Spot Color with the Color

Calculator
The following items must be remembered during evaluation, depending on the presses available in
your shop:
• How big is the difference between the actual print result and the desired reproduction of the
spot color in a print using available color material (paint pot) on the target printing material?
• Can the spot color be replaced by CMYK or, when required, by Muticolor (5c, 6c, 7c) and what
deviations are there in this (important in digital printing, for example)?
The analysis results can help you decide which print process is best suited on which machine for a
job or whether the supplied paint pot batch of a spot color can be used.

The "User_Spot_PW.ref" color data file is available in "User defined" for measuring and evaluating
spot colors.
The file consists of two color patches:
• the patch for the spot color you will measure
• and the patch for paper white (PW) of the printing material
i
i
Note: It is mandatory that you measure paper white because color values are meaningless
if you do not know anything about the material on which they will be printed.
Two options for evaluating the spot color are available to you in the "Color calculator":
• "Calculate color values" lets you analyze how well the measured color can be replaced by a
CMYK print process or with Multicolor.
• "Compare color values" shows you how far off a measured spot color is from the matching value
in the color table/color fan and consequently from the desired result.
You will find details about the color calculator in the following sections:
• "Color calculator", page 239 (functions, spot color evaluation, manual copying of color data)
• "Color calculator > Calculate color values", page 241
• "Color calculator > Compare color values", page 245
Creating a Process Standard for Spot Colors

You can create a process standard for spot colors in an easy way using an Assistant that automates
most of the steps required.
The new process standard is created based on a 4-color process standard and a data file.
1. Select a standard 4c process in the "Process standard" main function
2. and then a minispot/test chart with more than four colors (max. seven colors) in the "Measure"
main function.
3. You must assign colors manually if not all of the colors are assigned automatically when you
open the minispot/test chart. Then click "OK".
54 Version 2017
4. You will see a message, informing you that the process standard does not match the measure-
ment data and you are asked whether you wish to create a spot color process standard. Confirm
the query with "OK". A new process standard is created automatically.
The following steps run automatically (see also illustration ):
• Switch to the "Process standard" main function in the edit mode (1).
• Creation of a new name based on the 4c process name and adding the additional color name
(2).
• Adding a comment (3).
• Switch to "Spot colors" type (4).
• Enabling of additional color channels based on the minispot/test chart (the other color channels
remain disabled) (9).
• Use of the following values from the 4c process standard:
· Process colors CMYK (8)
· Paper grade (5)
· Paper white (7)
· Gray balance parameters (10)
• Creation of the dot gain curves based on the 4c process standard (6)
One of the predefined curves is used if appropriate reference is found in the profile:
• ISO 12647-2_2007 or ISO 12647-2_2007 HDM_BB) and paper grade 1 or 2 (glossy or matt coated):
Z_7c-glossy coated
• PSO ISO 12647-2_2013 and paper grade 1 or 2 (glossy or matt coated = PS1 (Premium coated or
print condition 1)): TVI_ISO13_7c_PremCoated_PS1.
• In all other cases, the dot gain curve is adapted from the 4c process.

The predefined 7c dot gain curves are also equally suited for 5c and 6c processes.
5. This automatically created process standard is sufficient in most cases. This means that you
only have to save the new process standard. (11)
After you save it, the new process standard is sorted below "[Spot colors]" in "Administration" and
defined as a new default.
Editing a generated spot color process standard

When a spot color process standard is created automatically, the values for the added spot colors are
taken from the data file (minispot/test chart). You can, however, also edit these values later on:
1. In the "Process standard" main function, click "Edit" to go to the edit mode. The "CIELab color
values and density values" view opens automatically.
2. You can now edit the spot colors in three different ways (apart from a manual change, e.g.
rounding up/down values):
• Import from measured data: You can also use data of a different measurement for single colors.
In "Measure > Test chart" mark the patch you want, import the measured data to the item you
want and match the name.
• Import from color table: The "Import from color tables" dialog opens automatically with the item
best suited.
• Pantone color from measured data: The function combines the import from measured data and
the color table. The spot color that is closest to the value of the selected patch is taken from the
table.
IMPORTANT: You must save the process standard before you select a new color item for editing
and go to "Measure" because all your changes will be lost otherwise. After you save your data,
the "Process standard" main function returns again to the view mode. This means that you must
click "Edit" again before you can make other changes. (You can find details about the three func-
tions in "Show/Hide CIELab color values and density values, page 225).
56 Version 2017
Multicolor
Multicolor
What is Multicolor?
The term 'multicolor' comprises all technologies and processes that produce print results in a quality
superior to that of conventional four-color printing. These include:
• printing with five, six or seven process colors
• the use of spot colors
• the use of GCR reproduction
• the use of special screening methods
• the use of high-quality printing materials
• surface treatment of the printed products
Multicolor opens up a market segment to repro users that is characterized by high quality, high color
fidelity and enhanced color gamut. Seven-color printing expands the color space by special ink sets
with purer and more chromatic colors: in addition to cyan, magenta and yellow, the red, green and
blue inks are also changed.
As a result, it is possible to match real colors more closely. Consequently, reproductions with a
greater color intensity are possible. These points are interesting for art reproduction and for printing
calendars, posters or high-quality brochures.
Special techniques for separation such as GCR reproduction produce more stable neutral tones as
these are generated with black ink only. In addition to enhanced shadow definition, there is also less
color drift and wet-on-wet problems with this technology.
Frequency-modulated screening suppresses moirés and the formation of rosettes, thus producing a
photo-realistic quality in printing. This method is especially suited to printing with more than four
inks.
Multicolor is used to refer to printing processes where the color space is extended by additional chro-
matic process colors. In this process, separation of image data and graphics is not only with the nor-
mal process colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) but also with additional chromatic process col-
ors (HiFi Color, Hexachrome, five, six or seven-color printing).
By contrast, all processes where any number of single spot colors are used are not referred to as mul-
ticolor. In this case, there is no separation of image data and/or graphics with the additional colors.
It is also not a multicolor process if one of the process colors is replaced by a spot color (e.g. magenta
by red) in conventional four-color printing.

Multicolor
Multicolor profiles are especially suited for the use of classic screening methods. Each color is repro-
duced by a maximum of four optimal colors. This minimizes the risk of moiré. The use of amplitude-
modulated screening is possible. The screen angles for the additional colors are selected so that the
angle of the complementary color is used, for example:
• Orange with the screen angle of cyan, its complementary color
• Green with the screen angle of magenta, its complementary color
• The formation of moiré, however, must be expected if blue is used with the screen angle of its
complementary color (yellow). For that reason, it's better to use the angle of magenta or black.
Definition of the Process Colors for Multicolor
Combinations
The vertices cyan (C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y) on the a*b* plane produce three sectors. In mul-
ticolor, one additional color is added to these process colors per sector. Together with black, the fol-
lowing combinations result:
58 Version 2017
Multicolor
• Five-color printing:
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black and red (or orange)
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black and green
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black and blue (or purple)
• Six-color printing:
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, red (or orange) and green
· Hexachrome: Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, orange and green
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, red (or orange) and blue
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, green and blue (or purple)
• Seven-color printing:
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, red (or orange), green and blue (or purple)
Multicolor Features in Prinect Color Toolbox

Creating ICC profiles for five, six or seven process colors using the integrated Profile Tool application
is a "real" multicolor function (see Creating Multicolor Profiles).
The color calculator lets you calculate target values for four different Rendering Intents using a loaded
multicolor profile and view them as CMYK and spot color values. The accuracy that is possible for the
reproduction of the source value is calculated for the set printing process by means of the profile and
shown as differential color values.
It is also possible to convert percent target values (CMYK and spot color values) into Lab, XYZ or LCH
values.
Various application functions for evaluating and checking quality data are enhanced by Multicolor.
For example, you can check the print quality by using additional spot colors (not process colors)
because Prinect Color Toolbox supports the import and export of eight color channels. This means
that you can evaluate all the control strips used in Prinect Image Control.

Multicolor
The "Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the dot gain for as many as twelve
colors. "Prinect_6S" contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The order of
the colors depends on the setup of the printing units in Prinect Image Control and it can be changed
there.
Process standards
At present, there are no process standards defined for printing processes with more than four process
colors. However, you can use the appropriate functions (e.g. dot gain, ink stability and gradual fading)
to check whether the color data of the four conventional process colors comply with a process stan-
dard you selected. In doing so, remember that the nominal values and tolerances in the process stan-
dard are specified for colors of a four-color printing process. Special color sets are used for HiFi
Color/Multicolor printing processes. Consequently, the defaults can vary greatly.
Prinect Color Toolbox lets you create your own process standards for multicolors and spot colors. For
Multicolor printing processes, you can define reference and tolerance values for a maximum of seven
process colors (see Combinations):
• for the primary colors cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K)
• for as many as three additional secondary colors, red (R) or orange (O), green (G) and/or blue
(B) or purple (V)
60 Version 2017
Multicolor
Example: Select and edit process standard. Display of a multicolor process standard for seven colors.
Example: Check measurement data for compliance with process standard. All process colors defined (CMYK and RGB) are
evaluated.

Multicolor
Creating Multicolor Profiles

You can create multicolor profiles with Prinect Color Toolbox. To do this, you need the color data of
special multicolor test charts that you obtain either by measuring a suitable two-page test chart in
"Measure" or directly from Prinect Image Control.
Multicolor test charts

Prinect Color Toolbox has special test charts as PDF files on a data CD shipped with the software.
The following two-page test charts are available:
• 5 colors (5 C): test charts for CMYK+R, CMYK+O, CMYK+G, CMYK+B or CMYK+V
• 6 colors (6 C): test charts for CMYK+RG, CMYK+OG, CMYK+RB, CMYK+OB, CMYK+GB
CMYK+GV
• 7 colors (7 C): test charts for CMYK+RGB, CMYK+OGB, CMYK+RGV or CMYK+OGV
You select the test chart that suits your work and then print it with the printing process you want.
i
i
Note: Field tests have shown that zonal influences can be minimized if you print the test
chart pages several times and average the measured data. The double positioning of the
two test chart pages at diagonal opposites on one sheet has also proven to be successful
(see diagram below).
To measure the data, pull three sheets so that you can average the color data of six elements in each
case.
62 Version 2017
Multicolor
You measure the printed test chart with a spectrophotometer in "Measure". The special test charts
suited for automatic measurement in the scan mode (with X-Rite Eye-One iSis) are located on the DVD
in the "DVD\Prinect Profile Tool Test Charts\Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\MultiColor Charts\5C (6C or
7C)\i1-iSis" folders. As an alternative, you can measure the data in Prinect Image Control and export
them to Prinect Color Toolbox.
Procedure for Measuring Data in Prinect Color Toolbox:

To measure your data, create an empty color data file to which the color data will be sent directly
during online measurement.
1. Call up the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by clicking "New" in the button bar
or with the "File > New" menu.
2. In this dialog, select the multicolor test chart for five, six or seven colors and the spot colors you
want.
3. Confirm with "OK".
The test chart consists of two pages. You can switch the view with the list box at the top right of the
dialog.

Multicolor
4. Open the "Color measurement of test chart" dialog by clicking "Measure" or with the "Test chart
> Measure" menu.
5. Select the connected device from the list.
6. Click "Connect" to establish the connection between the device and the application.
7. Click "Calibrate".
8. Click "Start" when calibration is finished.
9. Follow the instructions that are necessary for measuring the colors with your device.
10. Measure the first page of the test chart.
11. Check the measured values by clicking "Check".
12. Go to the second page of the test chart.
13. Measure and check this page too.
14. Then click "Save measurement data".
The color data of both pages are saved together in one file.
Importing the Measured Data from Prinect Image Control

In Prinect Image Control, the measured data of both test chart pages are saved separately in two
color data files. You must save these two files as one joint one if you wish to copy the data to Prinect
Color Toolbox.
64 Version 2017
Multicolor
1. Open the file with the color data of the first test chart page (e.g. "<jobname><date>Sheet1-
Mask-7cCMYKRGB-Page1-42x30-1.txt").
The list box at the top right no longer appears because the file only has the color data of one page.
2. Open the file with the color data of the second test chart page (e.g. "<jobname><date>Sheet1-
Mask-7cCMYKRGB-Page2-42x30-2.txt").
The list box displays again. The first page of the test chart displays but the file name of the second
page!

Multicolor
3. Click "Save measurement data".

The name of the second page is entered as the file name.
4. If necessary, change this name and then click "Save".
The color data of both pages are saved together in one file.
Smoothing of the Color Data
i
i
Note: Depending on the quality of your color data, you can still smooth them with factor 5
and enable the automatic plausibility check (display this dialog with "Test Chart > Correct -
Smoothing").
66 Version 2017
Multicolor
Setup and Calculation

You can set up and calculate ICC profiles for five, six or seven colors from the color data in "Create".
Procedure:
1. Open the "Profile calculation" dialog by clicking "Generate profile".
2. Define the following settings:
• Total dot area: 330%
• "Maximum black": 95%
• To have stable printing, gray is generated by GCR mainly with black.
"GCR setting/Black generation > GCR black generation > GCR value": 50%
This increases stability because no additional colors are needed for gray.
i
i
Note: You can also set higher values for GCR (e.g. 60% or 90%) that give you usable
results in printing.
Other settings are possible, in particular UCR.
3. Select "Large (16 bit profile)" as the profile size.

The profile size lets you determine what amount in the profile is needed for simulation of the printing
process.
• "Large" profile size: extended proof area
• "Medium" profile size: reduced proof area
• "Small" profile size: insufficient proof area
4. Check or add to the profile description that was set automatically.

5. Start calculation with "Start".
6. After calculation of the profile is finished, close the dialog by clicking "OK".
7. Click "Save" to save your profile as the suggested file name.
i
i
Note: Multicolor profiles do not support inverse gamut mapping (perceptual Rendering
Intent).
You can supplement existing ICC profiles and/or make corrections to them in the "Edit" main func-
tion.

Multicolor
Match a Multicolor Profile to Other Print Conditions

You can convert a multicolor profile if print conditions change (e.g. values of the process colors or
paper white).
Up to now, you had to make another proof print of the multicolor test chart with the modified process
colors and measure it. After that, you had to calculate a multicolor profile with the new parameters.
Prinect Color Toolbox lets you convert the existing multicolor profile by entering the Lab values of the
modified process colors or of paper white. The existing multicolor profile is matched automatically
when you enter the new values and you can continue to use it.
Conversion of the color data (Lab color values) of paper white for a modified process
Conversion of color data (Lab color values) for a modified process
You can obtain the measured data by proofing and measuring a minispot with the modified print con-
ditions. Use one of the following minispots that suits your printing process.
PCS_5C for CMYK+R
PCS_5C for CMYK+G
PCS_5C for CMYK+B
68 Version 2017
Multicolor
PCS_6C for CMYK+R+G
PCS_7C for CMYK+R+G+B
This means that you do not have print and measure a (large) test chart and also do not have calculate
a new profile.

Measure - Functions
Measure - Functions
'Test chart' View
Display of the test chart

This view mode shows you the currently loaded test chart file and its patches. The number of patches
in the palette depends of the type of test chart/control element.
The color patches are reproduced as precisely as possible on the monitor (depending on the color
depth set for the monitor and the monitor calibration).
Field, Ref [%], Ref. [Lab], Ref. [XYZ], Spectrum, Density
The following information and reference values display beside the graphic when you move the mouse
pointer to a patch or enable the patch with a click (the patch is highlighted by a red-and-white frame):
• Field: Displays information about the current patch in the test chart or the control element
· ID = patch number, e.g. "N 18"
· ID = patch number, e.g. "205"
· x = column number, e.g. "18"
· y = row number, e.g. "14"
• Ref. [%]: Displays cyan, magenta, yellow, and black screen percents for the current patch.
• Ref. [Lab]: Displays the Lab values for the current patch.
• Ref. [XYZ]: Displays the XYZ values for the current patch.

Measure - Functions
• Spectrum" Displays the spectral values for the current patch. An appropriate message displays
if there are no spectral values.
• Density: Displays absolute or relative cyan, magenta, yellow, and black density values for the
current patch.
i
i
Note: You set the density display (absolute or relative) in the "Preferences" dialog ("Mea-
surement" tab).
Right-click Display
The mouse pointer position shows you additional information about the color patch when you right-
click this. You can view the following information, if it is available:
• Measured values: Displays the number of patches in the loaded test chart or test strip.
• Reference values: Displays the CMYK values for the current patch.
• Density values: Displays the density values for the current patch.
• XYZ values: Displays the XYZ values for the current patch.
• Spectral values: Displays the spectrum for the current patch if you have spectral values.
• delta E, delta ab: Displays the differential value between another selected patch and the current
patch. The ΔE value and Δab value is zero if the patches are identical.
You can use this function, for example, to check the gray balance. Click a patch that only has black,
then point to the relevant gray patch and right-click at the mouse pointer position. The ΔE value and
the Δab value between these two patches display.
Viewing Locked Zones

You can lock zones in Prinect Image Control. An appropriate message displays above the main func-
tion bar if you open a color data file with locked zones in Prinect Color Toolbox. You can view the
locked zones by hitting "Z" on the keyboard. All the patches in the locked zone are covered by a flash-
ing white bar. You can clear the display by hitting "Z" again.
More information about the different test charts and graphics can be found in "Test Charts and
Control Strips", page 277.
72 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
'Process standard' View

The process standards are checked in the "Measure" tab and set up in the "Process standard" tab.
You can find a detailed description on how to check process standards in: Measure - Check
compliance with process standard, page 103
'Substrate' View
This view shows details for paper white.
• The CIELab color values (actual values) for paper white display at the top of the view, with the
calculated color distance ΔEab above them as a decimal value and a bar.
• The ΔL* value displays in the middle as a bar and to its right chroma difference ΔCh* displays
on the ab plane.
• The lower part of the view displays differential values ΔL*, Δa* and Δb* and the ΔE00 value cal-
culated using the new color distance formula that is much more accurate than the ΔEab value.
The ΔE values are marked by colors:

• green if they are within the tolerance range
• red if they are outside it.
Currently, the single differential values ΔL*, Δa* and Δb* are evaluated for the printing material and
not ΔE.
'Color values' View

These diagrams show details about the CIELab color values.
• The CIELab color values (actual values) display at the top for each of the primary colors cyan
(C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K), with the calculated color distance ΔEab above them
as a decimal value and a bar.
• The ΔL* value displays in the middle as a bar and to its right chroma difference ΔCh* displays
on the ab plane.
• The lower part displays differential values ΔL*, Δa* and Δb* and the ΔE00 value calculated using
the new color distance formula that is much more accurate than the ΔEab value.
Below that you can view the same diagrams for each of the secondary colors red (R), green (G) and
blue (B).

Measure - Functions
The ΔE values are marked by colors:

At the very bottom, the values for density and the difference in density display, each indicated by a
bar.
'Dot gain' View

The dot gain curves of the printing process (process colors, mixed colors and/or spot colors) are
shown in the diagram. You can also switch over and view the printing characteristic curve here. You
can also view the related data table.
The dot gain curves or printing characteristics are calculated on the basis of real density values if you
also measured the density when measuring the colors (selected in the "Preferences" dialog).
If you don't, the density values are calculated from the spectral values or, if the latter were also not
measured, by general approximation from the Lab(xyz) values.
i
i
Note: The heading above the graph indicates how the tonal values or printing characteristic
were determined:
• "Display of the dot gain curve/printing characteristic (Measured density values)" if you have
density values.
• "Display of the dot gain curve/printing characteristic (Approximated tonal values ISO 12647-1)"
in red if density values are calculated.
Diagram
You can select the type of diagram you want to the right of the diagram:
• Dot gain: Display of the dot gain curves
• Printing Characteristic: Display of the printing characteristic
The dots shown are the measured values that are used to determine the dot gain.
You select the curves that you want to view in "View".
Display
In the list box, select the colors of the curves that will be shown.
The curves can be displayed together or separately. The number of colors depends on the data file
you selected. Prinect Color Toolbox supports the import and export of eight color channels. The color
names are taken from the color data file.
74 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
i
i
Note: When you save your quality data in Prinect Image Control, the color names are used
for the setup of the printing units. It is possible that the same color name is used because
of the automatic assignment of the different hues. If necessary, you can change these
names (in Prinect Image Control).
It is possible to view the dot gain curves or printing characteristic for a maximum of eight colors. How-
ever, the "Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the dot gain for as many as
twelve colors. "Prinect_6S" contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The
order of the colors depends on the setup of the printing units in Prinect Image Control and it can be
changed there.
A table is hidden below the graph. View this by dragging the horizontal bar upwards with the mouse.
This makes the curve diagram smaller (see Data Table).
You can print the curve diagram and its data table as a log (see "General Information about Printing
Your Data", page 272).
You can also just print or save the curves or zoom in or out of parts of the diagram (see Context-
sensitive Menu).
Process standard
You can also display the tolerance range and/or standard curve of the process standard for cyan,
magenta, yellow and black by checking the appropriate box when viewing these four process colors
separately. You can also view the three chromatic process colors (CMY) jointly.
"Spot colors" also displays in "View" if you selected a spot color or multicolor process standard.
• Process standard Display of the tolerance range for the current process standard by a green area
above or below the dot gain curves. Optimally, the curves should be in the middle of the toler-
ance range.
• Standard curve: Display of a green curve defined for the process standard if the single process
colors (cyan, magenta, yellow or black) or joint CMY are selected.
i
i
Note: You can replace the process standard you are currently using by selecting a different
one in the "Process standard" main function.
Dot gain curves

Dot gain is the enlargement of screen dots by the printing process. An image can thus appear darker
and/or a color shift may occur.
Normally, dot gain is measured in the midtones at 40% and in the shadows at 80%.

Measure - Functions
Printing Characteristic
Printing characteristic is used to illustrate in screen percent the relation of the dot areas in print to
those on the film or in the data set. The ideal printing characteristic is linear and rises at an angle of
45°. 
The printing characteristic depends on the ink used, the properties of the paper, the print form and
the way the press works.
The printing characteristics that are determined only apply to the process conditions at hand. If the
same data are to be produced on a different press or on different printing stock, the printing charac-
teristics will also change.
Data Table
You can view the data table if you drag the horizontal bar below the curve diagram upwards. This
makes the curve diagram smaller. All the colors are always shown in the data table, irrespective of
the curve you select in the "View" list. If necessary, you can move the visible section using the scroll
bars.
The table displays the following values, separately for the four process colors:
• dot gain (%)
• deviation from the process standard (Δ)
The dot gain is shown for all other colors. All the dot areas (%) in the test chart or control element
are taken into account. Values that are not defined in the process standard are calculated from the
curves.
Context-sensitive Menu
You have the following additional functions through the context-sensitive menu (generally right-click)
in curve diagrams:
• Save as: to save the graphic as a PNG file (*.png, Portable Network Graphics). This format is
suitable for viewing the graphic on a web site, supports a color depth of 24 bits and uses a loss-
less method of compression.
• Print: opens the normal Windows print dialog with page and printer settings for printing the
graphic.
• Zoom in: to scale up a curve section in the graphic either in horizontal or vertical direction or
symmetrically in both directions.
• Zoom out: to scale down a curve section in the graphic either in horizontal or vertical direction
or symmetrically in both directions.
76 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
• Auto Range: to reset the zoom functions, either in horizontal or vertical direction or symmetri-
cally in both directions.
'Gray values' View

The last details view displays the gray values.
Gray balance is not a set feature in the ISO standard but is a requirement in the GRACOL standard.
However, the gray balance process standard check as a quality indicator for high-quality print prod-
ucts is also very useful in the "ISO environment".
i
i
Note: This check shows values only if you use a minispot to check the gray balance (see
also "'ECI_GrayConL', 'ECI_GrayConM' and 'ECI_GrayConS' with 52, 32 or 6 Patches", page
310).
• GrayConL_...: This refers to the long version of the test strip with 52 patches. It is to be placed
vertically, parallel to printing direction, and is especially suited for checking ink balance and any
faults in gray balance.
• GrayConM_... (GrayConM_Eye1_...): This refers to the medium version of the test strip with 32
patches (there are less graduations in the primary colors). This strip should only be used if there
is not enough room for the "L" version.
• GrayConS_...: This refers to the small version of the test strip with only six patches (three gray
balance pairs). This test strip is designed only for a visual check.
In addition to checking the dot gain and the CIELab and density values, you can also check the gray
balance with this evaluation.
The additional grays of the control strip (K30, K50, K70 and their corresponding chromatic grays in
CMY) are evaluated for gray balance. The results display in a table and a graph.
The ISO 12647-2 process standard specifies that a gray composed of the three chromatic process col-
ors has the same L*, a* and b* values (CIELab) as an identical gray that is printed only with black.
In this case, the L*, a* and b* values for three real grays (black only) are compared at 30%, 50%
and 70% with those of the identical chromatic grays (cyan, magenta and yellow) and shown as a
table and a diagram with the calculated differential values for chroma difference (ΔCh* (Ch* =
chroma)) and lightness distance (ΔE):
• green if the deviations are within the tolerance range
Chroma (Ch*) describes the intensity of the difference in color. It describes what makes this color dif-
ferent from one which is perceived as achromatic and has the same degree of brightness. Terms such
as gray, pastel-colored, very chromatic, etc. are used to describe this property. Chroma depends
greatly on lightness. Colors perceived as being very light or very dark have only a slight amount of
chroma.

Measure - Functions
Chroma difference ΔCh* describes color casts that are perceived much more in neutral gray areas of
an image than in chromatic areas.
ΔCh* is the geometric distance between reference and target on the ab plane.
In the "Preferences", "'Individual Quality Index (IQI)' tab", page 271, in "Gray balance" you can define
the tolerance for the gray balance check within the process standard check. The sampling points are
"K30", "K50" and "K70".
The default value is 3.0. Values ranging between 3.0 and 4.0 make sense. The permissible values for
the evaluations lie between 0 and 10.
Minispots for the evaluation of gray balance

Four variants of a new minispot are also available for the evaluation of the gray balance:
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_39: Paper grade 1 and 2, gloss coated and matt coated
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_43: FM screen, paper grade 1 and 2, gloss coated and matt coated
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_44: FM screen, paper grade 4, uncoated white
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_47: Paper grade 4, uncoated white
The advantages of these minispots are that there are 10 color patches for each color channel, in addi-
tion six color patches for the evaluation and calculation of the gray balance: K30, K50, K70 as well
as CMY30, CMY50 and CMY70. You can measure these strips with the X-Rite EyeOne strip in two
measure runs.
'Ink zones' View

You can view "Display of the ink zones", for example, if you evaluate the "Color Calibration Test
Chart" with the appropriate control element (see "Loading a Combined Test Chart", page 87). You can
also use a test strip with information about the ink zones that has solid tint patches in each ink zone.
In this case, for example, the print control strips found on every press sheet are suitable for evalua-
tion of the data.
This view lets you check the ink stability of a press sheet. The ink stability indicates whether ink is
applied evenly in every ink zone.
A diagram of the ΔE values displays by default. You can select between the following view modes in
the list box:
• Show density
• Show ΔE
• Show density table
78 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
• Show ΔE table
The standard curve (continuous line in the relevant color) and the tolerance range (green) of the pro-
cess standard are shown when you view the curves. You can select the process standard that you
wish to view in the "Process standard" main function. You can also change the tolerance range in this
window, if it is necessary.
i
i
Note: You can set tolerances for the ink zones and gradual fading in the "Preferences > Tol
[%]" dialog. These tolerances do not refer to the process standard when you assess density.
This is where you define a threshold that refers to an evaluation diagram that displays for
the single views (see Show density). 
Each single view of the ΔE evaluation displays the process standard tolerance for the color
you selected.
Show density
The graph shows the solid tint density curves for all defined color channels for the various ink zones.
The tolerance ranges of the process standard are also shown in green for the four process colors black
(DV BLACK), cyan (DV CYAN), magenta (DV MAGENTA) and yellow (DV YELLOW).
The ink zones used (position on the press sheet) are recorded on the horizontal axis and the mea-
sured solid tint densities on the vertical axis. The broken line indicates the mean in all the ink zones
used for each color.
It is possible to view the solid tint density curves for a maximum of eight colors. However, the
"Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the density values for as many as twelve
the colors depends on the setup of the printing units (e.g. in Prinect Image Control).
Click anywhere within a color channel to view this color with a scale range.
The maximum deviation from the mean is shown in percent for this channel to the right of the curve.
You can set tolerances for the ink zones in the "Preferences > Tol [%]" dialog. By doing this, you
define the limit up to which the maximum deviation from the mean can be accepted. This is indicated
by a green area in the graphic. The red area indicates the part outside the set tolerance.

Measure - Functions
Show Delta E
The graph shows the ΔE values for all defined color channels for the various ink zones.
Green indicates the tolerance ranges of the process standard for the four process colors black (ΔE
BLACK), cyan (ΔE CYAN), magenta (ΔE MAGENTA) and yellow (ΔE YELLOW).
The ink zones used (position on the press sheet) are recorded on the horizontal axis and the calcu-
lated ΔE values on the vertical axis. The broken line indicates the mean in all the ink zones used for
each color.
It is possible to view the ΔE values for a maximum of eight colors. However, the "Prinect_6S" and
"Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the ΔE values for as many as twelve colors. "Prinect_6S"
contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The order of the colors depends
on the setup of the printing units (e.g. in Prinect Image Control).
80 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
Example: ΔE values shown for magenta
The Lab values of the process standard you selected and the mean values (Average) calculated from
the actual Lab values are shown to the right of the curve. Light green indicates the tolerance of the
process standard.
Show density table

The table lists all available solid tint density values of the defined color channels for each zone that
is taken into account. The deviation from the mean is also shown in each case. You can use the scroll
bar to move the part that you can view up or down.
Show Delta E table

The table lists all available ΔE values of the process colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) for each
zone that is taken into account. The deviation from the mean is also shown in each case. You can use
the scroll bar to move the part that you can view up or down.

Measure - Functions
'Gradual fading' View

Like the "Display of the ink zones", you can also view "Display of the gradual fading", for example, if
you evaluate the "Color Calibration Test Chart" with the appropriate control element (see "Loading a
Combined Test Chart", page 87). You can also use a test element with solid tint patches that runs ver-
tically along the entire press sheet.
This view lets you check any gradual fading on a press sheet.
A diagram of the ΔE values displays by default. You can select between the following view modes in
the list box:
• Show density
• Show ΔE
• Show density table
• Show ΔE table
The standard curve (continuous line in the relevant color) and the tolerance range (green) of the pro-
cess standard are shown when you view the curves. You can select the process standard that you
wish to view in the "Process standard" main function. You can also change the tolerance range in this
window, if it is necessary.
i
i
Note: You can set tolerances for the ink zones and gradual fading in the "Preferences > Tol
[%]" dialog. These tolerances do not refer to the process standard when you assess density.
This is where you define a threshold that refers to an evaluation diagram that displays for
the single views (see Show density). 
you selected.
Show density
The graph shows the solid tint density curves for all defined color channels depending on the vertical
position on the press sheet. Green indicates the tolerance ranges of the process standard for the four
process colors black (DV BLACK), cyan (DV CYAN), magenta (DV MAGENTA) and yellow (DV YEL-
LOW).
The vertical spacing (measured in mm from the top edge of the press sheet) is recorded on the hori-
zontal axis and the measured solid tint densities are recorded on the vertical axis. The broken line
indicates the mean in the printed area for each color.
It is possible to view the solid tint density curves for a maximum of eight colors. However, the
"Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the density values for as many as twelve
the colors depends on the setup of the printing units (e.g. in Prinect Image Control).
82 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
Example: Density values shown for cyan
The maximum deviation from the mean is shown in percent for this channel to the right of the curve.
You can set tolerances for gradual fading in the "Preferences > Tol [%]" dialog. By doing this, you
define the limit up to which the maximum deviation from the mean can be accepted. This is indicated
by a green area in the graphic. The red area indicates the part outside the set tolerance.
In our example, the maximum deviation from the mean in percent is in the green area.
Show Delta E
The graph shows the ΔE values for all defined color channels for the various ink zones. Green indi-
cates the tolerance ranges of the process standard for the four process colors black (ΔE BLACK), cyan
(ΔE CYAN), magenta (ΔE MAGENTA) and yellow (ΔE YELLOW).
The vertical spacing (measured in mm from the top edge of the press sheet) is recorded on the hori-
zontal axis and the calculated ΔE values are recorded on the vertical axis. The broken line indicates
the mean in the printed area for each color.
It is possible to view the ΔE values for a maximum of eight colors. However, the "Prinect_6S" and
"Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the ΔE values for as many as twelve colors. "Prinect_6S"
contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The order of the colors depends
on the setup of the printing units (e.g. in Prinect Image Control).
The Lab values of the process standard you selected and the mean values (Average) calculated from
the actual Lab values are shown to the right of the curve. Light green indicates the tolerance of the
process standard.

Measure - Functions
Show density table

The table lists all available solid tint density values of the defined color channels for each solid tint
patch in vertical direction. The deviation from the mean is also shown in each case. You can use the
scroll bar to move the part that you can view up or down.
Show Delta E table

The table lists all available ΔE values of the defined color channels for each solid tint patch in vertical
direction. The deviation from the mean is also shown in each case. You can use the scroll bar to move
the part that you can view up or down.
'ab diagram' View

You open this view by clicking the "ab diagram" tab. In principle, this view is equivalent to the "ab
diagram" in "Compare" (see 'ab diagram' View, page 127).
On the ab plane, the print process in the L*a*b* color space is viewed from above, i.e. from the direc-
tion of white, and the lightness axis L* is perpendicular to the red-green a* axis and the yellow-blue
b* axis. The closer a color is to the edge of the diagram, the greater its chroma. The angle indicates
the hue. Every color mixture can be defined uniquely and displayed in the L*a*b* color space.
In the ab diagram, lines join up the locations of primary and secondary colors and give you an idea
of the size of the color gamut.
The "ab diagram" view is available only if "Show ab diagram in measured data evaluation" is enabled
in "Preferences > General" (see 'Preferences' Dialog, page 264).
'Dot gain table' View

This view shows you the dot gains of each color in a table. It is equivalent to the data table described
in Data Table, page 76.
The "Dot gain table" view is available only if "Show dot gain table in measured data evaluation" is
enabled in "Preferences > General" (see 'Preferences' Dialog, page 264).
84 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
'Color Toolbox - New measurement file' Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "New" in the button bar or with the "File > New" menu.
i
i
Note: You can open an existing color data file or an ICC output profile (with measured data)
created with Prinect Color Toolbox with the "File > Open" menu.
Measurement of new test chart

In this dialog, you can select a test chart, control element or linearization strip to create a file where
the measured color data and any other settings (e.g. process parameters) will be saved.
Confirm your selection by clicking "OK". The dialog closes. 
A new (empty) document with gray patches now appears in the application window.
Use the appropriate menu commands or buttons to call up the other dialogs, for example:
• to open an existing file with measured data
• for colorimetric measurement of the test chart or control element (see 'Color measurement of
test chart' Dialog)
• to extract data from test charts (see 'Extracting test chart data' Dialog)
• to set process parameters (see Process parameters, page 251)
• to set the profile parameters and calculate the profile (see "'Profile calculation' dialog", page
172)
Create a new data file by selecting either a test chart, test strip or linearization strip from the appro-
priate list boxes. A miniature of the test chart or control element appears below the list boxes.
You can set which elements will display and which will be selected by default in the preferences in
the "Test chart" tab (see "'Test chart' tab", page 267).
You will find details about all available test charts and control strips in: "Test Charts and Control
Strips", page 277
Test chart
Select a test chart from this list (see also "Overview of the Test Charts", page 278). 
The "ISO 12642..." test charts are listed as "Visual" and "Random" versions. They only differ in the
arrangement of the color patches. In the "Random" version of the test chart, the patches are arranged
in such a way that the ink is always applied evenly in the ink zones when the test chart is proof-
printed to a press. You select the test chart type by clicking the relevant radio button below the list.
Control strip
Select a control strip from this list (see also "Control Strips", page 303).
Some of the strips are available in different versions. You can select the "Type" you want by clicking
the appropriate radio button below the list.
i
i
Note on "User defined": You can also define any number of your own minispots (test
strips). First, you must open a reference file (e.g. "User_Defined.ref"). Then you can click
"Edit" and modify the test strip (for a description, see 'Edit control strip' Dialog).

Measure - Functions
Linearization strip
Select a linearization strip from this list (see also "CMY-K Linearization Strips", page 314).
Some of the strips are available in different versions. You can select the "Type" you want by clicking
the appropriate radio button below the list.
When you have printed the test chart or test strip, the next step is to measure the color patches with
a measuring device in the 'Color measurement of test chart' Dialog.
'Edit control strip' Dialog

You can call up this dialog in the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by selecting the
"User defined" test strip, loading a reference file and then clicking "Edit".
You can define your own control element in this dialog.
All the boxes are set with default values that vary according to the reference data:
You can create your own test strip on the basis of these values or import other measured data with
"Import reference data".
Name of the control strip
You cannot change the file name afterwards ("User defined"). However, you can give the reference
data any name ("Save" in "Color Toolbox - New measurement file").
Geometry
You will find the "Number of patches", "Number of rows" and "Number of columns" of your test strip
in this section.
After checking the "Change geometry" box, you can change the "Number of rows" and "Number of
columns". The system automatically calculates the "Number of patches". Rows are marked by letters
and columns by numbers.
The "ID" in the data table is computed from this information, e.g. if you have 2 rows and 10 columns,
the table automatically displays IDs "A1" thru "A10" and "B1" thru "B10" (a total of 20 rows).
Each row in the data table corresponds to one patch, displaying the CMYK values and the color. New
patches are first created as white boxes (0% CMYK).
All patches can be edited as desired. The color in the box is matched automatically.
i
i
Note: Any defined patches are deleted or moved to a different position if you change the
geometry later.
The dialog then closes when you click "OK".

A miniature of the new element displays (if possible) in the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file"
dialog.
A new (empty) document with gray patches appears in the application window when you click "OK".
If you made changes, you can first save the modified file under a new name.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without changing the user-defined control element.
86 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
Loading a Combined Test Chart

When you open a combined test chart, you must select which element you wish to use. An overview
displays, allowing you to select the test element you want with a click. The test element (for example,
for checking the zonal ink stability) is marked red and you can load or extract it by clicking the appro-
priate button. Alternatively, you can load the test element by double-clicking it.
After the element is opened, a small overview lets you view the position of the test element in the
combined test chart when you right-click the file name in the status bar.
'Color measurement of test chart' Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Measure" in the button bar or with the "Test chart > Measure"
menu.
In this dialog, you first configure a colorimeter for measurement of the color patches, then you can
measure the data and finally check the values measured. The measured data are saved to the data
file and displayed in the current view.

Measure - Functions
Measurement device setup

The list contains all devices that can be used for online measurement of the patches in a printed test
chart or test strip. In the Preferences, you can confine the list of displayed measuring devices to those
you actually use to make selection easier when you measure the data (see "Preferred measurement
devices", page 267).
The device must be connected to your PC (details can be found in the respective manual of your
device and/or in "Types of Colorimeters", page 37).
When you select your device, the program and the device are connected by clicking "Connect".
The device is automatically initialized. During this process, the following parameters are set:
• Measurement of spectral or XYZ values (if the device cannot measure spectral values)
• Illuminant D50
• Observer angle 2
Those colorimeters where measurement is automatic also show a graphic display of the test chart.
For automatic measurement, for example, using the GretagMacbeth SpectroScan table, you must set
reference positions. These can be seen in the diagram below.
If you use strip readers (e.g. GretagMacbeth iCColor, X-Rite DTP41) for automatic measurement, you
must specify the type of strip (15, 30 or 45).
The colorimeter must be calibrated every time before you start measuring. Follow the instructions
that appear after you click "Calibrate". These can vary from device to device. 
White calibration is usually performed on a white tile of a calibration target or base plate included in
the shipment of the colorimeter.
You can check "Start automatically" in "Save and Repeat chart measurement" if you wish to run a
series of measurements with the same measuring device. This means that you do not have to recal-
ibrate your device before you measure the next element. You save your color data after measurement
by clicking "Save". You can then start to measure the next element immediately.
Color measurement / Measurement conditions
This box shows the instrument settings and which values will be saved in the measurement data file.
If possible, all the values (density and/or spectral values if supported by the device) should be mea-
sured.
i
i
Note: You can define your settings for measurement and the instrument in the "Preferences
> Measure" dialog. However, these changes will only apply to the next document created.
Filter
You can change the ISO measurement condition not only in the Preferences but also in the "Color
measurement" dialog. This lets you measure paper white directly in the test chart under different
conditions, for example, to determine the degree of fluorescent whitening in the paper. The change is
then applied as a new setting in the Preferences.
88 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
You can select only measurement conditions that are supported by the currently setup measuring
device. This means: For older measuring devices, only M0 (= non-specified illumination) is available.
Only Konica Minolta FD-7 and X-Rite Eye-One (except for the "IO (strip)" variant) offer a selection of
all four filter conditions (see "Overview of the Colorimeters", page 38 for details about these devices).
Color patch measurement
Measurement depends on the device you selected. Position the device over the patch you wish to
measure, insert the strip or set the reference positions for test chart readers and then click "Start".
The next patch in the sequence is then automatically activated after each measurement. If you
enabled "Single step measurement", only the selected patch is measured and remains selected after
measurement.
You can cancel measurement at any time by clicking "Stop", for example, if the position you chose
was wrong.
i
i
Note: If you cancel measurement with "Stop", you can save the color data you have mea-
sured so far with the "Save As" dialog. Later you can open this color data file again and con-
tinue measuring the color patches.
Procedure: Select your colorimeter, connect and calibrate it, activate the next patch you
wish to measure and start measurement.
The patches are measured as follows, varying according to the device you use:
• With handheld devices, measurement is triggered by pressing down the measuring head or by
pressing the button on the device.
• With strip readers (e.g. X-Rite DTP41), a strip of the special test chart is scanned and automati-
cally measured.
• The entire test chart is measured automatically if you use GretagMacbeth iCColor, X-Rite Eye-
One iSis or X-Rite DTP70.
• With GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip), press down the measure button and slowly move along the
scanning ruler over the patches of the special test chart.
• With X-Rite PULSE (strip), a target ID must first be scanned. Press the Operation button and
slowly move the device along the Pathfinder guide over the patches of the special test chart.
• With GretagMacbeth SpectroScan and GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO, all the color patches are
automatically selected and measured in succession once the reference positions have been set.
Further details about the devices can be found in the manuals of the respective manufacturers and
in "Types of Colorimeters", page 37.
Check measured test chart values
Click "Check" to start an analysis of the values measured. During the analysis, the program examines
all the results in their context. Implausible values are marked by a question mark. Such values may
either have been provoked by the specific properties of your printing process or are simply measuring
errors.

Measure - Functions
If one or the other question mark appears, measuring errors may have occurred. If there are many
question marks, it is more likely that the values measured were provoked by certain properties in
your printing process.
Measure all patches with a question mark again. However, if question marks recur in the relevant
patches after the analysis has been concluded, but you are sure that the proof of the test chart has
no serious errors (e.g. test chart dirty or wrong-reading), you can accept the measured data by click-
ing "OK". The dialog closes.
i
i
Note: This analysis is performed automatically before every calculation of an ICC output
profile.
Open the "Save file" dialog by clicking "Save". You can save your measured data to a file you name
in ISO 12642 (IT8.7) format in this dialog.
Use the "Open" dialog to open this file again.
Click "Close" to end color measurement without saving the measured data. The dialog closes.
You can also save your measured data to an ISO 12642 (IT8.7) file you name by clicking "Save mea-
surement data" in the button bar.
Save and Repeat chart measurement
Check "Start automatically" in "Save and Repeat chart measurement" (see Series of Measurements,
page 35) if you wish to measure a number of test charts or control strips with the same measuring
device. You can enable the option only after the measuring device was connected and calibrated.
90 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
'Mean calculation of test chart data' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Calculate mean data" menu.
With this dialog, you can import data from the same type of test charts to Prinect Color Toolbox so
that you can average measured values. A document must be loaded in order to open this dialog. You
must have added at least one other test chart file in order to average the data.
i
i
Note: When you go to the "Analysis" main function, all the test chart files in the loaded
series are shown in the "List of test chart files to merge". For that reason, you should
remove any test chart files that are not to be averaged from the list.
This function is useful, for example, if the printing process is not stable, in other words, if there are
noticeable fluctuations in the (proof) print of the test chart. You can then measure the various signa-
tures with the printed test chart. In this way, you obtain mean values for your printing process.
If you have a "good" signature and would like it to feature more during your averaging process, you
can also use the same color data several times when determining the mean.
Process colors / Test chart type
The number of process colors and the test chart type of the open or empty (new) test chart file are
displayed here (for example, "4-color CMYK" and "ISO 28178").
Click "Add..." to open the "Open" dialog where you can search for and select the files you want. "Mea-
sured data (.txt, .it8)" must be set for "Files of type".
When you double-click the file name or select the file and click "Open", the selected file is copied to
the "List of test chart files to merge" in the "Merging of test chart data" dialog. Select all files whose
color data are to be averaged. Multiple selection is possible.
i
i
Note: The number of process colors and test chart type must always match the open test
chart file.
You delete a selected file from the list by clicking "Remove".

When you click "Merge files...", the mean value is calculated for every measured value from all the
test chart files in the list.
The mean values replace the corresponding values in the open (first) test chart file. 
The mean values are displayed as color patches.
Click "OK" to apply the mean data to the test chart file. The dialog closes. The measured data are dis-
played as color patches.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard the mean data.
'Color patch editor' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Edit color patch" menu.

Measure - Functions
This dialog lets you manually correct a patch by overwriting the XYZ and Lab values. 
You can correct single patches in this way, for example, if there were errors in the measurement that
could not be corrected by a repeat measurement or if a patch is to have certain values.
The text boxes show defaults for the color patch that is selected when the dialog displays. You can
modify these values by overwriting them or by moving the marked area in the color circle or on the
color bar.
The values shown in the boxes are updated continuously. The original values (gray and in parenthe-
ses) are shown to the right of the text boxes so that you can compare them.
The color of the original values is shown below the color circle in "Original" and a "Preview" of the
new color shown to the right of it.
Click "OK" to apply the modified XYZ and Lab values to the test chart file. The dialog closes.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without changing the values.
Easy Way to Modify Several Patches

Normally, you must edit each patch separately if you wish to modify several patches in a test chart
or control element. This means that you have to re-display the dialog each time. You can, however,
simplify your work as follows:
1. In the test chart or test strip, enable the first patch you wish to change.
2. Open the dialog with the "Test chart > Edit color patch" menu.
3. Modify the XYZ and/or Lab values for this patch.
Do not click "OK" so that the dialog remains open.
i
i
Note: Any changes you make do not appear in the test chart or test strip until you confirm
them with "OK".
4. Double-click the next patch to be edited. The values and the color of this patch now display.
5. Modify the XYZ and/or Lab values for this patch.
6. Modify all the patches you want in this way.
7. Confirm all your changes with "OK".
The dialog closes, and the changes now appear in the test chart or control element.
You can now check your changes visually by moving the mouse pointer to the appropriate patches.
The current values display to the right of the graphic. You can repeat this process as often as you
want if you wish to modify other patches or if you made a mistake.
Calculate from profile

i
i
Note: This function applies only to ICC profiles.
92 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
The data for a test chart can be calculated from the ICC press profile of a printing process (with cer-
tain restrictions in accuracy) if the process has no measurement data but needs them, for example,
to calculate an ICC profile with a different profile setting or for quality assessments. In this case, the
quality of the data depends on the accuracy of the profile calculation.
Procedure:
1. Create a new (empty) color data file. Click "New", select the test chart type you want in the
"Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog and confirm with "OK".
2. Call up the "Open" dialog with the "Test chart > Calculate from profile" menu.
3. In this dialog, select the ICC profile that you will use to calculate the measurement data.
4. Double-click the file name or select the file and click "Open" to start calculation.
5. Confirm the message about successful calculation from the profile with "OK".
The calculated data are displayed as color patches in the color data file.
6. Click "Save measurement data" in the button bar to call up the "Save file" dialog. You can save
your calculated data to a file you name in "ISO 28178" format in this dialog.
'Extracting test chart data' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Extract measurement data" menu.
This dialog lets you extract measurement data from your current test chart to another one or a control
element, for example, from a large "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual/Random" or "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT
8.7/3 Visual/Random" test chart to a smaller "PrintOpen Basic 135" or to a "PCS 60AB control strip".
You can use this function, for example, if you measured a proof print with a large test chart and now
simply just want to check a few particular patches for the remaining process. You then use the
extracted data as the reference data and, for example, a "PCS 60AB control strip" as the comparison
data for a quality check or long-term analysis.
This function is also suited to rearranging test charts:
• ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual <-> ... Random
• ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual <-> ... Random
• ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual <-> ... Random
Extract the following chart

This is where you can select the test chart that will be extracted. The target test chart must contain
all the color data found in the source test chart. The test chart/test strip appears in miniature form
in the display.
The attempt to extract a test chart/test strip is rejected along with an error message if you select a
target test chart/test strip that has color patches that are not found in the source test chart (example:
from "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual" to "PrintOpen Standard", 51 patches are missing in this case).

Measure - Functions
Method with multiple patches

If a patch is found several times in the source test chart, you can decide whether the mean of all the
same patches will be used or its first occurrence (click the appropriate radio button).
Confirm your selection by clicking "OK". The dialog closes. The "Save file" dialog appears automati-
cally where you can save the data of the extracted test chart/control element to a file you name in
"ISO 28178" format.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog.
For example, you can then open another file with measured data from which you can extract a test
chart/control element.
Procedure
1. Open the test chart file you wish to extract data from.
2. Call up the "Extracting test chart data" dialog with the "Test chart > Extract measurement data"
menu.
3. Select the test chart/control element that will be extracted.
i
i
Note: Remember that all the color patches must be found in the source test chart.
4. For multiple patches, select whether the mean or the first patch will be used by clicking the
appropriate radio button.
5. Confirm your selection with "OK".
6. Save your settings under a name of your choice.
'Smoothing of color data' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Correct - Smoothing" menu.
Check and smooth color data
You can enable or disable two subfunctions for smoothing the color data depending on the case at
hand:
• plausibility check of the data and
• intelligent, global smoothing.
These two functions can be used separately or as a combination and be applied to the color data of
both CMYK and RGB printing processes.
You can basically distinguish between two types of distortion of the color data: on the one hand,
those that have a local effect (i.e. at a certain area in the color space) and those whose effect is global
and across the entire color space.
94 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
i
i
Note: You can also use these functions in the "Create" main function in "Profile Generation
Setup" (see "'Smoothing of color data' Dialog", page 187).
The difference is that, in this case, the color data are changed irrevocably by the correction whereas,
in "Create", the correction is only applied to profile calculation and the original color data are
retained.
When calculating profiles from smoothened color data, remember that an appropriate setting for the
profile causes the smoothened data to be smoothened once again.
You can find more details about this subject in the "Example of correction or smoothing of measured
data", page 189 ("Create" main function). An example is used to explain the effect of smoothing on
the data.
Enable the correction/smoothing function you want.
Click "OK" to confirm your changes and close the dialog.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any changes to it.
Automatic plausibility check of color data
This function lets you adjust implausible values which were detected during the analysis. Such values
can result from errors during the measuring process but also from dirt or scratches on the test chart.
Such local distortions of the color data are corrected automatically.
Intelligent smoothing of color data
You can use this function to eliminate distortions that have a global effect. In this process, empirical
models for typical printing processes are used with all the measuring points to eliminate large-scale
distortions. This result of the calculation is that the current measured data are smoothened without
changing the accuracy greatly.
This method also works with unusual process colors and with printing materials with color cast.
'Correction of color data' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Correct - Fluorescent whitening" menu.
Check and correct color data
In this dialog, you can correct paper white that is important for certain proofs. You can correct the
effect of fluorescent whitening either by automatic paper white correction or by a spectral conversion
of the color data.
i
i
Note: You can also use these functions in the "Create" main function in "Profile Generation
Setup" (see "'Correction of color data' Dialog", page 185). It is also possible to match the
lightness to proofing. Display this dialog by clicking "Modify" at "Paper white correction".
Check the "Correction of fluorescent whitening effect" function and then select the paper white cor-
rection you want.

Measure - Functions

Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any changes to it.
Correction of fluorescent whitening effect
This function is relevant when papers with fluorescent whitening agents are used (for example, paper
for color copiers and ink jets). It affects the proof part of the profile.
Optical whiteners have a fluorescent effect so that the paper is perceived as particularly white
although technically speaking it has a bluish color cast. If you make a proof based exactly on the val-
ues measured, the result will appear too yellow.
Correction can be in two ways:
• using an automatic paper white correction
• or a spectral conversion of the color data.
Change paper white automatically

This function can automatically reduce the effect of fluorescent whitening agents when the proof part
is calculated in the profile.
By default, this function is disabled. When this function is activated, evaluation of the proof with a
measuring device may produce different results.
Spectral conversion of color data
Spectral color data must be available for this type of correction. In this procedure, all the measured
values are corrected before profile calculation. As a result, this correction affects the entire ICC pro-
file (all transformation tables).
Fluorescent whitening causes ultraviolet light that cannot be seen by the human eye to be absorbed
and visible blue fluorescent light to be emitted in its place. As a result of this conversion, an observer
considers the paper to be whiter. But this impression of white is subjective: In Europe, for example,
paper is "absolutely white" if the reflected light has somewhat more bluish portions.
You can set the correction intensity (amount of blue) with the slider:
• The default setting (slider position 5) is the equivalent of the spectral effect of a UV filter.
• As you move the slider towards "max" (slider position 10), the bluish color cast is gradually
removed by the correction so that the result seems to be yellowish.
• As you move the slider towards "none" (slider position 0), the correction of blue diminishes.
There is no correction of the fluorescent whitening effect when the slider is at "none" (0).
96 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
'Conversion of color data' Dialog
Information about the Conversion of Color Data

You can convert available test chart data for a modified or similar printing process based on the color
data in just a small number of color patches.
The data are converted in three different dialogs that are described below.
In this way, you do not have to make a proof print of a large, custom test chart for the new process
and measure it with a spectrophotometer. Or you can simulate a proof to check how the modified
printing process affects your print.
Compared to the previous process, there may be changes in
• the printing material,
• the process colors,
• the order of printing,
• the dot gain or
• the ambient conditions (temperature, humidity, etc.).
The measured data that result from the conversions described here are naturally not quite as accu-
rate as a newly output and measured large test chart for your current process. For that reason, they
are particularly suitable for matching to similar processes. A conversion between very different print-
ing processes such as flexographic and offset printing can at the most just give you a rough approxi-
mation of the real conditions (test with a proof simulation).
You can convert the color data in one of the following ways:
• using the color values (method 1)
• using paper white only (method 2)
• using the test chart data (method 3)
• using the calibration data (method 4)
You can convert Heidelberg's multicolor test charts (5C, 6C and 7C) with "Convert measurement data
- Color values", "Convert measurement data - Paperwhite" and "Convert measurement data - Test
chart values". You can use not only the new multicolor minispots as test chart data but also CMYK
control elements (even if less than four color channels are used) or single-color to three-color control
elements. Only the color channels for which there is new information are converted into measure-
ment data.
Any spectra in the data are lost during conversion because correction is done on Lab or XYZ data and,
as a result, the spectra no longer match the modified data. This is an important aspect mainly for the
correct display of dot gain curves because the curves that are then determined from the XYZ values
do not match the accurate values from the spectra particularly well.

Measure - Functions
'Conversion of color data - color values' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Convert - Color data" menu.
Method 1
This dialog presents the simplest method for converting color data (see Information about the
Conversion of Color Data).
Convert color data for changed print process - Change CIE values of primary colors
Only the new Lab color values for solid tints are specified in this dialog. You can determine these val-
ues, for example, by measuring the appropriate colors on a proof print. Then enter these values in
"New values" for cyan, magenta, yellow and black.
Please note that changing a printing material usually changes the color values of the solid colors as
well, even if the same inks are used.
You can take into account a changed tonal gradation by entering new values for dot gain (usually at
40% and/or 80%). Then enter these values in "New values" for cyan, magenta, yellow and black.
After you enter your data and click "OK", the program converts all the measured data of your test
chart so that the values for solid tints match the defaults. The shape of the color gamut can change
as a whole as a result of the conversion but the relative progress from paper white to solids and the
color mixing principles are the same as in the old test chart.
You can then save the converted data as a new color data file by clicking "Save measurement data"
and use it to calculate profiles for the modified process.
When you click "Default", the default settings are restored and the dialog closes.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any conversion.
This simple method cannot deal with more complex changes because there are no new values for the
patches.
For that reason, the conversion of test chart data is used for more accurate matching of the data (see
'Conversion of color data - paper white' Dialog).
'Conversion of color data - paper white' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Convert - Paper white" menu.
Method 2
Like in method 1, this dialog presents the Bradford transformation matrix for converting color data
(see Information about the Conversion of Color Data).
Convert color data for changed print process - Change paper white
Only the new Lab values for paper white are specified in this dialog. Enter these values in "New
value" for white. This is necessary, for example, if different printing material is used.
98 Version 2017
Measure - Functions
After you enter your data and click "OK", the program converts the measured data of your test chart
so that the values for paper white match the defaults. The shape of the color gamut can change as a
whole as a result of the conversion but the relative progress from paper white to solids and the color
mixing principles are the same as in the old test chart.
In the past, any spectra contained in the data were lost because they no longer matched the cor-
rected paper white values. In the meantime, enhanced new methods can adjust the spectra to the
corrected new values so that the modified paper white values and the spectra match each other.
'Conversion of color data - Test chart values' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Convert - Test chart data" menu.
Method 3
This dialog presents the third method for converting color data (see Information about the Conversion
of Color Data).
Convert color data for changed print process
With this method, you use the color data, for example, of a test strip (like DIPCO strip) or of a small
test chart (CQM strip or the FOGRA media strip, see "Test Charts and Control Strips", page 277) for
the characterization of the changed printing process.
You can print such small test patterns together with customer jobs on an unused part of a signature
without having to use up too much space for it. Jobs mainly have test strips anyway for checking the
ink zone. The test patterns then describe how the printing process reacts presently based on a num-
ber of selected positions in the color space.
During the conversion of the extensive test chart data you already have, all the measuring points in
the Lab color space are changed so that the data match the color patches of the test pattern opti-
mally.
In this way, you can take into account a changed dot gain or printing order (with a specific effect in
secondary and tertiary colors).
Click the "Open" button to read in the color data of a changed printing process.
You can search for and select the data file you want in the list box in the "Open" dialog. "Measured
data (.txt, .it8)" must be set for "Files of type".
After the data are imported and you click "OK", the program converts all the measured data of the
present test chart.

Measure - Functions
Conversion of color data - Calibration data Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Convert - Calibration data" menu.
Method 4
This dialog presents the fourth method for converting color data (see Information about the
Conversion of Color Data).
Convert color data for changed print process
The overall workflow starting with digital image data and ending with the printed sheet has two
important components that must be set and checked separately:
• the platesetter (or filmsetter)
• and the press.
Normally, you first create a plate with linearization strips and then make a proof print of it. You mea-
sure the printed linearization strips. Based on the density values measured, Calibration Tool
(included in the Prinect Color Toolbox) calculates the imagesetter curves that give the printing pro-
cess as a whole the desired tonal gradation (process standard). These imagesetter curves then go to
the output system (RIP) and a second plate with a test chart for creating ICC profiles is made and
printed. The ICC profile for the whole printing process is then calculated based on the color data of
this test chart.
The "Convert measurement data - Calibration data" function simplifies this procedure in that only
one plate has to be created. You save time and material as a second proof print is no longer neces-
sary.
Not only are the linearization strips for the imagesetter imaged on this one plate but also at the same
time the test chart for the ICC profile. The imagesetter curves are determined as described above
after a proof print is made of this plate. At the same time, Calibration Tool saves the curves in a
Prinect Color Toolbox-specific format (ISO 28178).
The color data of the test chart are measured in the usual way for the ICC profile and are available
in the usual data format. If you were to use these data right away for profile calculation, the image-
setter curves would be missing because they were determined from the same sheet and, as a result,
did not affect the measured data at all.
This is the reason why, in the "Convert measurement data - Calibration data" function, you open the
file saved by Calibration Tool for Prinect Color Toolbox in addition to the measured data, enabling the
application to back-step and correct the CMYK values of the color patches. This means that if the
imagesetter curves raise cyan from 35% to 40%, Prinect Color Toolbox can then replace a 40%
value in the original test chart by 35% with the help of the imagesetter curves. Consequently, the
effect you expect from the imagesetter curves when a second plate is printed is already included in
the CMYK values of the test chart. The Lab data do not change in this process and, accordingly, the
color data are displayed on the monitor in the same way. However, if you move the mouse pointer
over the test chart, you can see from the CMYK values shown at the bottom right in the status bar
that the original, regular CMYK values were matched to the imagesetter curves.
Using the data converted to CMYK, you can then calculate an ICC profile in the usual way for the
entire printing process including the calibrated imagesetter.
100 Version 2017

Measure - Functions
We recommend that you only use larger test charts with a suitably fine resolution in the color space
for this type of conversion such as the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI2002", "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" or "ISO
12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4" test chart. The "Prinect Color Toolbox Standard" test chart with just 210
patches is not very suitable for this because of the larger gaps between the CMYK defaults.
For this type of converted data, remember that the CMYK values of the color patches normally are no
longer the equivalent of a "standard" (e.g. ISO 28178). In other words, you cannot compare them
directly with the color data of a "standard test chart". It is true that it is generally possible to correct
the Lab values instead of the CMYK values. However, this would require additional interpolation and
scanning of the data. The procedure described here was selected to restrict any possible loss of qual-
ity to a minimum.
Procedure
1. You have at hand the data of a profiling test chart for uncalibrated printing.
2. Call up the "Conversion of color data - Calibration data" dialog with the "Tools > Convert mea-
surement data - Calibration data" menu function.
3. Click the "Open" button to read in the calibration data of a changed printing process.
You can search for and select the data file you want (with the calibration data) in the list box in
the "Open" dialog. "Measured data (.txt, .it8)" must be set for "Files of type".
4. After the calibration data are imported and you click "OK", the program converts all the mea-
sured data of the present test chart.
5. You can then save the converted data as a new color data file by clicking "Save measurement
data" and use it to calculate profiles for the modified process.
6. Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any conversion.

'Process standard' View

All checks are available in "Measure", parameters are set up in the "Process standard" tab. The status
bar also indicates the type of the selected process standard.
Every PSO type has a tab of its own. Settings for color values and printing materials are identical for
all types.
A digital process standard is selected in the current example. For this reason, only the digital printing
tab is operable while all other types are disabled and closed. The common part in the upper section
matches the selected type. As digital printing has three quality levels, the printing material element
shows three results.
Proof and digital printing process standards require an internal reference file for calibration. For
coated printing materials (paper types 1 and 2 and — with a future process standard — PS1), this inter-
nal reference is usually the FOGRA39L file describing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart.
The internal reference for uncoated printing materials is the FOGRA47L file.
Check measurement data for compliance with process standard
This diagram lets you check whether the measured data are within the tolerances of a selected pro-
cess standard. The process standard can be a default one (ISO 12647-2 process check) or a user-
defined one.

Hide/Show process standard overview

The overview has as many as nine views and can be minimized to a caption bar. You can show or
hide the overview by clicking this line.
The result of the check is indicated by the following symbols on the right of the caption bar:
No values available
All the values are in the tolerance range.
Several values are not in the tolerance range.
The appraisal refers to all defined process colors (CMYK, multicolor or spot colors) and is shown in
the relevant color with color name (if there is one) and curves or bar graphs.
The following views display in the overview:
• CIELab color values: ΔE bars and table for the primary and secondary colors and for three-color
gray (Overprint)
• ab diagram: View of the CIELAB color values on the ab plane
104 Version 2017

• Substrate (paper white): View of the Lab values and their differential value "Δ" for paper white
• Dot gain curves: View showing values in steps of 10% and for 25% and 75%, if present
· CMYK: separately for CMY and K
· Multicolor: all defined process colors (CMYK and red (orange), green and/or blue/purple)
· Spot Colors: all defined process colors
i
i
Note: The dot gain curves only display if spectral values and/or density values were mea-
sured in addition to the color data (see "Preferences > Measurement").
• Gray balance (table): View of the chroma differential values "ΔCh" and the lightness differential
values "ΔL" for three gray values "K30", "K50" and "K70" (quarter tone, midtone and three-
quarter tone) or for "K25", "K50" and "K75"
• Gray balance (diagram): View of the gray balance in the ab diagram for the three gray values
(quarter tone, midtone and three-quarter tone)
You can also print the views as logs ("Diagrams to be printed > Process standard").
Setting the Process Standard

The diagrams and tables are shown using the standard set in the "Process standard" main function.
The latest process standard is used if no other specifications come from the customer. When setting
the display, remember that the printing material and the backing must match the measured data.
Normally, white backing (WB) is used for measurement. You must select a black backing (BB) for
measured data from Prinect Image Control. You can select another process standard or change the
settings of a process standard or create a new custom standard in the "Process standard" main func-
tion. To do this, click "Process standard" in the horizontal function bar at the top of the window (see
"Working with 'Process standard'", page 219).
Individual Quality Index (IQI)

The valuation system is applicable for all the available process standards, "CMYK", "Multicolor" and
"Spot colors". The IQI system (scoring model) provides a systematic method for the comparison and
valuation of the quality level of your print production. All decision-related criteria are listed and
weighted in this process; each property of the features is assessed using points.
The sum of all single values (Scoring) produces the index (Maximum Value). This includes color val-
ues, dot gains, paper white and gray balance.
You set the parameters for the individual quality index in the Preferences (see "'Individual Quality
Index (IQI)' tab", page 271).

CIELab color values

This is where you compare the measured solid tint CIELab values for the primary and secondary col-
ors (black, cyan, magenta, yellow, red, green and blue) and also for CMY gray (Overprint) with the
standard CIELb color values of the selected process standard. The deviation between the current
measured data (actual values) and the respective process standard data (nominal values) is color dis-
tance ΔE and is shown by a bar graph.
The deviation for the secondary colors and overprint (CMY Gray) only displays if these colors are
enabled in the process standard. The standard values for them are difficult to comply with technically
and they are enabled only in more recent, improved process standards (see "Working with 'Process
standard'", page 219).
Paper white is shown separately because the tolerances for the L, a and b values can differ (see
"'Substrate' View", page 73).
A colored area indicates the tolerance that is typical for the process.
The current ΔE value for a color in the bar graph displays when you point the mouse to this bar.
The color distance calculated using the currently valid "ΔEab" definition (1976) displays for each color
below the bar graph.
106 Version 2017

The following values appear when you point the mouse to a ΔE value:
• measured Lab value (actual value)
• Lab value of the process standard
• color distance calculated using the currently valid "ΔEab" definition (1976) (see bar graph)
• color distance calculated using the more recent "ΔE00" definition (2000). This ΔE value is much
more accurate.
• tolerance "ΔETol" defined in the process standard
ab diagram
The color circle and the colored corners of the diagram help you in your orientation on the ab plane.
The green circles mark the tolerance range in the process standard for each process color. This graph
shows the size of the color space and the position of the process colors in relation to the tolerance
range on the ab plane.
The values must be within this green area to meet the process standard.
Substrate (paper white)

This displays the Lab color values for paper white (substrate) and the differential values "Δ" to the
process standard:

The differential values can differ. For that reason, paper white is not shown together with the CIEBLab
color values for the primary and secondary colors.
You can find more details in the 'Substrate' View.
Gray balance
The gray balance displays in a table and three diagrams on the ab plane.
i
i
Note: This check shows values only if you use a minispot to check the gray balance (see
also "'ECI_GrayConL', 'ECI_GrayConM' and 'ECI_GrayConS' with 52, 32 or 6 Patches", page
310).
The additional grays of the control strip (K30, K50, K70 and their corresponding chromatic grays in
CMY) are evaluated for gray balance. The results display in a table and a graph.
In this case, the L*, a* and b* values for three real grays (black only) are compared at 30%, 50%
and 70% with those of the identical chromatic grays (cyan, magenta and yellow) and shown as a
table and a diagram with the calculated differential values for lightness distance (ΔL*) and chroma
difference (ΔCh* (Ch* = chroma)):
• green if the deviations are within the tolerance range
i
i
Note: In the USA, control strips that evaluate grays "K25" and "K75" instead of "K30" and
"K70" are also used. The system detects these grays automatically and switches to the
appropriate values.
The ISO 12647-2 process standard specifies that a gray composed of the three chromatic process col-
ors has the same L*, a* and b* values (CIELab) as an identical gray that is printed only with black.
You can find more details in the 'Gray values' View.
108 Version 2017

Dot gain curves
Based on the measured data, the dot gain is determined in steps of 10% and at 25% and 75% for
the defined process colors, and curves display the result.
• CMYK process: The dot gain curves are shown separately for the three chromatic colors cyan,
magenta and yellow and for black as their tolerances are different.
• Multicolor process and spot color process: As of version 11.0. a third diagram displays, showing
only spot colors or the multicolor process colors. You can select a multicolor, spot color or PSO
standard (for the CMYK colors of your color data) as your process standard for the check.
You can find more details in the "'Dot gain' View", page 74.
Process Standards: Proof Check

Proof printing process standards require an internal reference file for calibration. For coated printing
materials (paper types 1 and 2 and — with a future process standard — PS1), this internal reference is
usually the FOGRA39L file describing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart.
The following check dialogs are feasible for proof process standards:
• Process standard
• Color values
• Printing Materials
Standard check for mini spot test strips

This proof check gives the color distance E and the maximum value for the following parameters:
• Average
• Maximum
• Primary colors (max): CMY total
• Maximum H primary colors: maximum hue deviation from E for primary colors

• Mean H gray: mean hue deviation from E for gray
Advanced evaluation of test charts

The advanced evaluation uses a test chart that has a much greater number of dots than the mini
spots mentioned before. This chart is used for the adjustment process, i.e. for the determination and
repeated correction of the proof profile. This check is much more thorough and offers additional
checks because a much greater number of dots is measured:
• All dots of the test chart are included, the deviations of all test values from the internal reference
file are calculated, and the resulting mean values must fall below a maximum threshold.
• Then, the saturated colored dots of the test chart determined by the standard are included. The
mean deviations from the internal reference are calculated and must fall below a second thresh-
old.
• Then, the deviations of all dots from the internal reference are calculated and sorted in ascend-
ing order. The 95% limit of deviations must fall below a certain value.
Supported mini spots and test charts

The following mini spot test strips are normally used for a standard proof check:
• FOGRA MKV test strip v3
in the US
• After selecting "IDE Alliance" and clicking the button "Type", you can choose the IDE Alliance
test strip 2009 (already supported in Color Tool as "GRACOL-DCS"), or
• IDE Alliance test strip 2013
These US mini spot test strips contain additional gray dots not present in FOGRA MKV and IT8.7/
4.
110 Version 2017

For setup and profile generation, the ISO12647-7 standard requires the advanced evaluation. For this
advanced evaluation, you usually need the standard test chart ISO 12642-2=IT8.7/4 (in visual or ran-
dom style).
You can also use the ECI2002 test chart for this purpose.
i
i
Note: A warning is issued if you use another mini spot test strip or a test chart type that is
not ideal for a proof check.
Selecting, Administrating and Editing Various Proof References in a Single Pro-

cess Standard
The "Proof Process Standard" is selected as the reference for checking a proof because all checks are
pooled in "Measure". Prinect Color Toolbox supports several types of process standards. For this rea-
son, you must select a proof process standard when checking a proof.

A proof check being edited is indicated as "PS Norm Type: Proof".

The new "Proof Parameters" section is operable only if the "Proof" type is selected.
The parameters for the standard check are accessible in the upper part of this parameter section.
Additional parameters for the advanced evaluation are located in the lower part of the parameter sec-
tion.
Proof printing process standards require an internal reference file for calibration. For coated printing
materials (paper types 1 and 2 and PS1), this internal reference is usually the FOGRA39L file describ-
ing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart.
i
i
Note: The reference file shown in the example is for coated printing materials. For uncoated
materials, you must use the file "FOGRA4TL".
Process Standards: Digital Print Check

Digital print process standards need to be aligned with an internal reference file. For coated printing
materials (paper types 1 and 2 and PS1), this internal reference is usually the FOGRA39L file describ-
ing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart. The internal reference for uncoated printing materials is
the FOGRA47L file.
The following check dialogs are feasible for digital printing process standards:
112 Version 2017

• Color Values and
Digital print and proof standards are similar, but differ when it comes to calculating the elements.
Digital print only applies the new E00 color distance.
The digital print process standard uses 3 parallel tolerance classes and 3 different quality levels
checked in parallel:
• A = high: top quality meeting proof quality requirements
• B = good: digital printing is to match offset print quality. Meets the quality requirements in most
cases.
• C = acceptable: This quality level meets office requirements.
Two different comparison/check approaches are introduced for the digital print standard:
• Side-by-side: classical approach; offset and digital printing side by side
Offset printing versus Digital printing Different papers:

according to FOGRA hard to compare
• Media-relative: Comparison with converted and matched paper in order to compensate for the
differences in the printing material.
Offset printing versus Digital printing not a physical but a

converts paper white to converts paper white to virtual comparison,
Lab = 100, 0, 0 Lab = 100, 0, 0 better to compare
Standard check for a mini spot test strip

• You measure or open a mini spot test strip matched to digital printing and determine / check:
• The quality of your digital printing paper white.
• The quality of the primary and secondary colors.

• You determine averages of all color patch deviations (from the internal reference file) and the
maximum deviation from the internal reference.
• The hue deviations and the resulting average of "almost neutral" patches are also determined.
Advanced evaluation of test charts

The advanced evaluation uses a test chart that has a much greater number of dots than the mini
spots mentioned before. This chart is used for the adjustment process, i.e. for the determination and
iterative correction of the proof profile. This check is much more thorough and offers additional
checks because a much greater number of dots is measured:
• All dots of the test chart are included, the deviations of all test values from the internal reference
file are calculated, and the resulting mean values must fall below a maximum threshold.
• Then, the saturated colored dots of the test chart determined by the standard are included. The
mean deviations from the internal reference are calculated and must fall below a second thresh-
old.
• Then, the deviations of all dots from the internal reference are calculated and sorted in ascend-
ing order. The 95% limit of deviations must fall below a certain value.
Supported mini spots and test charts

The following mini spot test strips are normally used for a standard digital printing check:
• FOGRA MKV test strip v3
in the US
These US mini spot test strips contain additional gray dots not present in FOGRA MKV and IT8.7/
4.
114 Version 2017

For setup and profile generation, the ISO12647-7 standard requires the advanced evaluation. For this
advanced evaluation, you usually need the standard test chart ISO 12642-2=IT8.7/4 (in visual or ran-
dom style).
You can also use the ECI2002 test chart for this purpose.
i
i

cess Standard
The "digital printing process standard" is selected as the reference for checking digital printing
because all the checks are pooled in "Measure". Prinect Color Toolbox supports several types of pro-
cess standards. For this reason, you must select a digital printing process standard when checking
digital printing.

A digital printing check being edited is indicated as "PS Norm Type: Digital".
The new "Digital Parameters" section is operable only if the "Digital" type is selected.
The left part of the section contains the parameters for the "Side-by-side" check, the right part the
parameters for the "Media-relative" check.
The parameters for the standard check are accessible in the upper part of this parameter section.
Additional parameters for the advanced evaluation are located in the lower part of the parameter sec-
tion.
Digital print process standards need to be aligned with an internal reference file. For coated printing
materials (paper types 1 and 2 and — with a future process standard — PS1), this internal reference is
usually the FOGRA39L file describing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart. The internal reference
for uncoated printing materials is the FOGRA47L file.
Measuring a Digital Press with the Digital Printing Standard

1. Digital presses use inks different from those of offset presses and therefore feature an integrated
color management to match the digital printing result to that of offset printing. Usually, the doc-
ument is converted from the offset color space to the CIELab color space, and then to the digital
printing color space. Because of the different properties of the used printing materials, the
applied "Rendering Intent" is "relative". Offset printing uses other papers than digital printing.
For this reason, first print the "FOGRA MKV v3" control strip or the "ISO 12642-2 = IT8.7/4" test
chart on your digital press, with the internal color management of the digital press enabled.
2. Measure the print result. Apply the "ISO13655.2009" measurement method in mode M0 or M1.
3. In Prinect Color Toolbox, select the internal reference file "FOGRA39" and open the measure-
ment file.
4. Evaluate the results of the quality measurements in "Process standard": levels A, B and C and
check, which quality level is met.
Process Standards: G7 check

The G7 standard is an offset standard; for this reason, there are similarities to classical offset printing
(ISO 12647-2), similar to the check of primary and secondary colors.
But there are still some differences:
• The gray balance is predominant for the G7 check, and more emphasis is placed on it than for
current ISO checks. In other words, the gray balance replaces the dot gain check in the G7
check.
• In contrast to the ISO check, the G7 check also evaluates the luminance values of the CMY and
K patches with regard to color purity.
• The ISO standard determines the gray balance by comparing printed CMY gray patches with
printed reference K-patches. In the G7 standard, the K-patches are not printed but the reference
K-patches are calculated internally.
116 Version 2017

• The G7 applies the dynamic printing material adaption: primary and secondary colors are
adapted to the current paper white.
G7 process standards use a comparison with an internal reference file.

The following check dialogs are feasible for G7 process standards:
• Color values
• extended gray balance and
As the G7 standard supports the dynamic paper white adaption, the printing material check is redun-
dant and part of the advanced evaluation just like the CMYK contone check (to determine the sup-
pressed dot gain effect) and the density check.
Supported Mini Spots and Test Charts

The following mini spot test strips are normally used for a standard G7 check:
• P2P25 — Target control strip
The P2P25 — Target control strip is also suitable for set-up and profiling.
• FMS — G7 control strip (Heidelberg)
• the IDE Alliance test strip 2009 or
• the IDE Alliance test strip 2013

These US mini spot control strips contain additional gray patches not present in classical control
strips, in particular 25%, 50% and 75% patches.
i
i

cess Standard
The "G7 Process Standard" is selected as the reference for the G7 check because all the checks are
pooled in "Measure". Prinect Color Toolbox supports several types of process standards. For this rea-
son, you must select a G7 process standard when checking G7.
The "PS Norm Type" must display "G7" for a G7 check.
118 Version 2017

Compare
Compare
Working with 'Compare'

Prerequisite: The full scope of "Compare" is available only if you enabled the Quality Mon-
itor application with a license key.
The following quality assessments are possible with "Compare":

• Comparison of the color data of two test charts, control elements or ICC profiles (quality check)
• Calculation and display of quality parameters and diagrams
• Printout of quality reports
To compare two color data sets, open the reference and comparison data using the relevant buttons,
menu commands or the Explorer panel. You can open the color data of one test chart or test strip as
the reference data and the data set of another test chart or test strip as the comparison data. You can
use different types of data. In this case, the data in common will be used. For example, the "ISO
12642-2 / ECI 2002" test chart contains the "PCS 40" test strip and the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3"
test chart or the "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4" test chart contains all of the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002"
test chart. This is also applicable for the "Visual" and "Random" versions of the large test charts. In
"FMS" test strips where identical patches occur several times, a comparison is made from the middle
and the position evaluated.
You can view and compare all the device profiles based on the ICC specification and color data sets
in the "ISO 12642" format, including those that were not created with Prinect Color Toolbox or with
PrintOpen versions.
In "Preferences > Compare" you can enable "Use reference file for comparison" and set the path for
a file that will be used as the reference during the comparison. After a restart of the application, this
file is then always loaded automatically as the reference file in "Compare". This file is used as the
comparison file when you open a file or create a new one in "Measure" and then go directly to "Com-
pare". The comparison data from "Measure" are not used if you first go to another main function. You
then have to open the comparison data you want manually.

Compare
You can usually use the following reference files:

• HDMcoated_bb.txt: Measurements with black backing (BB); offset printing
Path: "<Drive>:\Prinect Color Toolbox\Color Tool xx.0\data\hdm"
• FOGRA39L.txt: Measurements with white backing (WB); glossy or matt
Path: "<Drive>:\Prinect Color Toolbox\Color Tool xx.0\data\fogra"
• FOGRAMK3ABC_FOGRA39.txt: Measurements with white backing (proof)
Path: "<Drive>:\Prinect Color Toolbox\Color Tool xx.0\data\fogra\MediaControl"
You can also use loaded data from "Analysis". To do this, in one of the diagrams you must click the
point that represents the reference file you want and then click "Ref" in the context-sensitive menu
(generally right-click). After that, select another point for the comparison file and click "Cmp" in the
context-sensitive menu. The two files open in "Compare" as reference and comparison data as you
defined them and appear in the test chart diagram.
i
i
Note: You can also open the files by dragging-and-dropping them to the status panel. A sim-
ple drag-and-drop opens the file as a reference file, if you also hold down the Ctrl key the
file opens as a comparison file.
You can also view the reference or comparison file separately by selecting or deselecting it in some
diagrams.
You can open the following views and statistical results for the loaded color data sets using the tabs:
• Test chart: You can view a a composite display of the loaded test charts, test strips or lineariza-
tion strips with small and large color patches (see 'Test chart' View):
· Absolute or differential values (display with miscolors)
· Display of statistical results for deviation
· Display of patches, optionally with ΔE values
• xy diagram: This two-dimensional color space is shown as a horseshoe-shaped diagram, known

as the chromaticity diagram. See 'xy diagram' View.
• ab diagram: You can view a two-dimensional color display of the ab plane with or without the
dots. See 'ab diagram' View.
• La/Lb diagram: You can view a two-dimensional color display of the L*a*b* color space (parallel
to the lightness axis). See 'La/Lb diagram' View.
• 3D color space (tab): You can view a three-dimensional display of the color space where the
measured color data are displayed in an a*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB color space). See
'3D color space' View.
120 Version 2017

Compare
• 3D color space (button bar): You can view a separate three-dimensional display of the color
space where the measured color data are displayed in an a*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB
color space). See 3D display of the color space (with central projection and/or animation).
• Statistics: You can view different diagrams with statistical results that refer to the CIELab color
values. See 'Statistics' View:
· Error histogram
· Trend (error distribution)
· Trend with mean (error distribution)
• CIE report: You can compare the color data of two test charts, control elements or ICC profiles
(quality check) with the following weighting (see 'CIE report' View):
· Dot gain at 25%, 40%, 50%, 70%, 75% and/or 80%
· Solid tint density values
· CIELab color values
· Analysis
· Proof report
• Proof report: Displays the overall result of a ΔE proof evaluation with the key color data (quick
overview). You can set that other evaluation parameters will be shown in the "Preferences >
Proof Report" dialog (see 'Proof statistics' View).
• Proof statistics: Display of the statistical results in the following diagrams (see 'Proof statistics'
View):
· an error histogram
· two Lab scatter diagrams
• ΔLab report: Display of four histograms for a frequency distribution of differential color values
(Lab color values). See 'ΔLab report' View.
• ΔLCH report: Display of four histograms for a frequency distribution of differential color values
(LCH values). See 'ΔLCH report' View.
• Tonal values: Display of different diagrams, see 'Tonal values' View:
· Dot gain (curves)

· Printing Characteristic
· Density curves (density profile)
• Data table: Display of all the measured and calculated values in a table. You can select which
values will be shown in the table by checking the appropriate boxes to the right of the table or
in the "Preferences" dialog (see 'Data table' View).

Compare
Views and Diagrams
Notes on the Diagrams

The diagrams and tables are shown in the central workspace. You can display them by clicking the
appropriate item in the tabs. To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing
the color space. When you view a test chart, a separate window also displays, showing you the cur-
rent values for the reference and/or comparison data of the patches. You can also define preferences
for some views in the "Preferences" dialog (see "General Information about Preferences", page 263).
'Test chart' View

You can open this view by clicking the "Test chart" tab.
The view allows a visual comparison of both data sets and is particularly suited to checking measured
color data. The test chart and/or control element is shown as color patches in the diagram. To the
right of the diagram, you can define various settings for displaying the test chart or test strip.
Display
You can display the reference and comparison data either separately or together by checking the
appropriate boxes.
Analysis
The following values are used for the evaluation:
• the values that were measured (XYZ values, Lab values)
• the difference of the measured values (ΔL, Δa, Δb) and the color distance (ΔE).
If you have measured color data, you can view the patches either with absolute or differential values
(select in "Analysis"). Other settings are possible, depending on what you select in this box.
i
i
Note: It is not possible to display differential values for density values or screen percents.
Diagram
You can select three different diagrams for an analysis with differential values:
• View with miscolors
• View with miscolors (scaled up threefold)
• View with color differences
122 Version 2017

Compare
Parameters
You can select the following parameters to view the test chart with absolute or differential values:
• "ΔE(ab)", "ΔE(2000)": Color differences relating to Lab color values, calculation based on differ-
ent definitions for color distances
• "ΔL*", "Δa*", "Δb*": Lab differential values of reference and comparison data
• "ΔC", "Δh": Chroma and hue difference
Color deviation
Color deviation is calculated for various parameters that you can select and the following data are
shown:
• Mean
• StdDev = Standard deviation
• Max = maximum deviation value
• Patch (Max) = patch number of maximum deviation
Mark all patches with

When you enable this function, you can use the slider to set a value for the differential values for the
parameter selected (e.g. ΔE(ab)). In this case, all patches whose differential value exceeds this value
(e.g. 10) are marked by a red-and-white frame. All the patches are marked if you push the slider to
the far right to 0.00.
View with Absolute Values and Marked Patches

Compare
The patches can be shown together or individually. When both reference and comparison data are
checked, the reference data are depicted by large patches and the comparison data by smaller ones
on top of them.
The accuracy of the color data displayed on the monitor depends on the position of the colors in the
color space and the monitor settings.
The ΔE value denotes the distance between two colors in the color space. Under favorable viewing
conditions, a ΔE value of 1 to 2 is barely perceptible to the human eye. In grays, however, a finer dif-
ferentiation is possible, allowing a ΔE value of 0.7 to be perceived in this range.
Viewing the differential values with miscolors is recommended for a visual comparison.
In this example, all patches whose ΔE(ab) value is greater than 10 are marked.
View with Differential Values
Diagram > Miscolors

Viewing the data with differential values is suited to localizing errors as you can easily see any devi-
ations. Differential values can be calculated and displayed for different parameters (color difference
ΔE, differences of the L*, a* and b* coordinates, chroma or hue difference). The default view is with
miscolors. These are used instead of the "real" colors to highlight slight differences in colors (espe-
cially grays).
A color scale with a range of 0 to 12 shows the meaning of the colors. For example, the biggest dif-
ferences (ΔE greater than or equal to 12) are red and the smallest blue. Differences lying in between
this are orange, yellow or green.
Diagram > Enhance miscolors
The miscolors display can also be scaled up threefold to be able to see smaller differences better. The
scale range changes from 0 to 4 if you enable the "Enhance miscolors" option.
124 Version 2017

Compare
Diagram > Color difference

You can also switch over to view the color differences instead of the miscolors. These differences are
difficult to recognize if the deviations are very small, and as a result you see "white" patches.
"Data" window
A separate window with the following data and reference values displays when you move the mouse
pointer to a patch:
• Patch: Displays information about the current patch in the test chart or the control element
• Ref. [Lab]: Displays the Lab color values for the current patch of the reference data set
• Cmp. (beside "Ref. [Lab]"): Displays the Lab color values for the current patch of the comparison
data set
• Δ: Displays the differential Lab color values for the reference and comparison data set
• ΔE(ab), ΔE(2000), ΔL*, Δa*, Δb*, ΔC or Δh: Displays the differential value of the reference and
comparison data for the current patch, depending on what is set in the "Parameter" list
• Ref. [XYZ]: Displays the XYZ color values for the current patch of the reference data set

Compare
• Cmp. (beside "Ref. [XYZ]"): Displays the XYZ color values for the current patch of the comparison
data set
• Δ: Displays the differential XYZ values for the reference and comparison data set
• Spectrum: Displays the spectral values for the current patch. An appropriate message displays
• Ref. [D]: Displays absolute or relative cyan, magenta, yellow, and black density values for the
current patch.
i
i
surement" tab).
'xy diagram' View

You can open this view by clicking the "xy diagram" tab.
Display of the xy diagram
The xy diagram is shown as a horseshoe-shaped diagram, known as the chromaticity diagram. It
shows the purely color-related information of a visible color, independent of lightness.
The horseshoe-shaped curve is known as the spectrum locus and is plotted from the xy coordinates
of all the pure wavelengths in the visible spectrum. Each color displayed is an additive mixture of
spectral colors.
All colors that are possible lie within the boundary formed by the spectrum locus.
The intensity and, consequently, the purity of a hue is greatest at the edge of the curve, but decreases
towards the middle of the diagram, as there are no colors purer than spectral colors.
In the xy diagram, lines join up the locations of primary and secondary colors and give you an idea of
the size of the color gamut. By displaying a reference and a comparison data set together, you can
compare the position and size of two color gamuts with the help of these "cobwebs" and/or measur-
ing points.
Display
To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color space:
• Reference data, Comparison data: You can select the color to show the data (dots and cobweb)
of the reference and comparison data. The following colors are set by default:
· Reference data: Blue
· Comparison data: Red
• Dots: Display with or without measuring points
The small dots that can be seen are the color values (locations) of all the patches measured in
the test chart or control element.
126 Version 2017

Compare
• The green circles/ellipses mark the tolerance range in the process standard for each process
color. This graph shows the size of the color space and the position of the process colors in rela-
tion to the tolerance range.
• Cobweb: Display with or without cobweb
The "cobweb" joins up the locations of certain color patches selected in the test chart (primary
and secondary colors) and gives you a rough idea of the size of the color gamut.
Only the outline of the color gamut is shown in the xy diagram when you uncheck this box.
• You can print the view as a log (see "General Information about Preferences", page 263).
'ab diagram' View

You can open this view by clicking the "ab diagram" tab.
Display of ab plane
In the ab diagram, lines join up the locations of primary and secondary colors and give you an idea
of the size of the color gamut. By displaying a reference and a comparison data set together, you can
compare the position and size of two color gamuts with the help of these "cobwebs" and/or measur-
ing points.
Display

Compare
• You can print the view as a log (see "General Information about Printing Your Data", page 272).
'La/Lb diagram' View

You can open this view by clicking the "La/Lb diagram" tab.
Display of the La/Lb diagrams
The two graphs show the color gamuts in the L*a*b* color space viewed from the side, parallel to the
lightness axis.
In the top graph, the color space is shown in the direction of the a* axis, that is from green to red,
and in the bottom graph in the direction of the b* axis, i.e. from blue to yellow.
The color gradations, right and left, show the influence of the color lightness.
From the diagrams, you can assess the depth resolution of a printing process in the color space and
its size and which colors can be displayed.
Display
• Cobweb: Only the outlines of the color gamuts are shown in the La or Lb diagram with this func-
tion.
'3D color space' View

Click the "3D color space" tab to view a three-dimensional display of the test chart in the CIE L*a*b*
or CIELAB color space.
128 Version 2017

Compare
3D display of the color space

This diagram shows a three-dimensional display of the color gamut in the L*a*b* color space. 
This display is suited for comparing print and proof color spaces. For example, you can judge to what
extent a proofer is capable of reproducing the colors of a printer.
The diagram shows the maximum color gamut of the color data of the measured test chart. If you
wish, you can confine the result by profile settings, for example, by limiting the total dot area and/or
maximum black or black width. The color gamut then diminishes in chromatic, dark colors.
Dirt on the test charts or measuring errors causes the color gamut to become uneven. You can then
remedy this by smoothing the data.
Display
To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color gamut:
• You can select how the color gamut will be displayed in "Diagram":
· Stacks: 3D display of the stacks (layers) of the color gamut, see Examples: 3D displays
of the layers ('Stacks' diagram).
· Sections: 2D display with sections through the color space, see Examples: 2D sections
throughout the color space ('Sections' diagram).
• In the "Stacks" diagram, you can change the vertical position of the layers with the lightness
slider (L). All of the color gamuts are shown if lightness is set to maximum (L=100). You remove
layers as you gradually reduce lightness. The graduation depends on the ΔE setting.
• In the "Sections" diagram, you can view the 2D sections throughout the color space by moving
the lightness slider (L).
• In the "Stacks" diagram, the "Elevation" and "Hue angle" sliders allow you to set the observer's
viewpoint, and consequently, from which point you are looking at the color gamuts.
• In the "Stacks" diagram, you can use the "ΔE" slider to set the layer distance ΔE, that is the dis-
tance between the layers of the color gamuts.
• You can scale up or down the view as you wish with the "Zoom" slider.
• If the default is left as it is, the reference data set is blue in the diagram and the comparison data
set is red. You can swap the colors or select "Black". For a better overview, you can also hide
the data set concerned by selecting "None".
• The "Show wire model function" allows you to display the color gamut either as a full color or
transparently as a wire model (see Examples: 'Show wire model' view).
• "Color space volume" shows the gamut volume for the reference and comparison data and the
deviation in percent in both cases. This lets you check whether the gamut has increased or
decreased.
i
i
Note: In the earlier versions of Quality Monitor, the influence of black in the color space that
you viewed in the 3D graphic was only approximate. Now voxel algorithms make precise
calculation possible and the influence of black that displays is exact.

Compare
Examples: 3D displays of the layers ('Stacks' diagram)
"Lightness (L)" slider

L=100 L=66 L=33
"ΔE" slider
ΔE=2 ΔE=5 ΔE=10
"Elevation (ele)" slider

ele=30° ele=60° ele=90°
"Hue angle (hue)" slider

hue=5° hue=180° hue=270°
130 Version 2017

Compare
Examples: 2D sections throughout the color space ('Sections' diagram)
i
i
Note: You can only use the "Lightness" and "Zoom" sliders in this view.

L=50 L=65 L=80

Compare
Examples: 'Show wire model' view
Default setting in the "Stacks" diagram

• "Lightness (L=100)" slider
• "Elevation (ele=30°)" slider
• "Hue angle (hue=5°)" slider
• "ΔE (ΔE=2)" slider
Wire model unchecked Wire model checked
Default setting in the "Sections" diagram

Wire model unchecked Wire model checked
3D display of the color space (with central projection and/or

animation)
Click "3D color space" in the button bar to view a separate, three-dimensional display of the test
chart in the CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB color space.
In contrast to the 2D/3D view that you can display with the tab, this function lets you switch to a cen-
tral projection of the color space and/or also show it as an animated graphic. In addition, you can
display different test charts, each in their own window, in this 3D view, allowing you to compare the
color spaces directly with one another.
i
i
Note: This function uses the graphics card of your computer and, for that reason, depends
on your hardware.
132 Version 2017

Compare
3D display of the color space

This diagram shows a three-dimensional display of the color gamut in the L*a*b* color space. This
display is suited for comparing a print and proof color space. For example, you can judge to what
extent a proofer is capable of reproducing the colors of a printer.
The diagram shows the maximum color gamut of the color data of the measured test chart. If you
wish, you can confine the result by profile settings, for example, by limiting the total dot area and/or
maximum black or black width. The color gamut then diminishes in chromatic, dark colors.
Dirt on the test charts or measuring errors causes the color gamut to become uneven. You can then
remedy this by smoothing the data.
Display
To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color gamut:
• Reference data, Comparison data: If the default is left as it is, the reference data set is blue
in the diagram and the comparison data set is red. You can swap the colors or select "Black".
For a better overview, you can also hide the data set concerned by selecting "None".
• Show wire model: Enabling this function allows you to display the color gamuts transparently
as a wire model.
• Sections: When you enable this function, you switch from a 3D display of the color space with
stacks (layers) to a 2D display with sections through the color space.
· 3D displays of the layers
· 2D sections throughout the color space ("Sections" enabled, L=50)
• Central projection: You change the view to a parallel projection (like the view displayed in the
"3D color space" tab) when you disable this function.
• Animation: You start a rotation of the display around the lightness axis when you enable this
function.
• "Lightness" slider: The effect depends on the "Sections" function.
· In the stacks diagram ("Sections" disabled), you can change the vertical position of the
layer with the lightness slider (L). All of the color gamuts are shown if lightness is set to
maximum (L=100). You remove layers as you gradually reduce lightness. The graduation
depends on the ΔE setting.
· In the "Sections" diagram, you can view the 2D sections throughout the color space by
moving the lightness slider (L).
• "Elevation" and "Hue angle" sliders: Use these sliders to set the observer's viewpoint, and con-
sequently, from which point you are looking at the color gamuts/layers.
• "ΔE" slider: In the stacks view ("Sections" disabled), this slider lets you set the layer distance
ΔE, that is the distance between the layers of the color gamuts.
i
i
Note: You can make the window bigger or smaller as you wish by dragging at the sides of
the window with the mouse.

Compare
Examples:
The following graphics show some examples of color gamuts in the color space.
3D displays of the layers

Three different view are shown one below the other:
• Row 1: The "Central projection" function is enabled.
• Row 2: The "Central projection" function is disabled.
Only one slider setting at a time was changed to illustrate the effect of the four sliders. The following
basic setting was used (left graphic in each case):
• "Elevation (ele=30°)" slider
• "Hue angle (hue=5°)" slider
• "ΔE (ΔE=2)" slider
The changed slider setting is shown in each case.

L=100 L=66 L=33
"ΔE" slider
ΔE=2 ΔE=5 ΔE=10
134 Version 2017

Compare
"Elevation (ele)" slider

ele=30° ele=60° ele=90°
"Hue angle (hue)" slider

hue=5° hue=180° hue=270°

Compare
2D sections throughout the color space ("Sections" enabled, L=50)
Central projection disabled Central projection enabled Central projection disabled

Wire model disabled Wire model disabled Wire model enabled
136 Version 2017

Compare
'Statistics' View
You can open this view by clicking the "Statistics" tab.
Display of statistical results
The statistical results provide you with information about error distribution of the two data sets. You
can choose between three different diagrams:
• Histogram
• Trend
• Trend with mean
The error is selected by means of the following parameters:

• ΔE(ab), ΔE(2000): Color differences relating to Lab color values, calculation based on different
definitions for color distances
• ΔL, Δa, Δb: Lab differential color values of reference and comparison data
• ΔC, Δh: Chroma and hue difference
In addition, the deviation is shown for the selected parameter, showing the mean, the standard devi-
ation as the dimension for the scatter and the maximum value (specifying the patch number).
Display of the Error Histogram
You can view the frequency of actions in a histogram or bar graph. The frequencies are specified as
absolute values in this diagram.

Compare
This histogram displays the frequency of errors of various differential values. The error magnitude is
depicted along the horizontal axis, for example the values for color distance ΔE(ab) from 0 to 10. The
vertical axis displays the frequency of these color distances. In other words, the histogram provides
you with information about the distribution of errors of a certain size (in this case, the number of
color distances). You can assume that both data sets are well matched if the greatest frequencies are
found in the low-range values and if the frequency tends towards 0 as the error magnitude increases.
With identical data sets, there is only one bar at 0 as no color deviations can occur.
In the "Parameter" box to the right of the diagram, you can select which errors will be shown.
Point the mouse at a bar in the diagram to display a tooltip showing the frequency and upper and
lower limit of that bar.
Display of the error distribution (trend)
Scatter diagrams, also referred to as x-y diagrams, are used to provide a graphic display of data with-
out trends or to detect first trends in data sets. Pairs of variates are entered as single dots in the scat-
ter diagram.
In this scatter diagram, the error (differential value) is shown by a dot for each patch of the test chart
or control element. Point the mouse pointer at these dots to display a tooltip showing the patch ID
and deviation.
You can read the error distribution from the diagrams, for example, which patches have the greatest
or smallest amount of errors.
The error distribution corresponds to the geometric arrangement of the patches in the test chart from
top left to bottom right.
138 Version 2017

Compare
As a means of orientation, you can enable "Color dots" to see which patches are represented by dots.
All the dots are shown in the color of the relevant patch in the test chart or test strip. An overview in
the status bar shows the evaluated reference and comparison data. This is just the patches that are
found in both data files.
The more the values are scattered, the greater the deviations between the two data sets. You can see
this more clearly in the third diagram "Trend with mean".
Display of the error distribution (trend with mean)
In this scatter diagram, the calculated mean (olive-green line) and scatter (yellow lines) are added to
the previous display.
'CIE report' View

You can open this view by clicking the "CIE report" tab. It displays the overall result (Quality Check)
of a comparison of measured data.
Display of the results (Quality Check)
When you open the reference and comparison data, an overview with the main results of the compar-
ison then appears. Click the relevant tab on the left to view more details of the comparison.
You can print the view as a log (see "General Information about Printing Your Data", page 272).
The result gives you an overview of how accurately the two data sets match each other and is divided
into the following sections:
• Total results

Compare
• Dot gain at 25%, 40%, 50%, 70%, 75% and/or 80%
• Density values
• CIELab color values
• Analysis
• Proof report
For a better overview, these sections (except for "Total results") are minimized to a caption bar and
can be shown or hidden by clicking this bar.
i
i
Note: In the "Preferences > CIE report" dialog (see "'CIE Report' Tab", page 270), you can
select which sections will be shown by checking the relevant boxes.
An icon at the end of the bar shows you the result of the comparison:
No values available
All the values are in the tolerance range.
At least one value is not in the tolerance range.
Only for proof report:
One value is at the tolerance limit, all other values are in the tolerance range.
The result refers to the four process colors cyan, magenta, yellow and black and is shown with the
appropriate initial letters and color bars. To date, process standards are defined only for four-color
printing with these colors. For that reason, spot colors ("Multicolor" option) are not shown in this dia-
log.
The broken lines on the bars mark a typical tolerance range. Small black arrows are used to highlight
the differential values that exceed the bar graph.
If no color data is available, for example, with dotmeters, these values are shown in black and the
other colors remain empty.
i
i
Note: For dotmeters, for example, the display of the results only contains the dot gain com-
parison. For that reason, switch to the dot gain and printing characteristic view for more
details ("Tonal values" tab).
Total results
The overall result from all the evaluated data is indicated by a vertical black line on a color bar. The
color bar goes from green to yellow to red and shows how well the data match each other. A black
line in green means that the data are well to very well matched and, correspondingly, a line in red
means a bad to insufficient match.
i
i
Note: The various data evaluated is weighted differently in the total result. Each result of
the evaluated data contains precise details so that you can assess the quality of the data.
The icons on the right of the caption bar give you an overview of the result.
140 Version 2017

Compare
Dot gain
"Show DotGain at xx%": This section displays the dot gain at 25%, 40%, 50%, 70%, 75% and/or
80% for cyan, magenta, yellow and black. The percent shown depends on what you set in the "CIE
report" tab in the "Preferences" dialog.
The dot gains in the reference and comparison data and the calculated differential values "Δ" are
shown in tables.
The difference in dot gain between the reference and comparison data is shown by bars to the right.
Normally, the dot gain is positive in normal printing processes, but it can also be negative (test strips,
dotmeters). The display switches dynamically.
Density values
This section displays the solid tint density values for cyan, magenta, yellow and black. In addition, the
difference in density between the reference and comparison data is shown in the "Δ" column and by
bars on the right.
CIELab Color Values

This section displays the solid tint CIELab values for the primary and secondary colors (black, cyan,
magenta, yellow, red, green and blue) and also for paper white and CMY gray (Overprint).
The difference between the reference and comparison data is shown in the "ΔE" column and by bars
on the right.
Analysis
All the test chart or test strip patches that are in both the reference and comparison data are evalu-
ated in the analysis and three statistical values are computed. Patches that are only in one file are
ignored in the analysis. If patches have the same CMYK tonal values, the first patch with this value is
evaluated in the analysis. The following values are shown in a table:
• the mean of the difference in color (mean ΔE)
• the scatter (standard deviation)
• the maximum deviation value
• the patch number with the greatest deviation (maximum)

Compare
Proof report
The overall ΔE proof result gives you an overview of the most important color data.
This simplified form of the in-depth single evaluations is based on the media strip method recom-
mended by FOGRA for checking process standards. You can also view this on its own using the "Proof
report" tab.
This proof report displays the color distances ΔE and the maximum value defined for the process
standard as well as the patch number for the following parameters:
• Paper: paper white, printing material
• Mean value
• Maximum
• Primary colors (Max): CMY total
• Maximum ΔH primary colors: maximum hue difference of ΔE for primary colors
• Mean ΔH gray: mean hue difference of ΔE for grays
• Black, cyan, magenta and yellow: single results for the primary colors
• Red, green and blue: single results for the secondary colors
The "Status" of the result is also listed:

• Green circle and "OK": The ΔE value is less than the maximum value and, consequently, is
within the tolerance range.
• Red circle and "Not OK": The ΔE value is greater than the maximum value and, consequently, is
not in the tolerance range.
• Yellow triangle and "Attention": The ΔE value is (almost) the same as the maximum value and,
consequently, is at the limit of the tolerance range.
142 Version 2017

Compare
'Proof statistics' View

Click the "Proof statistics" tab to view three diagrams with statistical results to compare the two data
sets.
Summary proof statistics
The statistical results provide you with information about error distribution of the color data in the
data sets.
For a comparison of both data sets, the values measured are used or the color deviations (differences
in color) ΔE for the Lab color values are calculated from the measured color data of the test charts.
The statistical results appear in four areas:
• At the top, a histogram for error distribution (frequency distribution) of the ΔE deviations
• At the bottom left, a scatter diagram towards chroma (distribution of the Δa and Δb color differ-
ences)
• At the bottom right, a scatter diagram in relation to lightness (ΔL differences)
• In the column on the right, a display with different ΔE values
Data table
To the right of the diagrams is a column showing values that are calculated from the Lab color values
of both data sets.
• Mean: Mean of all ΔE values
• StdDev: Standard deviation as the dimension for the scatter of the ΔE values
• Max: Maximum error (greatest ΔE value)
• White, Black: ΔE values of white and black
• C, M, Y: ΔE values of the primary colors (cyan, magenta and yellow)
• R, G, B: ΔE values of the secondary colors (red, green and blue)
Display of the Error Histogram

Compare
You can view the frequency of actions in a histogram or bar graph. The frequencies can be specified
as absolute values or relative (in percent) to the maximum frequency.
This histogram displays the frequency of errors. The error magnitude is depicted along the horizontal
axis, in this case the values for color distance ΔE(ab) from 0 to 10. The vertical axis displays the fre-
quency of these color distances. In other words, the histogram provides you with information about
the number of color distances of a certain size.
You can assume that the color data of both data sets are well matched if the greatest frequencies are
With identical data sets, there is only one bar at 0 as no color deviations can occur.
Display of the error distribution (trend)
Scatter diagrams, also referred to as x-y diagrams, are used to provide a graphic display of data with-
out trends or to detect first trends in data sets. Pairs of variates are entered as single dots in the scat-
ter diagram.
In this scatter diagram, the error (differential value) is shown by a dot for each patch of the test chart.
You can read the error distribution from the diagrams:
• on the left, in relation to chroma (Δa and Δb differences)
• on the right, in relation to lightness (ΔL differences)
The more the values are scattered, the greater the deviations between the two data sets.
In the left diagram, you can recognize any color shifts by clouds of dots going towards a certain color
(color cast).
The right scatter diagram has another two details:
• The green line marks the mean.
• The two yellow lines limit the area of standard deviation as the dimension for scattering.
144 Version 2017

Compare
If the dots are found mainly in the positive area, this means that the second value has become lighter;
if the dots are in the negative area, the value has become darker. In this way, you can recognize
errors, for example, in media simulation in proof profiles.
'Color values' View

You can select the 'Color values' view whenever both reference data and comparison data were
opened. This view compares the data of all the colors that have Lab values.
The function is designed mainly for the comparison of measured data that do not have many color
patches, e.g. to compare custom spot color control strips with the currently measured results.
Besides displaying the Lab values for the reference and comparison measurement and the differential
values, the view also lets you assess fast whether the current result is within the required range.
'ΔLab report' View

Four histograms are displayed when you click the "ΔLab report" tab.
Display of the delta histograms
These four histograms display the frequency distribution of differential color values for the data mea-
sured in the two selected data sets.
These histograms display the frequency of differential values. The horizontal axis displays the size of
these differential values. The vertical axis displays the frequency of these differential values. In other
words, the histogram provides you with information about the number of differential values of a cer-
tain size.
With identical data sets, there is only one bar at 0 as no deviations can occur. By contrast, a greater
number of bars means greater deviation and, consequently, a bad match of the two data sets.
• ΔE: The first histogram shows the frequency of color distances Δ between 0 and 16.
• ΔL, Δa, Δb: The other three histograms show a frequency distribution of differences relating to
lightness (ΔL) or chroma (Δa and Δb) between -8 and +8. Based on these diagrams, you can
recognize a trend for ink fluctuations.
All values that are not within the displayed range are marked by a red bar.
The following data are shown to the right of the histograms:
• Mean

Compare
• Extr. = extreme value (greatest positive or negative value)
• Max.Ind or Extr.Ind = index number of the patch with the greatest deviation
146 Version 2017

Compare
'ΔLCH report' View

Four histograms are displayed when you click the "ΔLCH report" tab.
Display of the delta histograms
These four histograms display the frequency distribution of differential color values for the data mea-
sured in the two selected data sets.
These histograms display the frequency of differential values. The horizontal axis displays the size of
these differential values. The vertical axis displays the frequency of these differential values. In other
words, the histogram provides you with information about the number of differential values of a cer-
tain size.
With identical data sets, there is only one bar at 0 as no deviations can occur. By contrast, a greater
number of bars means greater deviation and, consequently, a bad match of the two data sets.
• ΔE: The first histogram shows the frequency of color distances Δ between 0 and 16.
• ΔL, ΔC, ΔH: The other three histograms show a frequency distribution of differences relating to
lightness (ΔL), to chroma (ΔC) and hue angle (ΔH) between -8 and +8. Based on these dia-
grams, you can recognize probable fluctuations in saturation.
All values that are not within the displayed range are marked by a red bar.
The following data are shown to the right of the histograms:
• Mean
• Extr. = extreme value (greatest positive or negative value)
• Max.Ind or Extr.Ind = index number of the patch with the greatest deviation

Compare
'Tonal values' View

You can open this view by clicking the "Tonal values" tab.
Display of the dot gain/printing characteristic
The density-based results can be seen in three different diagrams:
• Dot gain
• Printing Characteristic
• Density curve
The comparison of the curves in these diagrams makes it easy for you to check the quality of a device
or process calibration or linearization.
For linearization (e.g. of an imagesetter or platesetter), a test strip is output and measured, giving you
the actual values. The nominal values are specified by device and process standards. Correction val-
ues (calibration values) are determined from the nominal and actual values. Ideally, the actual values
match the nominal values if you output and measure a test strip again after linearization.
After calibration, you can display the nominal values as reference data and the actual values as com-
parison data. This allows you to check the quality of linearization and to determine whether and how
much the actual values deviate from the nominal values; in other words, whether you have to rerun
calibration. This also allows you to detect when a renewed calibration/linearization is necessary.
However, this is easier with a long-term analysis (see "Working with 'Analysis'", page 153).
Display
The reference data have curves with continuous lines and the comparison data curves with dashed
lines. You can display the curves together or separately for the reference and comparison data and
likewise for all colors together or each color separately. You can also display the differential curves.
The following data are used for the comparison:
• the absolute density values measured
• the difference of the measured density values
• the absolute screen percents and dot gains calculated from the density
• a difference of the determined screen percents (identical to the difference of dot gain)
i
i
Note: Only screen percents and dot gain are used for plate measurements.
Only the primary colors are evaluated when examining the density. The reason for this is that a
unique density value (red, green or blue density filter) that can be used as a reference cannot be
assigned for secondary and tertiary colors.
An analysis of this view will give you usable results only if the dot gain curves can be calculated from
measured densities and/or spectral values.
For that reason, you should always enable the two respective options in "Preferences > Measure-
ment":
148 Version 2017

Compare
• "Measure and save density values as well (if supported by instrument)"
• "Measure and save spectral remissions as well (if supported by instrument)"
Display of the dot gain curves

and/or a color shift may occur. 
Dot gain is the difference between the tonal values before and after processing. It can also be nega-
tive (dot loss).
In the diagram with the dot gain curves, the horizontal axis displays the tonal values of the film or
data set, and the vertical axis the dot gain.
also measure the density when measuring the colors (selected in the "Preferences" dialog).
measured, by general approximation from the Lab(xyz) color values.
Display of the printing characteristic

45°.
the way the press works.
In process calibration, you attempt to calibrate the current printing characteristic to a reproducible
standard. The calibration curve corresponds to the difference between the printing characteristic you
want and the current one of the printing process. Generally, at least four printing characteristics
(CMYK process colors) must be set.
Display of the density curves (density profile)

The density profile view shows the density curves scaled from D = 0.0 to D = 3.0, the range that is
important for reproduction. The relation between tonal values and density values is shown in this dia-
gram.
If deviations are detected (e.g. drifts), these density curves can provide you with details about the
change, for example, whether you have to rerun linearization.
'Data table' View

You can open this table by clicking the "Data table" tab.

Compare
Display of the data table

This view displays a table with all the measured and calculated values. You can select which data will
be shown in the table by checking the appropriate boxes to the right of the table. You can change the
column width by dragging at the right edge, holding down the mouse button.
The values are sorted by size or alphabetically if you click the column heading:
• first click: ascending
• second click: descending
• third click: by patch number
You can sort the table as you want and print it with "File > Print".
Explanation of the columns:
• ID: Consecutive number that identifies the patches in the test chart, starting with the first patch
• Name (A1, A2, ..., G8, ...): Name of the patches in the test chart
• CYAN, MAGENTA, YELLOW, BLACK: Reference data depending on test chart defined
• L*[1], a*[1], b*[1]: Lab color values of the reference data
• X[1], Y[1], Z[1]: Measured XYZ color values of the reference data
• C*[1]: Chroma of the reference data
• h[1]: Hue angle of the reference data
• Dc[1], Dm[1], Dy[1]: Measured red, blue and green density of the reference data
• Dv[1]: Visual density of the reference data
• Dot[1]: Measured or calculated screen percents of the reference data
• DotGain[1]: Dot gain of the reference data
• L*[2], a*[2], b*[2]: Lab color values of the comparison data
• X[2], Y[2], Z[2]: Measured XYZ color values of the comparison data
• C*[2]: Chroma of the comparison data
• h[2]: Hue angle of the comparison data
• Dc[2], Dm[2], Dy[2]: Measured red, blue and green density of the comparison data
• Dv[2]: Visual density of the comparison data
• Dot[2]: Measured or calculated screen percents of the comparison data
• DotGain[2]: Dot gain of the comparison data
• ΔL, Δa, Δb: Lab differential color values of reference and comparison data
150 Version 2017

Compare
• ΔC*: Chroma difference (difference of the two chromas C*[2] minus C*[1])
• Δh: Hue angle difference (h[2] minus h[1])
• ΔDc, ΔDm, ΔDy: Density differences (red, green and blue)
• ΔDv: Visual difference in density
• ΔDot: Dot gain differences
• ΔE(ab), ΔE(2000): color differences relating to Lab values, calculation based on different defini-
tions for color distances
'Save table as CSV file' Dialog

Click "Export" in the "Data table" to open the "Save table as CSV file" dialog.
This dialog lets you save all the data of the selected columns as a CSV file.
In the CSV file, the order of the data is matched to the analysis file for the "Ugra/FOGRA CMYK media
strip CMYK V2.0" for further processing with Microsoft Excel.

Analysis
Analysis
Working with 'Analysis'

Prerequisite: The "Analysis" main function is available only if you enabled the Quality Mon-
itor application with a license key.
The following quality assessments are possible with "Analysis":

• Long-term analysis of the color data of several test charts or control elements (time series anal-
ysis, see "Information about Long-term Analysis", page 153).
• Comparison of more than two test charts or control elements
• Production check (see "Production check", page 165)
• Printout of quality reports ("Analysis report" with selectable tonal values and/or "Production
Check as per ISO 12647-2")
Information about Long-term Analysis
Analysis
"Analysis" lets you assess several color data sets created during a certain period. The results are
shown in three different analysis reports and depict trends relating to changes. If you check a test
chart or test strip at regular intervals, you can see how a process changes ("drifts off").
A time series analysis allows you to check whether and how changes in ambient conditions (e.g.
humidity, temperature), the replacement of worn parts (e.g. rubber blanket), the use of different inks
(e.g. from another manufacturer or a different batch) and different paper or fountain solutions can
affect the process. You can judge as of what point the changes are critical and when linearization or
calibration is necessary.
The results also show whether the changes are regular or whether they fluctuate and whether they
are found constantly or appear only as of a certain point. You can also print the results out as a record
(quality reports).
File Management
The file management function in "Analysis" lets you edit up to 15,000 data sets. Only the locations,
dot gains and densities are extracted when a data set is opened and they are saved together with the
path to the original file. This data format simplifies management and makes it easier to compare dif-
ferent elements.
For a long-term analysis, use the data of a process standard as the reference or select the measured
data of a test chart or control element. Based on these reference data, you then compare other mea-
sured data of test charts or control elements either individually or all together (mean values) see
'Mean calculation of test chart data' Dialog).

Analysis
You can change the data set combination and the data selected as the reference data as required.
You can save the combined measured data as a series in xml format.
Series
All the data sets used for a long-term analysis are grouped together in one series. You can either com-
pile a new series or open an existing one. Both options allow you to make any number of modifica-
tions within the series (adding other data sets, disabling or deleting data sets already in the series,
changing the order or the reference). Use the "New", "Open", Add" and "Save" buttons on the right
as well as the "Change entry" dialog that you can open by double-clicking an item in the data table.
The series is saved as an xml file.
Reference data set

The reference data set provides you with defaults for a comparison and overall assessment. A
selected process standard (it has "P" as its "ID") is set by default as the reference data set. If you dis-
able this process standard, the first data set (ID = 1) in the data table is then automatically used as
the reference and "Ref" displays as its ID. You can change the reference data set as desired. Double-
click an item in the data table to open the 'Change entry' Dialog where you can make the changes
you want to the current data set.
Hotfolder
You can define a maximum of four hot folders and their backup folders for the analysis results in the
"'Hotfolder' tab", page 268 in the "Preferences" dialog. In the reports in "Analysis", there are three
elements to the left of the button bar (between data table and status bar) that are used to control
how the hot folders are polled. The items in the hot folders are updated every 30 seconds. After the
data in the hot folder are evaluated and displayed, they are copied automatically to their backup
folder.
i
i
Note: In Prinect Image Control 1, the data for quality control (quality data) are stored in the
"Results" folder (D:\cpc24\QualityMonitor\Results). This folder often has a large data vol-
ume because the quality data of different jobs are stored there and up to four presses can
access this folder. For that reason, to have a better overview of your data, you should not
define this "Results" folder as the hot folder. Select any other folder to which you can copy
the data you wish to evaluate from the "Results" folder.
In the successor, Prinect Image Control 2, you can define any folder as the hot folder and
enter the paths for the Quality Monitor output directory. You can then specify these hot fold-
ers also in Prinect Color Toolbox as hot folders for the analysis results.
154 Version 2017

Analysis
How to use the hot folders
Use the right arrow beside the green Start button to open a list where you can select the hot folder
you want by enabling the relevant radio button. You must have defined the location of this hot folder
and of the backup folder in "Preferences > Hotfolder".
Polling of the selected hot folder starts when you click the green button.
Polling of the selected hot folder is paused when you click the yellow button (Pause).
Resume polling by clicking the green button.
Polling of this hot folder stops when you click the red button.
Dialogs
'Change entry' Dialog

You open this dialog by double-clicking an item in the data table of the following reports:
• CIE report
• Dot gain report
• Density report
• PV CIE report
• PV dot gain report
This dialog lets you change the items listed for the data sets in the open series. The dialog contains
the items of the data set used to display it. This data set is enabled in the data table (orange back-
ground).
File name
The name of the original color data file appears in this box. You cannot change this name.

Analysis
Location
The path of the original color data file appears in this box.
Click the button with the three dots to set a different location with the "Open file" dialog.
Status
The status lets you define how the current data set will be handled in the long-term analysis. There
are three status options:
• "Enabled": The data are compared with the reference data during the long-term analysis. The
box is enabled (ticked) in the list.
• "Disabled": The data are not to be included in the long-term analysis but are to remain in the
current series. The box is disabled (no tick) in the list.
You can delete the data set from the series by clicking "Remove".
• "Reference": A selected process standard (it has "P" as its "ID") is set by default as the reference
data set.
If you disable this process standard, the first data set in the list below is then automatically used
as the reference.
You cannot change the status of a reference data set. You must first define another data set as
the reference, then the status of the previous reference data set automatically switches to
"Enabled". However, the ID remains the same.
Date
Date the data file was saved on. You can change the entry by overwriting it or using the arrow keys.
The format is set: Year - Month - Day.
Time
Time the data file was saved at. You can change the entry by overwriting it or using the arrow keys.
The format is set: Hours : Minutes : Seconds.
Comment
You can type any comment you wish or modify an existing one to have a better overview of the dif-
ferent data sets.
"Update process standard
Use this function to change the current process standard. Proceed as follows:
1. Select the printing standard you want in the "Process standard" main function.
2. Double-click the first row in the data table (indicated by "P" for process standard).
3. Check the "Update process standard" box in the "Change entry" dialog and click "OK".
The dialog closes and the relevant reference values are refreshed in the data table.
Buttons
Click "OK" to confirm your settings for the current data set and copy it to the list. The dialog closes.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without changing the settings for the current data set.
156 Version 2017

Analysis
You delete the current data set from the series by clicking "Remove".
The item is removed from the list. The IDs of the subsequent data sets are changed accordingly.
Display of the result

The "Display of the result (trend)" appears for the "CIE report", at first without any data, when you
select the "Analysis" main function.
After you opened a series or compiled a new one with reference and comparison data or started a hot
folder, you can then view the following analysis reports with the appropriate tab icons:
• CIE report: Display of the overall result (long-term analysis or trend) with a comparison of the
· Solid tint CIELab values (L, a, b)
· Average deviation (ΔE(ab))
• Dot gain report: Display of the overall result (long-term analysis or trend) with a comparison of
the
· Dot gains
· The dot gain differences (ΔTWZ)
• Density report: Display of the overall result (long-term analysis or trend) with a comparison of
the
· Solid tint density values (D)
· Density differences (ΔD)
The result displays in a diagram of the selected report and below that a data table of the relevant data
sets.
Notes on the Diagrams

appropriate item in the tabs or selecting the item you want in the "View" menu. To the right of the
diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color space.
You can display a context-sensitive Online Help with the "F1" key.
Display
Color names display to the right of the graphic with two boxes:
• right box: Check or uncheck the relevant boxes to select the colors that will be shown. The num-
ber of colors (process colors, mixed colors and/or spot colors) depends on the data sets you

Analysis
selected. It is possible to view a maximum of eight colors. The color names (if any) are taken
from the data sets.
i
i
Note: If you use quality data from Prinect Image Control, you can also name the colors
according to the set printing units as "X", "Z", "U", "V", "S1", "S2", etc.
• left box: You can show or hide the tolerances of the current process standard for the defined pro-
cess colors by checking or unchecking the relevant boxes.
The name of the currently used process standard displays in the status bar. You can change the
process standard or modify the tolerances in the "Process standard" main function. Then, in
"Analysis", double-click the first row in the data table ("P" ID). Check the "Update process stan-
dard" box in the "Change entry" dialog and confirm with "OK". The inputs in the row change
accordingly.
• "Mean": You can show or hide the calculated mean for color distance (mean ΔE value) for all
color channels in the data series by enabling or disabling this option.
X axis
The analysis reports are shown as time series. These are line diagrams with the horizontal axis form-
ing the timeline. They are used to graphically illustrate time-based developments: to recognize a
"trend". You can define how the timeline (x axis) will be displayed by checking the appropriate box:
• Time: The timeline is defined in this case by the period that is defined by the date and time of
the single data sets in the series (e.g. three days).
• ID: The timeline is defined in this case by the order of the single data sets in the series ("ID").
• Sheet: In this case, the timeline is defined by the sheet number. A difference is made here
between front and back.
For example, to check the way linearization changes during a defined period, you can create the fol-
lowing series:
• Reference data: Nominal values or actual values after linearization. Ideally, these values are the
same.
• Comparison data: Actual values after linearization at a regular interval, for example, after a cou-
ple of hours.
Y axis
In the Preferences (General), you can set a fixed scaling on the Y axis to a defined maximum value
for the trend, separately for the CIE, dot gain and/or density report. The Y axis is always scaled
dynamically to a file-specific maximum value if this function is not enabled. The display is matched
automatically after this function is enabled or disabled in the Preferences.
158 Version 2017

Analysis
Example: Display of a CIE report without fixed axis scaling
The display pane is matched to the data-specific maximum value if the function is disabled.
Example: Display of a CIE report with fixed axis scaling
When the function is enabled, the display pane always appears in the same size with a defined max-
imum value, irrespective of the current range.
Zoom Functions
In an analysis report diagram, you can zoom right up to a single point by drawing a bounding box with
the mouse.
You can reset the zoom in two ways:
• by moving the mouse to the top left holding down the mouse button

Analysis
• with "Auto Range" in the context-sensitive menu (generally right-click), either in horizontal or
vertical direction or symmetrically in both directions (see Context-sensitive Menu).
in curve diagrams:
• Save As: to save the graphic as a PNG file (*.png, Portable Network Graphics). This format is
graphic.
• Ref, Cmp: to send a reference file (Ref) and/or a comparison file (Cmp) to "Compare".
To do this, in an analysis report diagram, you must click the point that represents the reference
file you want and then click "Ref" in the context-sensitive menu (generally right-click).
After that, select another point for the comparison file and click "Cmp" in the context-sensitive
menu. The two files open in "Compare" as reference and comparison data as you defined them
and appear in the test chart diagram.
• Disable: to hide outliers in measured data.
You can hide data outliers interactively and thus exclude them from averaging before the data
are averaged. This can be important, for example, if minispot measured data are used for cor-
rection of a process calibration.
In an analysis report diagram, you can use "Auto Range" in the context-sensitive menu (gener-
ally right-click) for this to scale up right to the single points in the area that interests you.
A red broken reticle displays. You must click the point that represents the outlier data set and
then click "Disable" in the context-sensitive menu. Alternatively, you can disable the check box
of the outlier data set in the data table.
Data table
You can view the data table if you drag the horizontal bar below the diagram upwards. This makes
the graphic area smaller or even totally hidden. All the data sets of a series and always all the colors
are shown in the data table, irrespective of what you select in the "View" list on the right. If necessary,
you can move the visible section of the data table using the scroll bars.
The data table always contains the following items:
160 Version 2017

Analysis
• A check box in the first column for enabling or disabling the data set you want.
You can enable or disable all data sets at one go using the check box in the caption bar. This is
practical if you disabled single data sets and wish to enable them again or, vice versa, if you wish
to display just a few data sets. In this case, disable all the data sets at one go and then pick out
the ones you wish to use.
• ID: Identification number that defines the order in the data set. The ID of the current process
standard is "P" and this standard is set as the reference by default. If it is disabled, the file you
open first is given the ID "Ref" and is automatically defined as the reference file ("Status: Refer-
ence"). All the files you open after that are defined as comparison data. They are given consec-
utive IDs in the order in which they were opened.
· The current process standard always displays in the first row with a green background.
It has an orange one if it is selected.
· A data set row also has an orange background if it is selected.


To edit the data table, double-click a row to open the "Change entry" dialog where you
can change or enter the location, status, date, time and comment for that data set or
also remove it from the series.
• Date: Date the data file was saved on. You can change the item. The format is set: 
Year.Month.Day
• Time: Time the data file was saved at. You can change the item. The format is set: 
Hours:Minutes:Seconds
• File name: Name of the original data file.
• Comment: Text you can enter to have a better overview of the different data sets.
The other content of the table depends on the analysis report you selected.
• In a "CIE report", the solid tint CIELab color values ("L", "a" and "b") and the mean deviation in
each case ("ΔE") are shown.
• In a "Dot gain report", the dot gains ("Dot Gain") and the dot gain differences ("ΔDot Gain) are
shown.
• In a "Density report", the solid tint density values "D" and the density differences "ΔD" are
shown.
• The colors are shown by the relevant color fill in the heading of each column ("L", "a", "b", "ΔE",
"Dot Gain", "ΔDot Gain", "D" and "ΔD").

Analysis
'CIE report' View

You can open this view by clicking the "CIE Report" tab. It displays the overall result (trend) of a com-
parison of measured data.
This view first appears as a template without any data when you select the "Analysis" main function.
The analysis result appears in the CIE report when you open a series and reference and comparison
data are defined or when a hot folder starts.
Display of the result (trend)
The result gives you an overview of the measured data during a certain period.
The solid tint CIELab color values are shown in the data table for all the colors of the measured data.
Each mean deviation ΔE is shown on the side and also in the diagram above, depending on whether
you selected "Time", "ID" or "Sheet" for "X axis".
162 Version 2017

Analysis
'Dot gain report' View

You can open this view by clicking the "Dot gain report" tab.
Normally, dot gain is measured in the midtones at 40% and in the shadows at 80%. These percents
are mandatory for process standards. In Prinect Color Toolbox the dot gain can be specified in steps
of 10% and in addition for the two checkpoints 25% and 75%.
also measure the density when measuring the colors.
measured, by general approximation from the Lab(xyz) color values.
Dot gain is the difference between the tonal values before and after processing. It can also be nega-
tive (dot loss).
An analysis of this view will give you usable results only if the dot gain curves can be calculated from
measured densities and/or spectral values.
For that reason, you should always enable the two respective options in "Preferences > Measure-
ment":
• "Measure and save density values as well (if supported by instrument)"
• "Measure and save spectral remissions as well (if supported by instrument)"


Analysis
Display
In "View" you can show and hide the single color channels and tolerances like in "CIE report".
You select the checkpoint you want for dot gain (in steps of 10%, also at 25% or 75%) in the list.
Normally, evaluation is at 40% and 80%. These percents are mandatory for process standards.
If there are dot gains for the selected checkpoint, the values display in the table in the "Dot Gain"
column for all the colors in the measured data. The dot gain difference ("ΔDot Gain") is also listed in
each case.
The "relative" list box gives you two display options:
• "relative" disabled: The dot gains (Dot Gain) display, depending on whether you selected "Time",
"ID" or "Sheet" for "X axis".
• "relative" enabled: The dot gain differences (ΔDot Gain) display in relation to the reference (pro-
cess standard or reference data set) for "Time", "ID" or "Sheet".
'Density report' View

You can open this view by clicking the "Density report" tab.

If deviations are detected (e.g. drifts), these density curves can provide you with details about the
change, for example, whether you have to rerun linearization.
164 Version 2017

Analysis
Production check
In order for an OK sheet to be released, a check is run to see whether the tolerances of the selected
process standard are complied with. In a production check (production variation = PV), during print-
ing the sheets are no longer compared with this process standard but with the OK sheet. It is not nec-
essary for all of the sheets to be optimal in this comparison. However, in compliance with ISO 12647-
2, at least 68% of the print values must be within the defined tolerances. The tolerance for cyan,
magenta and black is ±4 for ΔE, only for yellow is a ΔE of ±5 allowed.
A production check is run separately to the conventional analysis but its operation is analogous to it.
By default, the first sheet is set as the reference data set. If required, this can be changed like in the
conventional analysis (see "Reference data set", page 154).
You can check production in three different views:
• PV Overview: Statistical overview of overall production
• PV CIE report: Displays solid tint CIELab color values for all color channels in the data series.
You can select a single view or any combination of the data.
• PV dot gain report: Displays dot gains or dot gain differences for all color channels in the data
series. You can select a single view or any combination of the data.
The "PV Overview" is the main document in the analysis and is a summary of all the results. The other
two views, "PV CIE report" and "PV dot gain report", are for in-depth analysis and debugging, espe-
cially if the result of the production check was negative. These let you identify and localize an error.

Analysis
'PV Overview' View

You can open this view by clicking the "PV Overview" tab.

The overview provides you with a general summary of the results of the production check.
The OK sheet is compared to the process standard in the top part of the view. The lower part shows
the statistical analysis of production quality. This means that the production sheets are compared
with the OK sheet.
A bar showing the percent of values within the tolerances displays below the information about the
number of sheets measured (= analyzed sheets + OK sheets). The bar is green if this total value com-
plies with the specification of ISO12647-2.
The OK sheet is the reference during the production check. Because Prinect Color Toolbox does not
have information about which sheet is the OK sheet, "Sheet 1" is always used by default as the OK
sheet. If you wish to use a different sheet from the data set as the OK sheet, you must define this as
the reference. To do this, go to the "PV CIE report" or "PV dot gain report" view. Double-click the item
you want in the list to open the "Change entry" dialog where you select "Reference" as the "Status"
and confirm the dialog with "OK". In the data table, "Ref" then displays in "ID" for this sheet.
In the "PV Overview", the table shows the measured values for ΔE, density and dot gain at 40% and
80% for each color channel. The values in each case show you the mean and the highest and lowest
values. The table provides you with a more accurate analysis of which values might not be within the
tolerance (in the example shown, for example, ΔE for yellow). Below the table, the tolerance analysis
is summarized for ΔE, dot gain and dot gain spread.
166 Version 2017

Analysis
The "Spread" is the maximum difference between the three chromatic process colors in the midtone.
This is the maximum spacing between the curves in the graph.
'PV CIE report' View

You can open this view by clicking the "PV CIE report" tab.
This detailed report for the color channels in the data series lets you analyze more accurately where,
i.e. on which sheet, a color value was out of the specified ΔE. "1" is the reference, in other words, the
sheet defined as the OK sheet.
The result gives you an overview of the quality result of the color data.
The solid tint CIELab color values are shown in the data table for all the colors of the measured data.
Each mean deviation ΔE is shown on the side and also in the diagram above, depending on whether
you selected "Time", "ID" or "Sheet" for "X axis".
Display
The check boxes below "View" let you control which color curves (right) and tolerances (left) will dis-
play. In our example, all four primary colors and the tolerances for cyan (ΔE=4, bluish background)
and yellow (ΔE=5, yellowish background) display.
The value for yellow on sheet 14 is slightly out of the tolerance in this case. This is equivalent to 95%
within the tolerance in the "ΔE" column for yellow in the table of the PV overview:

Analysis
'PV dot gain report' View

You can open this view by clicking the "PV dot gain report" tab.

The result gives you an overview of the quality result of the dot gains and/or dot gain differences.
Display
In "View" you can show and hide the single color channels and tolerances like in "PV CIE report".
You select the checkpoint you want for dot gain (in steps of 10%, also at 25% or 75%) in the list.
Normally, evaluation is at 40% and 80%. These percents are mandatory for process standards.
If there are dot gains for the selected checkpoint, the values display in the table in the "Dot Gain"
column for all the colors in the measured data. The dot gain difference ("ΔDot Gain") is also listed in
each case.
The "relative" check box is enabled for the graphic. The dot gain differences (ΔDot Gain) display in
relation to the reference (OK sheet) for "Time", "ID" or "Sheet".
168 Version 2017

Analysis
In our example, the dot gain at 40% for cyan on sheets 2 and 16 thru 18 is out of the tolerance. This
is equivalent to 80% within the tolerance in the "Dot Gain 40%" column for cyan in the table of the
PV overview:
Quality Report
For your records and for archiving purposes, you can print the analysis reports and production check
to a PDF file or to paper (see "General Information about Printing Your Data", page 272).

Create
Create
Working with 'Create'

Prerequisite: The "Create" main function is available only if you enabled the Profile Tool
application with a license key.
"Create" describes all the steps you must take to create an ICC output profile.
• You can set the parameters for profile calculation
· Printing process parameters (process, paper grade/media, process colors/profile type)
· Color composition/black generation (UCR and GCR setting)
· Options for profile calculation (gamut mapping, paper white correction and color data
correction)
· Loading and saving profile settings
• You can calculate the ICC output profile and enter save options for the profile (profile descrip-
tion)
(Refer to "'Profile calculation' dialog", page 172)
• You can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade, process
color, screening and plate). See "Process parameters", page 251.
• You can save the ICC profile with or without the measured data, save the measured data to an
ASCII text file in ISO 12642 (IT8.7) format.
• You can view different color spaces and diagrams, see "Views and Diagrams", page 191
· Test charts with color patches and information about the current patch
· xy, ab or La/Lb diagram
· Dot gain/printing characteristic
· Gray balance or density curves
• You can view source and target color values for the output profile. See "Color calculator", page
239.
• You can calculate a DeviceLink profile from two ICC profiles, see "DeviceLink Profile", page 246.
• You can calculate gray balance data for process calibration or to edit reference data for gray bal-
ance correction of a process calibration. See "Gray balance calibration", page 255.

Create
Creating an ICC output profile based on the data

of a test chart
Prerequisites:
• You can create a new ICC press profile either from the color data or from an ICC profile that has
color data.
• You can calculate an ICC output profile only if you have a test chart with at least 100 color
patches. The smallest test chart in the shipment that you can use to calculate a profile is the
"PrintOpen Basic 135" with 135 color patches.
• Other requirements must be met depending on the process, for example, there must be solid
tints (CMY and RGB colors), contones and a certain number of combinations. The open data file
is checked automatically and, in some cases, rejected with an error message.
To calculate the profile, you must set parameters for the printing process, color composition and
black generation and any other options you need. You can use preferences or define your own set-
tings for it. You can save your settings in a parameter set and load them again.
You can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade, process
color, screening and plate) and save them in the profile as well. They are displayed in the profile
browser and facilitate profile selection.
The "Generate profile" dialog opens automatically after you open a measurement file in the "Create"
tab. The test chart you selected in the "Measure" tab stays open if you were already working in "Mea-
sure" and then switched to "Create". In this case, you have to open the "Profile calculation" dialog
yourself by clicking "Generate profile".
'Profile calculation' dialog

The "Profile calculation" dialog opens automatically when you open a file with measured data in the
"Create" tab. You can also invoke this dialog by clicking "Generate profile" in the button bar or select-
ing it in the menu.
In this dialog, you set the parameters for calculation and also start calculation itself.
Set Parameters for Print or Proof

• Process parameters (process/technology, paper grade/media, process colors/profile type)
• Color composition/black generation (UCR and GCR setting)
172 Version 2017

Create
• Special options for profile calculation (gamut mapping, paper white correction and smoothing of
measured data)
Click "OK" to confirm your parameter setup and close the dialog.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any changes to it. The last setting is restored.
'Print process parameters'

Process/Technology
This is where you can select the field of application or printing process for which you will generate an
ICC output profile. The settings are also influenced by the paper grade you select.
When you select your field of application, the parameters for "Color composition/Black generation"
(GCR/black) and for "Profile calculation options" (gamut mapping, proof setting and correction of
measured data) are automatically set with default values which generally produce good results.
This can be seen by the attribute "Default" which appears in the relevant boxes. You can, however,
change these default values and use either your own settings, other defaults from the printing shop
or values determined by a series of tests. This changed setup is marked by " Custom":
• "Digital printing": typical defaults for digital printing
• "ISO Offset Printing": typical defaults for offset printing with the new ISO12647-2_2006 (ECI) set-
tings.
• Offset Printing": typical defaults for offset printing based on the Euro standard or SWOP for
coated paper are used.
• "Newspaper Printing": typical defaults for newspaper printing with black generated with UCR
(not GCR!) and the total dot area limited (for normal newspapers).
• "Gravure Printing": typical defaults for gravure.
• "Proof": typical defaults for proofing to color ink jet printers.
• "Screen Printing": typical defaults for screen printing.
• "Flexo Printing": typical defaults for flexographic printing.
• "Color Ink Jet Printing": typical defaults for printing to ink jet printers, especially for proofing but
also for offices for higher resolutions on coated paper.
• "Color Laser Printing": typical defaults for printing to color laser printers for offices on normal
white laser printer/copier paper. These printers frequently use their own procedure for the gen-
eration of black (GCR) which is taken into consideration during the profile calculation.
• "Multicolor Offset Printing": defaults for printing with more than four process colors with a spe-
cial 50% GCR setting (Multicolor).
• "Ink Saving": typical defaults for offset printing with GCR for stabilizing the printing process and
saving ink.

Create
Our quality tests have shown the following parameters to be optimal: total dot area 280%, K =
98%, GCR = 70%.
The default set automatically for "Process/Technology" in the "Generate profile" dialog depends on
the type of process standard set.
Process Standard Type Process/Technology

Offset or CGATS/G7 ISO Offset Printing
Proof Proof
Digital Digital Printing
Paper class/Media
In this box, you can select the printing material for which you want an optimized ICC output profile:
• "Woodfree coated": includes the two coated classic paper grades, "gloss coated" and "matt
coated"
Printing material with a very smooth surface, special ink absorption and high opacity, very suited
for the reproduction of black-and-white and color photos. This paper is also known as art paper
that can go from matt to gloss. Coated papers are used for labeling and packaging printing or
for high-quality productions such as catalogs and coffee table books. The paper weight ranges
between 80 and 100 g/m² for machine-coated papers and between 90 and 135 g/m² for coated
art papers. It is equivalent to print substrate "PS1" in the new offset process standard ISO 12647-
2:2013.
• "Woodfree uncoated": includes the two uncoated classic paper grades, "uncoated white" and
"uncoated yellowish".
The printing of uncoated paper depends greatly on the quality of its surface finish. Uncoated
papers can have a calendered (machine-glazed paper) or super-calendered finishing.
Uncoated paper is used especially for offset book-printing and rotary printing. Uncoated, wood-
free papers are known as fine papers.
It is equivalent to print substrate "PS5" in the new offset process standard ISO 12647-2:2013.
• "Proof glossy", "Proof matt", "Proof semi-matt": Special papers for proofing with high-quality
color ink jet printers (e.g. Iris proofer) or with thermosublimation printers.
• "Digital glossy", "Digital matt", "Digital uncoated": Paper grades for digital printing
i
i
Note: Classification compliant with the following process standards:
· ISO 12647-2 offset printing
· ISO 12647-3 newspaper printing
· ISO 12647-4 gravure printing
174 Version 2017

Create
Process colors / Profile type

The profile type shown here ("CMYK", "CMY" or "Gray") depends on the test chart you selected.
• "3 color CMY": With a four-color test chart (CMYK), you can also calculate a profile for CMY
without black if you check this box. Black generation is then disabled for the profile setup.
This function is required for printing processes where black is hard to control or if a large
amount of black has to be used because of other elements on the page (for example, fonts). In
such a case, there would be too much black in the black separation and the colors would appear
dirty.
• A three-color composition using only CMY may be the best choice for certain laser color printers
if black is calculated by internal processes in the printer and cannot be deactivated for profile
calculation.
• "Gray": A single-color gray profile just using black will be calculated if you check this box.
'Color composition / Black generation'

Black generated for the print and proof table is determined by the UCR setting for total dot area and
maximum black. Black is also influenced by the parameters "Black length" and "Black width". An
alternative method is to generate black by setting a GCR value (Gray Component Replacement) and
a starting point.
Explanations of the terms "GCR" and "UCR" can be found in the "Glossary", page 333.
Total dot area / Maximum black

The "Total dot area" and the "Maximum black" affect each other. A restriction in maximum black
affects the available density range in printing much more than a restriction of the total dot area. For
that reason, you should first try to reduce the total dot area and leave the maximum black as high as
possible.
In offset printing, black is usually the first color to be printed. It is often a good idea to restrict maxi-
mum black to between 95% and 98% so that black does not fully cover the paper surface at once
and that splitting of the next ink is diminished, consequently letting you differentiate between images
and text/graphics in the pdf.
Depending on the printing medium and printing process you use, it may be necessary to restrict the
total dot area for all colors.
• "Total dot area": The maximum dot area that can be set is obtained from the total of cyan,
magenta and yellow dot areas in the darkest neutral dot (three-color composition without black)
and the maximum dot area permitted for black.
You can set the total dot area to values between 110% and 400%.
If no specific values are required by the printer, you should enter the following values:
· a value between 280% and 330% for offset printing
· 260% for toner digital printing
· 400% for ink jet proofers on coated paper to have the maximum gamut.

Create
i
i
Note: With values below 210%, you can have a loss of print quality. For example, issues can
occur in the transitions with secondary colors because the total dot area is no longer
achieved in the composition of the secondary colors (e.g. red = 100% each for Y and M;
with 110% total dot area it can be printed only with 55% each for Y and M).
For some machines, however, such low values are required for the total dot area for tech-
nical reasons.
If you want to set a higher value, you must first increase the maximum dot area for black.
A small loss of contrast always occurs in the image: the lower the selected total dot area, the
higher the loss of contrast. A satisfactory contrast can be achieved by defining a high value if
this is possible with the printing medium you use.
• "Maximum black": Use the setting for maximum black to define the maximum screen percent
possible in the black separation of the print and proof table.
You can set the maximum dot area for black to a value ranging between 60% and 100% (or to
the press limit of the test chart).
UCR setting
The UCR calculated for black in the print and proof table depends on the setting for total dot area
and maximum black.
See the descriptions in "Total dot area / Maximum black", page 175 for more information about these
two settings.
GCR setting
Click "Modify" if you wish to generate black either with GCR or with black length and width. The 'GCR
setting/Black generation' Dialog then appears.
Profile calculation options
You can use these special profile calculation options to define other specific settings for your print
and/or proof table (expand the section by clicking "Show profile options").
Gamut mapping
This function allows you to define special options for color composition in the color conversion table
for printing (print table/separations).
Gamut mapping lets you set how the original images will be matched visually to the color gamut
available in printing.
By default, an optimized gamut mapping for your printing process is calculated.
Click "Modify" to open the 'Gamut mapping' Dialog.
i
i
Note: Corrections relating to a specific image should not be made using the profile settings
but with the appropriate functions of an image editing program.
176 Version 2017

Create
Paper white correction

You can set further options with this function that are important for certain proofs. You can correct
the effect of fluorescent whitening either by automatic paper white correction or by a spectral con-
version of the color data. Paper white can also be corrected by matching the lightness of the L value
to proofing.
If you wish to change these settings, click "Modify" to open the 'Correction of color data' Dialog.
Smoothing of measured values
This function allows you to trigger an automatic correction of the measured data (plausibility check)
or an intelligent smoothing of the color data. The changed color data are used for profile calculation.
The original color data are retained, however.
i
i
Note: If you use this correction function in the "Measure" main function, the changed color
data will be saved and your original values will be overwritten. For that reason, we recom-
mend that you save the changed data as a new file.
If you wish to change these settings, click "Modify" to open the "'Smoothing of color data' Dialog",
page 187.
Profile parameters
Preferences for color composition and black generation are set after you define the field of application
("Process/Technology", "Paper class/Media" and "Process colors/Profile type"). You can save param-
eters for the entire dialog in a parameter set and display it again using the name you assigned it.
Click "Store" to display the "'Store parameter set' Dialog", page 252 where you can save your current
parameters for profile calculation to a parameter file you name. These settings are then available for
other profile calculations, making it unnecessary to retype the parameters. You can, of course, make
changes to them at any time.
Click "Load" to display the "'Load parameter set' Dialog", page 252 where you can select and open a
parameter set with saved settings for profile calculation.
Calculation
In "Calculation", you start calculation of the ICC output profile after you selected the profile size and
profile specification (V2 or V4). 
You can then save the new ICC profile to any folder you specified or directly to the system folder for
profiles.
Prerequisite: You can calculate an ICC output profile only if you have a test chart with at
least 100 color patches. Other requirements must be met depending on the process, for
example, there must be solid tints (CMY and RGB colors), contones and a certain number
of combinations.
The open data file is checked automatically and, in some cases, rejected with an error message. The
smallest test chart in the shipment that you can use to calculate a profile is the "PrintOpen Basic 135"
with 135 color patches.

Create
Calculating the ICC output profile

• "Profile size": The transformation tables in the profiles are calculated with a different color
depth and a different number of coordinates depending on what you set here. The computing
time required, the profile size and the quality of the ICC output profile vary accordingly. The
default for profile size is "Large (16 bit profile)".
You can select the following profile sizes in the list box:
· "Small (8 bit profile)": All the transformation tables are 8 bit.
· "Medium (8/16 bit profile)": As "Small" but the colorimetric transformation tables are 16
bit and have a large number of coordinates (as "Large").
· "Large (16 bit profile)": All the transformation tables are 16 bit and have a large number
of coordinates.
• "Calculate V4 profile": The V4 specification for ICC profiles that has been valid since 2002
allows additional tags and structures such as matrixes. However, these new profiles are still not
very widespread and are not yet supported by many applications.
The ICC profile is calculated on the basis of the new V4 ICC specification and not on V2.1 of 1998
if you enable this option.
Click "Start" to start an analysis of the measured data. During the analysis the program examines all
the results for errors and corrects these.
Afterwards, calculation of the profile starts. You can follow the progress of calculation in the status
display line.
A message saying that color patches with significant deviations were found may appear. Confirm this
message with "OK" to automatically correct the data and continue calculation. Click "Cancel" to stop
profile calculation. You can now remeasure or correct the implausible values and then restart profile
calculation.
You can stop calculation at any time by clicking "Stop".
Profile description
The description you type is suggested as the file name of the ICC output profile when it is being
saved.
The file name of the currently open data file and its key parameters displays automatically in the text
box. The suggested file name has no blanks to avoid issues when saving the file.
You can edit this suggested file name and type any description for the new ICC profile into this box.
We recommend that your description shows you at once what type of profile it is, e.g.
"OffsetPT1_glosscoated_IT873 U340 K95 7-5":
• Process/technology (e.g. offset)
• Paper grade/media (e.g. PT1_glosscoated or gloss coated)
• Test chart type (e.g. IT 873)
• Total dot area (e.g. U340)
178 Version 2017

Create
• Maximum black (e.g. K95)
• Black length and width (e.g. 7--5)
• [Profile type (e.g. CMYK)]
• [Number of patches (e.g. 928)]
• [set GCR value (e.g. G50)]
This profile description is saved along with the profile. Some applications or system extensions use
this entry instead of the file name for selecting ICC profiles.
After calculation of the profile is finished, close the dialog box by clicking "OK". Now you only have to
save the new ICC profile.
Click "Save" in the button bar to open the "File Save" dialog.
Select the type of file here:
• "ICC Profile (.icc)": contains the calculated profile data as well as the color data in IT8.7 format
and the parameter settings for profile generation. This type of file can be opened again by
Prinect Color Toolbox and is the default setting.
• "ICC profile without measured data (.icc)": only contains the calculated profile data (benefit:
small file size) and cannot be opened by Prinect Color Toolbox again.
• "Measured data (*.txt)": contains the color data in IT8.7 format and the parameter settings for
profile generation. This type of file can be opened again by Prinect Color Toolbox. Can be used
for archiving, for example, if the profile is saved without measured data.
'GCR setting/Black generation' Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Modify" (GCR setting) in the "Generate profile" dialog.
This dialog lets you set the way black will be generated:
• either variable achromatic with conventional GCR
• or with "Black length" (starting point) and "Black width" as UCR.

GCR black generation
• Less GCR in skintones
GCR is not used at all in some cases in fashion, portrait and furniture shots because a repro-
graphic specialist can see "dirt" in skin and wood tones if GCR is used. This option lets you
downscale the value for K+GCR in these sectors that typically have such issues.

Create
• GCR value
The "GCR value" (in percent) (Gray Component Replacement) represents the amount of chro-
matic ink (C, M, Y) that is replaced by black.
You can set a value for GCR between 10% (minimum GCR) and 100% (maximum GCR) using the
GCR slider.
i
i
Note: You define a starting point for GCR with the "Starting point K[%]" slider (see below).
· "Min. GCR": The minimum setting "10%" corresponds to normal chromatic reproduction
with skeleton black.
· "Max. GCR": The maximum setting "100%" corresponds to greatest possible achromatic
reproduction. In this case, no position in the image (except in the darker image areas)
has more than two chromatic inks plus black or only black in the neutral gray image
areas.
· In practice, a setting between 50% and 70% is usual.

With a GCR of 100%, the black screen can become very noticeable in gray in amplitude-
modulated screening (there is no longer a screen rosette there).
• Starting point K[%]
This option lets you define a cyan value between 0% and 40% for the ratio of black to cyan in
grays as of which the chromatic inks are replaced by black. The slider is set to "0%" by default.
This means that CMY are replaced immediately by black.
You can keep the highlight area clear of black by moving the sliding point. This affects light skin
tones especially because you can avoid or at least diminish the dirtying effect caused by black
at such points.
Example: Gray balance as seen in ICC profiles with 80% GCR and three different starting points 
(0%, 20%, and 35%)
· Left starting point "0%": Black is applied immediately depending on the GCR setting.
· Center starting point "20%"
180 Version 2017

Create
· Right starting point "35%": This shows that non-monotonic gray balance curves can
occur with a high GCR value (greater than 70%) and a high starting point (greater than
30%).
i
i
Note: A starting point between 10% and 15% has proved to be successful especially if fash-
ion shots with many light skin tones have to be reproduced with GCR. In this case, GCR
starts only when cyan reaches 10% to 15%, thus avoiding light skin tones from being gen-
erated with black.
Black generation with length and width
In normal color composition, black begins in the midtones (starting point or black length) and
increases slowly towards shadow. The effective range of black in chroma varies (black width).

Create
Black length
You define the starting point for black (relative to cyan in the gray area) with the "Black length" slider:
from a very short black (skeleton black) to a long black (full range).
• Short black: A black known as skeleton black is produced if the slider is in position "2".
Depending on your process, the first two levels can produce very similar results since a sudden
use of black has to be avoided. If a hue can be created using three colors, no black is used.
Black will only be added for very dark shades of black. The portion of black will increase con-
siderably with the density.
i
i
Note: The minimum setting is "2" because values less than that are of no use for reproduc-
tion.
If skeleton black is used for images, the amount of black ink can be adjusted for the text without
adversely affecting the images during the printing process. This reduces the effect of any moiré
that may appear. However, the dot area is greater and the gray balance is susceptible to fluctu-
ations in the printing process.
• Standard black: A standard black is produced in slider positions "5" to "7".

The use of black begins in the midtones and slowly increases towards shadow. This is the most
widely used type in color composition.
• Full range: A long black is produced in slider positions "8" to "10".

The use of black already begins in the quarter tones and slowly increases towards shadow. Cur-
rently the trend (ISO / Fogra) is to a long black (slider position "9").
Examples:
• For a short black set the slider to position "3", this corresponds to a 70% starting point for black
relative to cyan.
• For a long black set the slider to position "7", this corresponds to a 30% starting point for black
relative to cyan.
Black width
You define the effective range of black with the "Black width" slider: from a narrow black ("Only in
gray") to a wide black ("Full extent" - > transition to GCR).
The effective range also depends on the setting for black length.
• Narrow black: Black only affects a narrow range around the gray axis if the slider is in position
"0" (minimum setting). Only in very dark colors does it go further outwards.
• Standard black: Standard black is produced in slider position "5". Its effect is moderate, going
up into the chroma range.
• Wide black: Black goes way into the chroma range if the slider is in position "10" (maximum
setting). At present, this is the most frequently used black in color composition.
i
i
Note: Currently the trend (ISO / Fogra) is to a wide black (slider position "10"). Note that
the color gamut in the dark chromatic colors will also have constraints if you confine black
width. A black width of "5" is sufficient for a vivid dark blue to lose much of its brilliance.
182 Version 2017

Create
An optimal black is calculated by Prinect Color Toolbox on the basis of the settings for "Black length"
and "Black width" and the information taken from the color data.
'Gamut mapping' Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Modify" (gamut mapping) in the "Generate profile" dialog >
"Show profile options".
You can set a user-specific gamut mapping here or switch back to the default setting (optimized
gamut mapping).
You can change color saturation in this dialog. These changes affect the entire image, for example, if
there is not enough chroma in the image. You can also set a a gray axis correction for color paper in
this dialog.
Optimized gamut mapping
• Colors located outside the printable color space are remapped harmoniously into the space
occupied by the printable colors. Moreover, maximum utilization of all printable colors is
desired. The hue remains unchanged, the chroma, if required, is reduced moderately and the
lightness adjusted.
• Dark, chromatic colors normally become lighter; light, chromatic colors become darker. The
details of the image are retained as much as possible. Colors which actually can be mapped with
the printing process are shifted slightly within the color space to obtain space for the even purer
colors which are to be mapped.
• Absolute white (density = 0.0) is reproduced as paper white; absolute black (density > 3.5) is
reproduced using the maximum dot area permitted for the process colors.
Use the global setting to influence the reproduction of saturation (chroma) right across the entire
color gamut. For example, you can change the default settings for the profile if the chroma of images
that were edited is too high or not enough, even if the camera or scanner profile was correct.
For certain cases, you can modify the restrictions which are part of optimized gamut mapping by
changing the gamut mapping settings in different areas.
Setting for light saturated colors
You can influence gamut mapping in light colors using the "Preserve lightness/Preserve contrast"
slider. You can set the lightness/contrast ratio by moving the slider. In particular, you can thus influ-
ence the reproduction of the saturated and light non-printable colors.
• "Preserve lightness": If you shift the slider to the left, i.e., set a value between "0" (central posi-
tion) and "-5", lightness is maintained and weighted accordingly. If you want to prevent the sat-
urated colors from becoming darker (affecting the chroma negatively), shift the slider to position
"-5" (only lightness). This may result in a loss of detail in the image.

Create
• "Preserve contrast": If you shift the slider to the right, i.e., set a value between "0" (central posi-
tion) and "+5", contrast is maintained and weighted accordingly. This may cause light, chro-
matic colors to appear too "heavy". If you have an optimally reproduced detail contrast, it may
be accompanied by a loss of chroma in the colors which then appear darker in position "+5"
(only contrast).
• The default setting is slider position "0". This setting reflects conventional results in reproduc-
tion work.
Setting for dark saturated colors

The second slider ("darker/lighter") is used to influence gamut mapping in saturated dark colors.
• "darker": If you shift the slider to the left, i.e., set a value between "0" (central position) and "-
5", the chromatic colors become darker. As a result, the darker and more chromatic a color, the
higher the percentage of black. However, this makes strict checking of the printing process more
important.
• "lighter": If you shift the slider to the right, i.e., set a value between "0" (central position) and
"+5", the saturated colors become lighter. Particularly dark, chromatic colors appear lighter and
more brilliant. At the same time, there is a noticeable loss of detail.
This setting is suitable for the reproduction of slogan-like or placard-type material in which a
high degree of definition is not important (e.g. newspaper printing) and also for printing pro-
cesses with low UCR values (e.g. with dot areas of 270%).
tion work.
"More contrast in dark colors": Check this box if you wish to increase shadow details (lightness cor-
rection). By default, this function is disabled.
184 Version 2017

Create
Global setting of color saturation

The "gray/colored" slider affects the entire image in a similar way to chroma gradation, but for each
color in relation to the chroma available in each case.
• "gray": If you shift the slider to the left towards "gray", in other words, a setting between "0"
(central position) and "-4", all colors are desaturated. Colors are fully desaturated if the slider is
in position "-5". This corresponds to a four-color black-and-white reproduction ("quadruplex") as
is found in newspaper printing.
• "colored": If you shift the slider to the right towards "colored", in other words, a setting between
"0" (central position) and "+5", there is a post-saturation of all colors, an effect which is usually
desired in newspaper printing. On the other hand, this also means that the color at the outer
sections of the process color space might be pushed together so strongly that it may not be pos-
sible to differentiate the chroma in them at all.
tion work.
Global setting darker / lighter

The "gray/colored" slider affects the entire image in a similar way to chroma gradation, but for each
color in relation to the chroma available in each case.
• "darker": If you shift the slider to the left towards "darker", in other words, a setting between 0
(central position) and -5, the image becomes darker on the whole (as if underexposed).
• "lighter": If you shift the slider to the right towards "lighter", in other words, a setting between 0
(central position) and +5, the image becomes lighter on the whole (as if overexposed).
• The default setting is slider position 0. This setting reflects conventional results in reproduction
work.
Keep gray axis

Normally, in Prinect Color Toolbox the separations in color papers are calculated relative to paper
white ("Perceptual" rendering intent). In other words, the gray axis is also calculated relative to paper
white. For that reason, in yellowish papers, the gray axis is also yellowish when reproduced. The eye,
however, perceives this gray axis relative to the (yellowish) paper as neutral. In some cases, however,
you do want that the gray axis remains neutral (absolute) when reproduced on yellowish papers as
well.
This option allows you make the gray axis neutral (from the dark midtones to the light midtones) going
towards highlight as far as the hue of the paper). You can set how neutral the gray axis will be with
this slider. You enable the slider by first checking the box.
'Correction of color data' Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Modify" (paper white correction) in the "Generate profile" dialog
> "Show profile options".

Create
i
i
Note: In the "Measure" main function, you open this dialog (only the top part) with "Test
chart > Correction - Fluorescent whitening".
Check and correct color data

In this dialog, you can correct paper white that is important for certain proofs. You can correct the
effect of fluorescent whitening either by automatic paper white correction or by a spectral conversion
of the color data. Paper white can also be corrected by matching the lightness of the L value to proof-
ing.
Correction of fluorescent whitening effect
This function is relevant when papers with fluorescent whitening agents are used (for example, paper
for color copiers and ink jets). It affects the proof part of the profile.
Optical whiteners have a fluorescent effect so that the paper is perceived as particularly white
although technically speaking it has a bluish color cast. If you make a proof based exactly on the val-
ues measured, the result will appear too yellow.
Correction can be in two ways:
• using an automatic paper white correction
• or a spectral conversion of the color data.
Change paper white automatically

This function can automatically reduce the effect of fluorescent whitening agents when the proof part
is calculated in the profile. By default, this function is disabled. When this function is activated, eval-
uation of the proof with a measuring device may produce different results.
Spectral conversion of color data
Spectral color data must be available for this type of correction. In this procedure, all the measured
values are corrected before profile calculation. As a result, this correction affects the entire ICC pro-
file (all transformation tables).
Fluorescent whitening causes ultraviolet light that cannot be seen by the human eye to be absorbed
and visible blue fluorescent light to be emitted in its place. As a result of this conversion, an observer
considers the paper to be whiter. But this impression of white is subjective: In Europe, for example,
paper is "absolutely white" if the reflected light has somewhat more bluish portions.
186 Version 2017

Create
You can set the correction intensity (amount of blue) with the slider:
• The default setting (slider position 5) is the equivalent of the spectral effect of a UV filter.
• As you move the slider towards "max" (slider position 10), the bluish color cast is gradually
removed by the correction so that the result seems to be yellowish.
• As you move the slider towards "none" (slider position 0), the correction of blue diminishes.
There is no correction of the fluorescent whitening effect when the slider is at "none" (0).
Lightness adaption for proof

This function adapts lightness for proofs when papers which are darker than the paper of the simu-
lated printing process are used. If a reproduction is based exactly on the values measured, this might
impair the light definition and paper white cannot be simulated correctly.
The range of lightness of the proof is increased somewhat so that the lightness required in the printing
process you want to simulate can fit into the larger range of the proof process. In this way, light defi-
nition is retained and media white can be reproduced correctly, but the proof is somewhat darker on
the whole. In proofs, slight errors in the reproduction of lightness are generally less disturbing than
errors in hue in paper white simulation.
i
i
Note: This function should not be enabled if you want a correction of a proof profile (see
"'Proof correction' View", page 212).
L value
The L* value refers to the lightness of color in the CIELAB color space. In this function, the L* value
of paper white in the proof process is shown. To correct lightness, the L* value of paper white of the
(lighter) printing process you want to simulate is entered. On the basis of these data, Prinect Color
Toolbox automatically calculates the lightness correction required for the proof process.
This setting has no effect if a value lower than the L* value of the proof white is entered.
'Smoothing of color data' Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Modify" (smoothing of measured values) in the "Generate pro-
file" dialog > "Show profile options".
i
i
Note: You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Correct - Smoothing" menu in the
"Measure" main function.

Create
Check and smooth color data

In this dialog, you can enable/disable an option for smoothing the measured data as you need it. The
correction or smoothing of the measured data comprises two subfunctions:
• plausibility check of the data and
• intelligent, global smoothing.
These two functions can be used separately or as a combination and be applied to the color data of
both CMYK and RGB printing processes.
i
i
Note: You can also use these functions in the "Measure" main function (see "'Smoothing of
color data' Dialog", page 94).
The difference is that, in "Measure", the color data are changed irrevocably by the correction
whereas, in this case, the correction is only applied to profile calculation and the original color data
are retained.
When calculating profiles from smoothened color data, remember that an appropriate setting for the
profile causes the smoothened data to be smoothened once again.
Enable the correction/smoothing function you want.
Click "OK" to confirm your changes and close the dialog. The measured data are converted.
Automatic plausibility check of color data
This function lets you adjust implausible values which were detected during the analysis. Such values
can result from errors during the measuring process but also from dirt or scratches on the test chart.
Such local distortions of the color data are corrected automatically.
In RGB ink jet printers, color transformations which cannot be deactivated take place in the driver
software. These are very noticeable in certain tonal value ranges and can result in a loss of quality,
something which would be eliminated by measurement correction.
Even with high-precision printing processes, such as proofers, there can be slight, but intentional dis-
tortions in vignettes which would be eliminated by a correction of the measured data. This can cause
a loss of quality. For that reason, the automatic measurement correction should be deactivated in
such cases.
By default, automatic correction of the measured data is enabled for all CMY(K) printing processes
and disabled for proofer (for example, ink jet printers) and RGB printing processes.
Intelligent smoothing of color data
You can use this function to eliminate distortions that have a global effect. In this process, empirical
models for typical printing processes are used with all the measuring points to eliminate large-scale
distortions. This result of the calculation is that the current measured data are smoothened without
changing the accuracy greatly.
188 Version 2017

Create
This method also works with unusual process colors and with printing materials with color cast.
Example of correction or smoothing of measured data

An example is used to explain the effect of smoothing on the measured data.
There are two ways to correct or smooth measured data:
• in the "Measure" main function after the colors are measured (open with "Test Chart > Correct
- Smoothing"). When you save the file, this correction overwrites the original measured data, in
other words, your data file is modified. To keep the original data, we recommend that you use a
different file name when you save the changed data.
• in the "Create" main function (open with "Modify" in "Profile calculation options > Smoothing of
measured values" in the "Profile Generation Setup" dialog. This correction affects the measured
data that are to be used for profile calculation. The original color data are retained.
Diagram 1: Critical color data
Diagram 1 shows critical measured data in an ECI test chart of a badly set printing process. Not only
are there problems with the actual printing process such as bad ink zone control but also the plate-
setter was probably badly linearized.
The plausibility check corrects the first type of error. Such errors are characterized by the fact that
the patches measured in the test chart don't match the other adjacent patches in the color space.
The reason for this can be measuring errors, scratches or local effect of a bad ink zone control.
The "wavy lines" in diagram 1 indicate that the last-named reason was quite predominant. The plau-
sibility check adjusts the measuring points of such patches in such a way that they match their sur-
roundings in the color space better.

Create
Diagram 2: Effect of the plausibility check
The effect of the plausibility check on the data is shown in diagram 2. You can see that any local
occurrences of wavy lines are gone but that the strange tonal gradation is still there (seen by the
clearly different spacing of measuring points in the web). There is the occasional process that is actu-
ally characterized by such a pattern and where any corrections to this pattern would result in an
unwanted distortion (particularly with proofers).
Global smoothing acts against this second type of distortion. In this process, empirical models for
typical printing processes are used with all the measuring points to eliminate large-scale distortions,
without however defining fixed reference values for solid tints or similar in this process.
For that reason, this method also works with unusual process colors and with substrates with color
cast.
Diagram 3: Result of this correction
The result is shown in diagram 3. You can see that, in this case as well, the tonal gradation has been
made harmonic. You can vary the intensity of this correction with the slider between "0" and "10".
190 Version 2017

Create
Global smoothing is only suitable for measured data that are part of a relatively unadulterated phys-
ical printing process. You should not use it or, if so, just a weakened version of it if you cannot influ-
ence conversion of the color data, for example, by a printer driver or additional color management
that cannot be disabled when you are printing the test chart.
Views and Diagrams

appropriate item in the tabs or selecting the item you want in the "View" menu. To the right of the
diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color space.
You can display a context-sensitive Online Help with the "F1" key.
The CIE color space diagrams allow you to evaluate the position of the color data in the color space
and to evaluate the color gamut.
'Test chart' View

You can open this view by clicking the "Test chart" tab.
This view mode shows you the currently loaded data file and its patches. The number of patches in
the palette depends of the type of test chart/control element.
The color patches are reproduced as precisely as possible on the monitor (depending on the color
depth set for the monitor and the monitor calibration).
Field, Ref [%], Ref. [Lab], Ref. [XYZ], Spectrum, Density
The following information and reference values display beside the graphic when you move the mouse
pointer to a patch or enable the patch with a click (the patch is highlighted by a red-and-white frame):
• Field: Displays information about the current patch in the test chart or the control element
• Ref. [Lab]: Displays the Lab values for the current patch
• Ref. [XYZ]: Displays the XYZ values for the current patch

Create
• Spectrum" Displays the spectral values for the current patch. An appropriate message displays
• Density: Displays absolute or relative cyan, magenta, yellow, and black density values for the
current patch.
i
i
surement" tab).
Right-click Display
The mouse pointer position shows you additional information about the color patch when you right-
click this:
You can view the following information, if it is available:

• Measured values: Displays the number of patches in the loaded test chart or test strip.
• Reference values: Displays the CMYK values for the current patch.
• Density values: Displays the density values for the current patch.
• XYZ values: Displays the XYZ values for the current patch.
• Spectral values: Displays the spectrum for the current patch if you have spectral values.
• delta E, delta ab: Displays the differential value between another selected patch and the current
patch. The ΔE value and Δab value is zero if the patches are identical.
You can use this function, for example, to check the gray balance. Click a patch that only has black,
then point to the relevant gray patch and right-click at the mouse pointer position. The ΔE value and
the Δab value between these two patches display.
192 Version 2017

Create
Viewing Locked Zones

You can lock zones in Prinect Image Control. An appropriate message displays above the main func-
tion bar if you open a color data file with locked zones in Prinect Color Toolbox. You can view the
locked zones by hitting "Z" on the keyboard. All the patches in the locked zone are covered by a flash-
ing white bar. You can clear the display by hitting "Z" again.
More information about the different test charts and graphics can be found in "Test Charts and
Control Strips", page 277.
'xy diagram' View

You can open this view by clicking the "xy diagram" tab.
Display of the xy diagram
The xy diagram is shown as a horseshoe-shaped diagram, known as the chromaticity diagram. It
shows the purely color-related information of a visible color, independent of lightness.
The horseshoe-shaped curve is known as the spectrum locus and is plotted from the xy coordinates
of all the pure wavelengths in the visible spectrum. Each color displayed is an additive mixture of
spectral colors.
All colors that are possible lie within the boundary formed by the spectrum locus.
The intensity and, consequently, the purity of a hue is greatest at the edge of the curve, but decreases
towards the middle of the diagram, as there are no colors purer than spectral colors.
Display
The green circles/ellipses mark the tolerance range in the process standard for each process

Create
'ab diagram' View

You can open this view by clicking the "ab diagram" tab.
Display of ab plane
Display
Only the outline of the color gamut is shown in the ab diagram when you uncheck this box.
'La/Lb diagram' View

You can open this view by clicking the "La/Lb diagram" tab.
Display of the La/Lb diagrams
194 Version 2017

Create
The two graphs show the color gamuts in the L*a*b* color space viewed from the side, parallel to the
lightness axis.
In the top graph, the color space is shown in the direction of the a* axis, that is from green to red,
and in the bottom graph in the direction of the b* axis, i.e. from blue to yellow.
The color gradations, right and left, show the influence of the color lightness.
From the diagrams, you can assess the depth resolution of a printing process in the color space and
its size and which colors can be displayed.
Display
• Cobweb: Only the outlines of the color gamuts are shown in the La or Lb diagram with this func-
tion.
'Dot gain' View

You can open this view by clicking the "Dot gain" tab.
Display of the dot gain/printing characteristic
shown in the diagram. You can also switch over and view the printing characteristic curve here. You
can also view the related data table.
also measured the density when measuring the colors (selected in the "Preferences" dialog).
measured, by general approximation from the Lab(xyz) values.
i
i
Note: The heading above the graph indicates how the tonal values or printing characteristic
were determined:
• "Display of the dot gain curve/printing characteristic (Measured density values)" if you have den-
sity values.
• "Display of the dot gain curve/printing characteristic (Approximated tonal values ISO 12647-1)"
in red if density values are calculated.

Create
Diagram
You can select the type of diagram you want to the right of the diagram:
• Dot gain: Display of the dot gain curves
• Printing Characteristic: Display of the printing characteristic
The dots shown are the measured values that are used to determine the dot gain.
You select the curves that you want to view in "View".
Display
In the list box, select the colors of the curves that will be shown.
The curves can be displayed together or separately. The number of colors depends on the data file
you selected. Prinect Color Toolbox supports the import and export of eight color channels. The color
names are taken from the color data file.
i
i
Note: When you save your quality data in Prinect Image Control, the color names are used
for the setup of the printing units. It is possible that the same color name is used because
of the automatic assignment of the different hues. If necessary, you can change these
names (in Prinect Image Control).
It is possible to view the dot gain curves or printing characteristic for a maximum of eight colors.
However, the "Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the dot gain for as many as
twelve colors. "Prinect_6S" contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The
order of the colors depends on the setup of the printing units in Prinect Image Control and it can be
changed there.
A table is hidden below the graph. View this by dragging the horizontal bar upwards with the mouse.
This makes the curve diagram smaller (see Data Table).
You can print the curve diagram and its data table as a log (see "General Information about Printing
Your Data", page 272).
You can also just print or save the curves or zoom in or out of parts of the diagram (see Context-
sensitive Menu).
Process standard
You can also display the tolerance range and/or standard curve of the process standard for cyan,
magenta, yellow and black by checking the appropriate box when viewing these four process colors
separately. You can also view the three chromatic process colors (CMY) jointly.
• Process standard Display of the tolerance range for the current process standard by a green area
above or below the dot gain curves. Optimally, the curves should be in the middle of the toler-
ance range.
• Standard curve: Display of a green curve defined for the process standard if the single process
colors (cyan, magenta or yellow) or joint CMY are selected or of a black curve.
i
i
Note: You can replace the process standard you are currently using by selecting a different
one in the "Process standard" main function.
196 Version 2017

Create
Dot gain curves

and/or a color shift may occur.
45°. 
Data Table
You can view the data table if you drag the horizontal bar below the curve diagram upwards. This
makes the curve diagram smaller. All the colors are always shown in the data table, irrespective of
the curve you select in the "View" list. If necessary, you can move the visible section using the scroll
bars.
The table displays the following values, separately for the four process colors:
• dot gain
• deviation from the process standard (Δ)
• tolerance
The dot gain is shown for all other colors. All the dot areas (%) in the test chart or control element
are taken into account. Values that are not defined in the process standard are calculated from the
curves.
in curve diagrams:
graphic.

Create
'Gray balance/Density curves' View

You can open this view by clicking the "Gray balance" tab.
Prerequisite: This function is available only after an ICC output profile was calculated.
Display of the gray balance curves

The cyan, magenta and yellow color separation curves and the black curve for gray are shown in this
diagram. 
You can also switch over and view the density curves.
You can print or save the curves or zoom in or out of parts of the diagram (see Context-sensitive
Menu).
Display of the gray balance curves

Gray balance is used for a correct reproduction of gray tones and depends on the process colors and
print conditions. Due to the misabsorption of process colors and filters, equal parts of the three chro-
matic inks do not produce gray in the overprint but brown.
The print table already contains an optimal gray axis. Modifications to it are only required for deviat-
ing processes or for subjective corrections.
Display of the density

The density curve is determined from the Lab values using an approximation formula and is scaled
between D = 0.0 and D = 3.2, a range that is important for reproduction.
in curve diagrams:
graphic.
198 Version 2017

Create

Edit
Edit
Working with 'Edit'

Prerequisite: The "Edit" main function is available only if you enabled the Profile Tool
application with a license key.
"Edit" describes all the steps you must take to view and modify an ICC output profile:
• Import and saving of profiles
• Display and editing of profile parameters, see 'Profile info.' View
• Display and editing of profile color tables
· Dot gain (curve) correction, see 'Dot gain' View
· Gray balance correction, see 'Gray balance' View
· Global gradation correction, see 'Global gradation' View
· Simple correction of lightness L, see 'Lightness' View
• Display and correction of a proof profile, see 'Proof correction' View
• Display and editing of process parameters, see 'Process param.' Dialog
• You can view source and target color values for the output profile. See "Color calculator", page
239.
• You can calculate a DeviceLink profile from two ICC profiles, see "DeviceLink Profile", page 246.
• You can convert an ICC profile using a low-pass filter to enhance profile quality by smoothing
the color space even further. See "Profile smoothing", page 250.
• You can view the current profile parameters (see View profile parameters)
You can use the buttons in the button bar and tabs or menu commands to call up dialogs or diagrams
where you can select data or define settings.
You can select an ICC profile and view its inputs by clicking "Open profile" or using the Explorer
panel. You can change some of these inputs in the editor and then save the revised profile (if neces-
sary, rename it) with "Save profile".
Basically, all types of profiles can be opened with the editor, this means, not only those profiles that
were created with Prinect Color Toolbox or PrintOpen releases.
In the editor, you can see read-only boxes as well as boxes where you can make your changes. Only
output profiles (CMYK and RGB) can be edited.
i
i
Note: Depending on your profile type, some of the tab icons may be disabled (dimmed).

Edit
Profile Information
'Profile info.' View

You open a view with profile details when you click the "Profile info." tab.
Edit the profile information
i
i
Note: Profile Tool (Prinect Color Toolbox) lets you create profiles in compliance with the V4
ICC specification (2002). This gives you additional tags and structures.
Like with PrintOpen, you can also create profiles based on profile version 2.1 of 1998. In other words,
it doesn't use the specific enhancements of the more recent ICC specifications in order to be com-
patible with as many applications and RIPs (incl. older versions) as possible.
Display Boxes
The profile information screen displays the following items that cannot be changed:
• CMM type: A CMM (Color Management Module) is a module in the operating system or a spe-
cially installed software that can compute ICC profiles and apply them to image data.
This software is mainly used indirectly, for example, if the image editing program or RIP used
requires color conversions. In this case, the application calls up the CMM and sends it the image
data and the required profiles. The CMM then performs the conversions and sends back the fin-
ished data to the application.
Different makes of CMMs are available. They differ mainly in the way they implement the con-
version and in their speed and accuracy.
Several CMMs can be installed together on one computer. In this case, you must specify which
CMM is to perform the conversion.
Some image editing programs have a setting for selecting the CMM. The profiles themselves also
contain an input specifying the preferred CMM. This is used if it has been specified and no other
specifications have been made. In the profiles created by Profile Tool or PrintOpen, HDM is
always entered for the Heidelberg CMM.
• Profile version: The version number refers to the version of the ICC specification on which the
profile is based. All profiles with a '2' as the first digit in the version number have the same for-
mat with regard to their main components. The differences are mainly found in optional inputs
with additional data about the profile.
All profiles with a '4' as the first digit in the version number were calculated based on the newer
V4.2 ICC specification. However, V4 profiles are very seldom and not recommended because
they have not been accepted by users.
202 Version 2017

Edit
• Device class: shows what type of profile it is. There are three classes for devices profiles:
· "prtr" for print processes
· "scnr" for scanners
· "mntr" for monitors
There are also other special types of profiles:
· link: combinations of two or more profiles, such as for scanners and printers together or
for a transformation from one color space to another (DeviceLink profile).
· spac: profiles for converting "XYZ" or "Lab" data to other device-independent color
spaces such as "Luv" or "YCC" (color space conversion profile).
• Device color space: This indicates the color space in which a device is operating, for example,
"CMYK" for most print processes and "RGB" for scanners, monitors or desktop/office printers.
• Connection space: For device profiles, this indicates the color space used for the device-inde-
pendent part of the profile. Only "XYZ" and "Lab" are permitted as color spaces here.
• Creation date: This shows the date and time when the profile was created or modified. Subse-
quent changes to the profile made with the editor do not affect this input, enabling you to always
recognize the original date the profile was created on.
• Copyright: contains the name of the profile manufacturer.
Profile Information - Text Boxes

The profile information screen displays the following items that can be changed:
• Device attributes: refers to the properties of the medium for which the profile was created. An
input here only makes sense for scanners and print processes.
The first setting defines whether the material is transparent or reflective.
· "Reflective" is for photos and paper originals on scanners
· "Transparency" is for slides (transparencies).
In print media, a difference is made between paper and overhead film.

The second setting describes the surface of the material (for example, of the photographic
paper):
· "Glossy" is for a smooth, shiny surface
· "Matte" for a matte surface.
i
i
Note: Only few applications use these inputs.

Edit
• Rendering intent: defines the approach taken in color reproduction (see the description of ren-
dering intent in "Rendering Intent", page 242 for details).
Only when the color solid of a proofer, for example, is large enough to contain all colors in an
image can the reproduction be really colorimetrically correct in all parts.
In many cases, the rendering intent used in reproduction is determined by the image editing pro-
gram. Only if this is not the case (for example, in some RIPs) is the default intent specified in the
profile used. You can set this in the appropriate box.
• Media white point is first of all the measured white of the medium (for example, of paper). It
only takes affect if the colorimetric "rendering intent" (proof) is used since in all other intents
the colors are matched to the medium white at hand.
Occasionally, the subjective visual impression does not match the colorimetric results. This
occurs above all in papers which use optical whiteners or in lighting conditions that only match
the standard light unsatisfactorily (metamerism).
A slight darker proof is also often preferred to a loss of definition in highlight if the paper used
in the proofer is not light enough. In such cases, it may be useful to change the white point. The
simplest way is to enter a modified white point in "Lab" because lightness and color cast are
kept separate here. An input in "XYZ" is suited, for example, if the desired white point is avail-
able as measured data in "XYZ".
• Profile description: This is a name or a short piece of text that describes the profile.
Take note that some programs working with profiles show this text and not the file name when
the profile is selected. This means that a profile saved with a different name appears with the
old name in the selection list. You can avoid such problems by changing the text in this input
box. We recommend that you change this text when changing profiles to avoid any ambiguities
later on.
i
i
Note: You can edit the profile description when you save calculated profiles. Prinect Color
Toolbox automatically uses the profile description as the profile file name.
Click "Save profile" (in the button bar) or select "File > Save profile" to open the "Save profile" dialog
where you can save your modifications to the profiles (if necessary, use a different profile name and/
or target folder).
ProofTuner (Visual Correction of Proof Profiles)

In some cases, proof results can appear to be slightly yellowish. While the colorimetric differences
are optimal, a slight yellow cast appears to be seen because of the fluorescent whitening agents and
different illumination conditions for device and validation station.
The "ProofTuner" can help you remedy this effect. The "ProofTuner" lets you correct values especially
in the gray axis (25%, 50% and 75% gray) to match your proof result optically better to the print.
204 Version 2017

Edit
Corrections can be up to ±20%, but a max. of ±5% is recommended in practice because otherwise
the result might no longer comply with the proof standard. The user interface shows CMYK but inter-
nally Lab is used for calculation.
i
i
Note: The ProofTuner is installed by default in version 2016 and can be invoked through the
Start menu with "Heidelberg Prinect Color Tool > Support > HDProofTuner". Because this is
not possible in the predecessor versions of 2013 and 2015, you must start it with
"ProofTuner.exe" directly from the Explorer.
Corrections are not done in the "ProofTuner" itself but only prepared there.
1. Firstly, you set the changes in steps of 1% using the arrow buttons.
2. Then click "Save virtual proof and print data". When the corrections are saved, two txt files are
generated automatically that are then used for real correction in Color Tool.
The correction parameters are saved as comments in these files for a record.

Edit
3. You can load these txt files in "Edit > Proof correction" with "Measurement data from print (<file-
name>-print.txt)" and "Measurement data from proof (<filename>.txt)".
4. After you click "Calculate", the proof profile is recalculated taking into account the visual cor-
rection.
The ProofTuner is based on the proof of the FOGRA39L reference file and is suited optimally for
proofs for current standard offset printing.
Important information about visual correction
• This function applies only to proof profiles.
• Visual correction must be the last step in an iterative proof correction.
• The new proof profile should always be checked by proofing it against the "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI
IT8.7/4" or "FOGRA media wedge CMYK V3" file to see whether it still complies with the proof
standard.
• After correction, the values for color deviations may be slightly worse but the optical impression
of the proof should be noticeably better.
• Do not use iterative correction on profiles corrected in this way! Instead, set aside the uncor-
rected profile and use this for other corrections. This case is a visual correction that is not based
on measured data. Iterative correction would try to undo this correction.
View profile parameters

You can view the parameters that were used for calculation of an ICC profile. This is possible only if
the ICC profile is already open.
You can view the "Profile parameters" dialog in two sections of the program:
• In the "Edit" main function by clicking "Show profile parameters".
• In the "Create" main function by clicking "Generate profile" and then "Profile options > Profile
parameters > Show" in the "Profile calculation" dialog.
This dialog shows the parameters set for the ICC profile currently open (color composition, black gen-
eration, UCR/GCR, gamut mapping, smoothing of color data). This supplements the profile informa-
tion that is shown and you can only check the ICC profile with it.
Click "Apply" to automatically copy all the profile parameters to the relevant boxes (in the "Profile
Generation Setup" dialog in "Create").
i
i
Note: Remember that this overwrites the current parameter setup with the settings shown
in this dialog.
You close the window by clicking "Close". You can now resume editing of the open ICC profile or open
another profile.
206 Version 2017

Edit
Profile Modifications
You can only modify ICC output profiles (CMYK and RGB). If the specifications for ICC profiles are
complied with, you can also modify output profiles that were not created with Prinect Color Toolbox
or PrintOpen.
Using the editor for modifying output profiles, you can modify a profile as follows:
• Dot gain/Printing characteristics
• Gray balance
• Global gradation
• Lightness gradation
• Post correction of a proofer profile
• Process parameters
Process Color Modifications

Process colors are modified in the color conversion tables in an ICC output profile. These changes are
written to the print or proof tables. They affect all the CMYK color separations or RGB channels of the
conversion tables.
Click "Open profile" or use the "File > Open profile" menu to select the ICC output profile whose pro-
cess colors you wish to modify.
The profile data are shown.
'Dot gain' View

The dot gain or printing characteristic displays when you click the "Dot gain" tab.
Edit the printing characteristic/dot gain curve
shown in the diagram. You can also switch over and view the printing characteristic curve here.
Dot gain

Edit
45°. 
Editing the Curves

To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for editing the dot gain or printing char-
acteristic.
Characteristic curve
Select the type of diagram you want by clicking the appropriate option.
The values for dot gain and printing characteristic are calculated from density values. The curve can
deviate from the dot gain values that were determined with a densitometer.
Color
The number of colors depends on the profile selected. Prinect Color Toolbox supports the editing of
multiple color profiles (Multicolor). It is possible to view and correct the dot gain curves or printing
characteristic for a maximum of eight colors. The color names are taken from the profile.
You can change the dot gain or printing characteristic curves for the color channels by dragging the
curves to the value desired or entering different coordinates.
Select the curve whose dot gain or printing characteristic is to be changed by clicking the appropriate
radio button. Coordinates are shown as handles.
One handle always appears at the start. You can change the curve to make it more harmonic as a
whole by clicking and dragging this handle. Double-click the left mouse button to add other handles
at the cursor position (maximum 16). When you add a new handle, the previous one becomes fixed,
in this way defining the shape of the curve.
If you set several handles, you can then change the shape of the curve locally around the handle that
is currently selected. You can remove a handle by a single click with the right mouse button.
Values
When you click a handle, the numbers (Index, 0, 1, 2,...) of the reference point and its X and Y coor-
dinates are shown.
You can also change the curve by overwriting these X and Y coordinates with new values.
Click "Reset" to reset the curves to the values you had when opening the screen.
Click "Apply" to write the dot gain change to the color conversion table of the ICC output profile.
or target folder).
208 Version 2017

Edit
'Gray balance' View

The gray balance displays when you click the "Gray balance" tab.
Edit the gray balance curves
The gray balance curves of the printing or proof process (process colors, mixed colors and/or spot
colors) are shown in the diagram. You can switch between print or proof views as you want.
Gray balance
Gray balance is used for a correct reproduction of gray tones and depends on the process colors and
print conditions. Due to the misabsorption of process colors and filters, equal parts of the three chro-
matic inks (cyan, magenta and yellow) do not produce gray in the overprint but brown. The print table
already contains an optimal gray axis. Modifications to it are only required for deviating processes or
for subjective corrections.
Editing the Curves

To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for editing gray balance.
Print or proof
In the popup menu, select which color conversion table in the ICC profile will be modified:
• Print = print table (separations, Perceptual (photographic) Rendering Intent)
• Proof = proof table (proof, soft proof, Colorimetric Rendering Intent)
Color
multiple color profiles (Multicolor). It is possible to view and correct the gray balance for a maximum
of eight colors. The color names are taken from the profile.
Change the gray balance by dragging the curves to the value desired or entering different coordinates.
i
i
Note: In multiple color profiles (Multicolor), gray is made up of black with GCR (at least
50% recommended). For that reason, spot colors do not affect gray balance or only very
slightly.
Select the curve whose gray balance you wish to change by clicking the appropriate radio button.
Coordinates are shown as handles.
whole by clicking and dragging this handle.
Double-click the left mouse button to add other handles at the cursor position (maximum 16). When
you add a new handle, the previous one becomes fixed, in this way defining the shape of the curve.

Edit
Values
Click "Apply" to write the gray balance change to the print and/or proof table of the ICC output pro-
file.
or target folder).
'Global gradation' View

The global gradation displays when you click the "Global gradation" tab.
Edit the global gradation
The gradation correction curves of the printing or proof process (process colors, mixed colors and/or
spot colors) are shown in the diagram. You can switch between print or proof views as you want.
Gradation
A gradation (reproduction of the tonal value) defines the relation between the original values and the
reproduction values (e.g. density values or screen percentage).
The gradation of the printing process is contained (implicitly) in the color conversion tables of the ICC
profile. To change the gradation of the printing process, you can correct the present gradation by a
global gradation correction.
Editing the Curves

To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for editing global gradation.
A linear curve is displayed at the beginning of correction, equivalent to no correction. You can set the
global gradation curves for the color channels by dragging the curves to the value desired or entering
different coordinates.
Print or proof
Color
multiple color profiles (Multicolor). It is possible to view and correct global gradation for a maximum
of eight colors. The color names are taken from the profile.
210 Version 2017

Edit
You can change the global gradation curves for the color channels by dragging the curves to the value
desired or entering different coordinates.
Select the curve whose gradation correction you wish to change by clicking the appropriate radio but-
ton. Coordinates are shown as handles.
whole by clicking and dragging this handle.
Values
Click "Apply" to write the global gradation correction to the color conversion table of the ICC output
profile. Afterwards, gradation correction is reset again to no correction (linear curve displayed).
i
i
Note: Each global gradation correction that is written to the ICC profile is based on the cur-
rent gradation of the printing process (additive correction).
or target folder).
i
i
Note: You can tell that the global gradation correction was written to the ICC profile by
viewing, for example, the gray balance curve (see 'Gray balance' View). This allows you to
check the current gradation of the printing process.
'Lightness' View
The lightness gradation displays when you click the "Lightness" tab.
Edit the lightness gradation
The lightness gradation curve of the printing or proof process (process colors, mixed colors and/or
spot colors) is shown in the diagram. You can switch between print or proof views as you want.
Lightness gradation
A gradation (reproduction of the tonal value) defines the relation between the original values and the
reproduction values (e.g. density values or lightness values).

Edit
The ideal lightness value of the profile color space is shown on the horizontal axis. The real lightness
values in the print or proof are shown on the vertical axis.
To correct certain lightness areas, you can use (measured) L values from the print or proof.
This special lightness correction only changes the lightness gradation of the printing process and not
the hue of the color data. This type of correction cannot be used with single CMYK gradation correc-
tions.
Editing the Curve

To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for editing lightness gradation.
Print or proof
Change the lightness gradation by dragging the curve to the value desired or entering different coor-
dinates.
Coordinates are shown as handles. One handle always appears at the start.
You can change the curve to make it more harmonic as a whole by clicking and dragging this handle.
Values
Click "Reset" to reset the curve to the values you had when opening the screen.
Click "Apply" to write the lightness gradation change to the color conversion table of the ICC output
profile.
or target folder).
'Proof correction' View

A test chart showing the color data of the proof profile you wish to correct is displayed when you click
the "Proof correction" tab.
Correction of proofer profile
This function lets you improve the proof result by making corrections to a proofer profile.
212 Version 2017

Edit
i
i
Note: In a proof correction, only the color conversion for absolute colorimetric Rendering
Intent (i.e. a colorimetrically accurate reproduction) is changed.
The "Lightness adaption for proof", page 187 function also should not be enabled for paper white cor-
rection when setting the profile calculation options.
Principle of Proof Correction

Measured color deviations between the print and proof are used for the automatic correction of the
proofer profile.
This requires that you have the color data of a test chart of the printing process and the proof result
in addition to the ICC profile for the proof. The test chart must be the same type and have quite an
amount of color data. 
We recommend a large test chart, for example:
• ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3
• ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4
• ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002
A comparison of the color data between the print and proof shows the color differences, and an
appropriate correction is automatically written to the proof to minimize the differences.
This procedure can be used several times (iterative), with the differences to be corrected becoming
less with every step.
i
i
Note: In most cases, a first correction step is fully adequate, and the measured differences
between print and proof are acceptable for proofing and color measurement.
Prerequisites
The following steps are required for a proof correction:
1. The ICC profile and the color data of a test chart of the printing process are available.
2. The proof profile that simulates the printing process of the printed test chart on the proofer is
generated.
3. With the print and proof profile, you output a proof using the test chart data of the printing pro-
cess.
4. You then measure this proof.
You now have the three files you need for proof correction:
• 1: the proof profile you will correct
• 2: the color data of the test chart of the printing process (production process, usually ISOcoat-
ed_v2_ECI or ISOcoated_v2_300_EC)
• 3: the color data of the test chart of the first proof

Edit
Controls and Displays

To the right of the graphic, you will find control elements and display boxes that you can use to make
subsequent corrections to the proof profile.
• Measurement data from print: Button for opening the test chart data file for your printing pro-
cess.
• Measurement data from proof: Button for opening the test chart data file of the first proof (print
simulation).
• View: Check boxes for highlighting the differences in color in the two test chart data files. You
can combine both functions (see also Procedure).
· Enhance differences: The difference colors are scaled up threefold.
· Miscolors: Shows the miscolors instead of the "real" colors.
• Proofer profile correction: Paper white is kept in the proofer profile if you check this box.
• Calculate: Button for starting calculation of the modified proofer profile.
• Field, Ref. [%], Ref [Lab], Cmp. [Lab], Delta: Move the mouse pointer to a patch to display the
following values next to the graphic:
· Field: Displays the number (ID) of the current patch in the test chart
· Ref [%]: Displays cyan, magenta, yellow, and black screen percents for the current patch
· Ref [Lab]: Displays the Lab values for the current patch of the measurement data from
print
· Cmp. [Lab]: Displays the Lab values for the current patch of the measurement data from
proof
· Delta: Displays the ΔE, ΔL, Δa and Δb values for the current patch
Procedure
1. Open the proof file you wish to correct.
(click "Open profile" in the button bar or with the "File > Open profile" menu).
2. Open the test chart for correction of the proof profile by clicking the "Proof correction" tab.
Any measured values saved in the proof profile are shown as color patches. However, you can also
use other test chart types for calculation of the corrections.
3. Open the test chart file for your print process by clicking "Open... (Measurement data from
print)".
4. Click "Open... (Measurement data from proof)" to open the test chart file of the first proof output
(print simulation).
i
i
Note: The test chart type for the production process must be the same as that used for this
proof.
214 Version 2017

Edit
The data are displayed as large and small color patches in the test chart file. You can make this
clearer by checking the "Enhance differences" function. The difference colors are scaled up threefold
so that it's easier for you to see the differences in colors.
You can see the differences even more clearly if you switch over to a display showing miscolors ("Mis-
colors" check box). These are used instead of the real colors to highlight slight differences in colors
(especially grays). A color scale with a range of 0 to 12 shows the meaning of the colors. For example,
the biggest differences (ΔE greater than or equal to 12) are red and the smallest blue. Differences lying
in between this are orange, yellow or green.
The miscolors view can also be scaled up threefold to be able to see the differences better. The scale
range changes from 0 to 4 if you enable the "Enhance differences" option.
5. If you wish to keep paper white in the proofer profile, then check the relevant box (see also
Notes on 'Keep paper white' option, page 215).
6. Start correction calculation by clicking "Calculate".
The application now calculates a modified proofer profile. Take note that the creation date and profile
description are not yet changed by this action.
If you wish to change these inputs, you can type a new profile description in "Profile info." and then
save the profile. This also updates the creation date.
7. Click "Save profile" (in the button bar) or select "File > Save profile" to open the "Save profile"
dialog where you can save your modifications to the profiles (if necessary, use a different profile
name and/or target folder).
Notes on 'Keep paper white' option

The table for "absolute colorimetric" conversion of Lab <> CMYK etc. is modified (B2A1 tag) during
the proof profile iteration. If no constraints are specified, then all points in the table can be moved so
that there is a closer match between the Lab values found in the proof and the target values.

Edit
The paper white reference point in the table can also change because color deviations can also occur
in the paper white neighborhood of the proofer. This can be the only point without any color, i.e. in
CMYK (0, 0, 0, 0). Although simulation of the target data improves on the whole, it is possible that
after the first iteration the proofs no longer have any area without colors and consequently without
any screening structures.
When enabled, the "Keep paper white" option prevents changes in the table point responsible for the
proofer paper white and limits it in the neighborhood. The protected range extends downward to
L=96.9 (relative). Only below that do corrections gradually appear and have full effect below L=90
(relative).
"Keep paper white" can be enabled if a satisfactory E (i.e. ΔE <1) is achieved in paper white simula-
tion (offset -> proofer) after the first proof iteration. This avoids further corrections in paper white
simulation to a large extent.
'Process param.' Dialog

The view for entering process parameters displays when you click the "Process param." tab. The but-
ton is only enabled if "Setup of the process parameters and save in measurement data and ICC pro-
file" is checked (default) in the "'Preferences' Dialog", page 264 ("General" tab).
Edit the process parameters
i
i
Note: This screen has the same function as the Process parameters, page 251 dialog that
you can display in the "Measure" and "Create" main functions.
This is where you can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade,
process color, screening and plate). The process parameters are saved in the ICC profile.
You can select the process parameters in list boxes that have defaults based on the current ICC spec-
ification (e.g. output process, paper grade, process standard). Some items are in the process of being
approved for future ICC specifications. 
Type more details in the text boxes (e.g. manufacturer).
The process parameters are also saved in the data file or the profile. However, they do not change
the color conversions in the profile or influence processing by certain CMMs.
The items are of a purely informative nature and are only for the record. They are displayed in the
profile browser during profile selection (you can configure the display as required) and help you
select and sort different ICC profiles.
i
i
Note: You can enable/disable how the process parameters will be saved ("Setup of the pro-
cess parameters and save in measurement data and ICC profile") in the "Preferences > Gen-
eral" dialog. This function is enabled by default.
You cannot call up the "Process parameters" dialog in the "Measure" or "Create" main functions if the
function is disabled. The button is then disabled (dimmed).
216 Version 2017

Edit
Settings
parameter set with saved process parameters.
Click "Store" to display the 'Store parameter set' Dialog, page 252 where you can save your current
process parameters to a parameter file you name. These settings are then available for other color
data files/ICC profiles, making it unnecessary to retype the parameters. You can, of course, make
or target folder).
i
i
Note: This function lets you add process parameters to existing ICC profiles, for example, to
use view and sorting functions of the profile browser. The profiles can also be from older
PrintOpen versions or from profiling tools of other manufacturers.

Process standard
Process standard
Working with 'Process standard'
You can do the following actions with "Process standard":

• Select a process standard that you wish to use to display the color data
• View or modify the settings for the standard used in "Measure > Process standard"
• Modify or delete a standard
• Import or export a standard
• Calculate/generate a wet process standard
• Create a new four-color (CMYK), multicolor or spot color standard
You can view and edit standards for the following print processes:
• CMYK: conventional four-color printing
• Multicolor: a maximum of seven process colors (CMYK primary colors and up to three additional
secondary colors red/orange, green and/or blue)
• Spot colors: a maximum of eight spot colors or four process colors (CMYK) and a maximum of
four spot colors
The nominal values and tolerances of a process standard that you can view and edit depend on the
printing material you selected for paper white and the primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and
black). You can also select the secondary colors (red, green and blue) and CMY gray (overprint) if you
wish.
This main function is divided into two sections that you can open with the appropriate tab icons or
menu commands:

Process standard
• Select "Overview" to view information about a selected process standard (see 'Overview', page
221).
Click "Edit" to go to the edit mode for the selected process standard. You can then either modify
a custom standard or use a shipped standard as a basis and save it under a new name.
• You can view all the process standards saved in the local or global master database (MDS) in a
tree structure in "Administration" (see 'Administration' View, page 232).
Tooltips provide you with more details about the process standard (printing materials, com-
ments and any write protection).
Notes on the Shipped Process Standards

• ISO 12647-2 (2007): yellow and secondary colors were slightly modified, now matching real
printing conditions better.
· ISO 12647-2_2007BB: Current standard for offset printing based on ISO 12647-
2_2004Amd1 for 2007; black backing; without secondary colors, overprint and density
values; defined for paper grades PT1 thru PT5, theoretical.
· ISO 12647-2_2007WB: Current standard for offset printing based on ISO 12647-
2_2004Amd1 for 2007; white backing; without secondary colors, overprint and density
values; defined for paper grades PT1 thru PT5, theoretical.
• FOGRA39 is based on ISO 12647-2 (2007); for white backing only
· compared to ISO 12647-2 (2004): yellow and secondary colors were slightly modified
· compared to ISO 12647-2 (2007): secondary colors Green and Blue slightly modified;
realistic and therefore enabled
• ISO 12647-2_2007 HDM_BB: Current HDMcoated standard based on ISO 12647-2_2007BB,

equivalent to FOGRA39 for black backing; with secondary colors and overprint; without density
values; with real values defined; defined for paper grades:
· PT1 - gloss coated
· PT4 - uncoated white
i
i
Note: You will find the color data in Color Tool xx.0\data\hdm
• FOGRA43/44: are based on ISO 12647-2 (2007); for white backing only
· for NP = non-periodic screening (FM screening)
· for two paper grades: PT1 - glossy coated (FOGRA43) and PT4 - uncoated white
(FOGRA44)
220 Version 2017

Process standard
· can be selected as ISO 12647-2_2008 FograWB NP
• ISO 12647-2_2013 WB NP: Offset printing standard ISO12647-2:2013 for non-periodic screen-
ing; paper grade PT1-2 (glossy coated (1) and matt coated (2)) and paper grade PT4 (uncoated,
white paper)
• PSO ISO12647-2_2013-BB: Offset printing standard ISO12647-2:2013 for black backing; paper
grade PT1-2 (glossy coated (1) and matt coated (2))
• Proof_12647-2_2007: Current offset printing standard for proofing ISO12647-2:2007

Paper grade PT1-2 (glossy coated (1) and matt coated (2)) - internal reference: FOGRA39L
Paper grade PT4 (uncoated, white paper) - internal reference: FOGRA47L
• Proof_ISO12647-2_2013: New offset printing standard for proofing ISO 12647-2:2013

Paper grade PT1 = new printing material "PS1 = Premium coated"
Internal reference: PC1_PremiumCoated_Beta
Paper grade PT4 = new printing material "PS5 = Woodfree uncoated"
Internal reference: PC5_WoodfreeUncoated_Beta
• Digital_PSD2007: Current offset printing standard ISO12647-2:2007

Paper grade PT1-2 (glossy coated (1) and matt coated (2)) - internal reference: FOGRA39L
Paper grade PT4 (uncoated, white paper) - internal reference: FOGRA47L
• Digital_PSD2013: New offset printing standard ISO 12647-2:2013

Paper grade PT1 = new printing material "PS1 = Premium coated"
Internal reference: PC1_PremiumCoated_Beta
Paper grade PT4 = new printing material "PS5 = Woodfree uncoated"
Internal reference: PC5_WoodfreeUncoated_Beta
• G7: CGATS.21-2: Current offset printing standard ISO 12647-2:2007

Paper grade PT1-2 (glossy coated (1) and matt coated (2)) = "Universal premium coated" sub-
strate
Internal reference: CGATS21-2-CRPC6-PT1
Paper grade PT4 (uncoated white paper) = "Universal premium uncoated" substrate
Internal reference: CGATS21-2-CRPC3-PT4
'Overview'
This view opens when you click the "Overview" tab and displays information about a selected process
standard (name, printing material, comment, dot gain, CIELab data, if applicable density values,
printing order).
• Use "Edit" to go from the view mode to the edit mode (see 'Overview' - View Mode, page 223 or
'Overview - Edit (Edit mode), page 226).
• Use "Save" to apply the settings to a process standard.

Process standard
• Use "Cancel" to return to the view mode.
• Use "Delete" to remove a custom standard from the administration structure (only possible in
the "Administration" view).
Select and edit process standard

This part of the dialog shows you the diagrams and data tables of the process standard currently
selected, either for your information in the view mode or for editing in the edit mode.
The view is divided into several sections. For a better overview, these sections are minimized to a
caption bar and be shown or hidden by clicking this bar.
The following diagrams can be shown:
• Dot gain curves separately for CMY and K, for multicolor and spot colors of all process colors
• Dot gain values in 10% steps and 25% and 75% if these are present, and also the CMY spread
at 50%
• Paper white (optional)
• CIELab color values (solid tint) for primary and secondary colors and three-color gray (overprint)
or for processes involving sport colors the CIELab color values of defined process colors, also
solid tint densities as an option
• Gray balance parameters
Prinect Color Toolbox supports several types of process standards, each with different properties
and in separate views:
· G7 parameters
· Digital parameters
· Proof parameters
You can find details about administration and editing of these process standards in the following
sections:
· "Process Standards: G7 check", page 116
· "Process Standards: Digital Print Check", page 112
· "Process Standards: Proof Check", page 109
• Print order through stylized display of the printing units
i
i
Note: While the "CIELab color values" and "Paper white" views are part of all process stan-
dards and consequently are enabled in all process standard types, the other views depend
on the process standard selected.
To create a user-defined process standard, click "Edit" to go from the view mode to the edit mode.
222 Version 2017

Process standard
'Overview' - View Mode

In the view mode, select the process standard you want in the "Standard" and/or "Printing Material"
lists. The following data displays in diagrams and data tables when you click the respective caption:
L*a*b* values for paper white, dot gain, nominal values and tolerances of CIELab data plus any den-
sity values and the order of printing.
Standard
You select the standard from two list boxes:
• In the left list box, select the type of printing process ("CMYK", "Multicolor" or "Spot colors").
• In the right list box you select the name of an existing process standard.
Some of the shipped process standards are defined for a number of printing materials and you can
select the ones you want in the "Printing Material" list.
Printing material
The various printing materials have different color data and tolerances. The following paper grades
are defined for Prinect Color Toolbox:
• PT1 - gloss coated white
• PT4 - uncoated white
Comment
The process standards included in the shipment have more details about the name in a comment
(e.g. details about the basis, backing, the defined printing materials) if you need more information.
This comment appears as a tooltip in the tree structure of "Administration" and helps you decide
which process standard is the one you need.
PS Norm Type, Delta E Type and Density status
These list boxes are active only in the edit mode (see 'Overview - Edit (Edit mode), page 226).
Internal reference file
This box is active only in the edit mode (see 'Overview - Edit (Edit mode), page 226).
Show/Hide Dot Gain Curves
The dot gain is shown in a diagram in the view mode. In Prinect Color Toolbox you can determine the
dot gain in steps of 10% and also for the two reference points 25% and 75%.

Process standard
When you create and save process standards locally, the curves for the three chromatic process col-
ors Cyan, Magenta and Yellow (primary colors) are shown together. Black (K) is shown separately
because it usually has higher deviating defaults. The small dots you see in the diagrams show you
where the dot gain was determined.
When you import dot gain from Calibration Tool, all the colors will appear in a single diagram. Click
the graphic area to switch to single views of colors or to go to the next curve. The corresponding color
channels are shown to the right of the diagram. These are generally the HD-ISO curves.
Show/hide dot gain values
The dot gain value table shows the nominal values and tolerances for dot gain specified in the pro-
cess standard in black; non-existing values are shown in gray.
A color sample at the upper table edge shows the process colors.
• Std = defined dot gain of the process standard
• Tol = tolerance value
The spread is calculated without black as the dot gain tolerances for the three chromatic colors cyan,
magenta and yellow are generally different from the tolerance for black. The spread is the maximum
difference between the three chromatic process colors. This is the maximum spacing between the
curves in the graph. An additional limit is evaluated with the spread. This means that the actual val-
ues are not in the process standard when this value is exceeded, even if the values are within the tol-
erance range.
224 Version 2017

Process standard
Show/hide paper white

Paper white is shown separately because the tolerances for the L*, a* and b* values usually differ.
The tolerances relating to the process standard are indicated separately in the table to the right as Δ
values.
You can hide and show this view as you like.
"Show/Hide CIELab color values and density values
In the data tables, the nominal values and tolerances of the CIELab values (solid tint) specified in the
process standard are black if they are enabled and gray if disabled.
The tolerance is specified by the color difference ΔE* (color distance).
i
i
Note: The present default values for secondary colors and overprint (CMY Gray) are dis-
abled for older process standards because they are difficult to comply with technically.
The process standards included in the shipment are write-protected. You must save the process stan-
dards under a different name if you wish to enable the values for secondary colors, overprint and, if
necessary, density.
You can also view the final density values for the primary colors cyan, magenta, yellow and for black
on the right side if the relevant boxes are checked.
i
i
Note: Although all the process standards shipped with Prinect Color Toolbox have solid tint
density values, these values are disabled. This is because it is very difficult to specify density
defaults due to varying measurement conditions.
ISO standards do not have any binding density defaults because this parameter is not standardized
and explicit.
You can enable these density values by checking the boxes in the edit mode. These default density
values correspond to measurement conditions with a polarization filter.
Show/Hide gray balance parameters
In "Gray balance parameters" you can define the tolerance for the gray balance check within the pro-
cess standard check. The sampling points are K30, K50 and K70.
i
i
Note: Up to now, the gray balance parameters were set and displayed in "Preferences >
Individual Quality Index [IQI]" tab. Because they are part of the offset process standard, they
are now set and displayed from a central point in this view.
Show/hide print order

The order of printing defined for the process standard is shown by a press with a maximum of eight
printing units. Active printing units are numbered from right to left and marked by the respective col-
ors.
i
i
Note: The "Use measurement values" function is not available in the view mode.

Process standard
'Overview - Edit (Edit mode)

Click "Edit" to enable the edit mode. To create a user-defined printing standard, you can modify the
nominal values and tolerances or the printing order of an existing process standard in the edit mode
or use existing data from "Measure".
You can enable the density values that are not defined in the process standard and/or the CIELab val-
ues of the secondary colors and overprint. You must save the process standards under a different
name because the process standards included in the shipment are write-protected.
i
i
Note: In "Preferences > MDS" you can choose whether the process standards will be saved
locally or in the MDS (Master Data Store). In addition, you can set that the tonal values will
be taken from Calibration Manager. This is always the case when you work with an external
MDS.
You can migrate process standards that are saved locally to the external MDS.
i
i
Note: You can import the process curve set for multicolor process standards from Calibra-
tion Tool. But in this case you cannot edit the dot gain curves. You can edit dot gain curves
only when you create and save process standards locally or when the option using Calibra-
tion Tool is disabled. If the option is enabled, you can edit dot gain curves only with Cali-
bration Tool.
In the edit mode, select the process standard you want in the "Standard" and/or "Printing Material"
lists. The following data displays in diagrams and data tables: dot gain, nominal values and toler-
ances of CIELab data plus any density values and the order of printing.
Standard
You select the standard from two list boxes:
• In the left list box you select the process (CMYK, Multicolor or Spot colors).
• In the right list box you select the name of an existing process standard.
Type a name for the new printing standard.

Printing material
Use one of the default paper grades.
The various printing materials have different color data and tolerances. The following paper grades
are defined for Prinect Color Toolbox:
• PT1 - glossy coated white; PT2 - matt coated white
PS Norm Type
The "PS Norm Type" shows the type of the current process standard and can have the following val-
ues:
• Offset (indicates the well-known classic offset printing standard)
226 Version 2017

Process standard
• Proof comprises the proof standards compliant with ISO 12647-7 (in predecessor versions, to be
found in Compare).
• Digital comprises digital printing standards compliant with ISO 15311.
• G7 comprises the American offset printing standards compliant with ISO 15339 or ANSI/CGATS
TR016.
Delta E Type
"Delta E Type" indicates which color distance formula is used by the currently selected process stan-
dard; it can have the following values:
• Delta Eab
• Delta E2000
The old offset standard ISO 12647-2:2007 that is used everywhere may only have the Delta Eab color
distance formula, whereas the new offset standard ISO 12647-2:2013 generally uses Delta Eab but
optionally can also support "Delta E2000".
The proof standard uses Delta Eab as its color distance formula.
The digital printing standard only uses Delta E2000, the new color distance formula.
The G7 offset standard uses Delta Eab as its color distance formula.
Density status
This item indicates which density status the currently selected process standard uses for measuring
density and in turn also for determining dot gain. Older process standards do not specify the density
status at all whereas the density is measured very accurately in newer standards.
Because the density status is specified in Prinect Color Toolbox in "Preferences > Measurement", it is
advisable to check the density status of the standard against one's own measurement mode.
Internal reference file
The internal reference file is important only for "Proof", "Digital" and "G7" standards. It is not import-
ant for offset printing standards.
Proof, digital printing and G7 process standards require an internal reference file for comparison. The
current measurement is compared with this internal reference file and the deviations between the
two are evaluated. This item describes which internal reference file is used by the currently selected
process standard.
Comment
Enter more details about the name in this box if you wish a more precise description of the printing
standard (e.g. details about the basis, backing, the defined printing materials). This comment appears
as a tooltip in the tree structure of "Administration" and helps you decide which process standard is
the one you need.
Show/Hide Dot Gain Curves
The dot gain is shown in a diagram in the edit mode. In Prinect Color Toolbox you can determine the
dot gain in steps of 10% and also for the two reference points 25% and 75%.

Process standard
When you create and save process standards locally, the curves for the three chromatic process col-
ors Cyan, Magenta and Yellow (primary colors) are shown together. Black (K) is shown separately
because it usually has higher deviating defaults. The small dots you see in the diagrams show you
where the dot gain was determined.
When you import dot gain from Calibration Tool, all the colors will appear in a single diagram. Click
the graphic area to switch to single views of colors or to go to the next curve. The corresponding color
channels are shown to the right of the diagram.
Show/hide dot gain values
The dot gain value table shows the nominal values and tolerances for dot gain specified in the pro-
cess standard in black; non-existing values are shown in gray. A color sample at the upper table edge
shows the process colors.
• Std = defined dot gain of the process standard
• Tol = tolerance value
The nominal values are entered in "Std" (standard). You can define a tolerance (plus/minus standard)
in the "Tol" (tolerance) box.
You can type the dot gain in 10% steps and also for the two reference points 25% and 75%. Usually,
you define the tonal values at 40% and 80% and this is required for a process standard.
For the primary colors, you can also specify a value for the spread. The spread is the maximum dif-
ference between the three chromatic process colors (the maximum spacing in the graph). This value
lets you define an additional limit. This means that the actual values are not in the process standard
when this value is exceeded, even if the values are within the tolerance range.
Show/hide paper white
Paper white is specified separately because the tolerances for the L*, a* and b* values usually differ.
The tolerances relating to the process standard are entered separately in the table to the right as Δ
values.
You can hide and show this view/input box as you like.
"Show/Hide CIELab color values and density values
If you wish, you can enter the L*a*b* values (solid tint) for all the colors if the appropriate color is
checked. The tolerance is specified by the color difference ΔE* (color distance).
i
i
Note: The default values for secondary colors (red, green and blue) and overprint (CMY
Gray) defined in older process standards are normally disabled because they are difficult to
comply with technically.
Small color samples indicate the color. You can choose existing names in the list boxes or type them
in the text boxes.
Similarly, you can also enter the final density values for the primary colors cyan, magenta, yellow and
for black on the right side if the relevant boxes are checked.
228 Version 2017

Process standard
i
i
Note: Although the process standards shipped with Prinect Color Toolbox have solid tint
density values, all these values are disabled. This is because it is very difficult to specify
density defaults due to varying measurement conditions. ISO standards do not have any
binding density defaults because this parameter is not standardized and explicit.
You can enable these density values by checking the boxes. These default density values correspond
to measurement conditions with a polarization filter. If necessary, you can overwrite these values.
Three additional functions are available in the list boxes for the color patches when you select a Mul-
ticolor or Spot color process standard:
• Import from color table
The "Import from color tables" dialog opens automatically when you select this item. Select the
color table you want and then the color to be used. You can use the functions for a simple search
in color tables (see Name, page 242).
• Import from measured data
To create new process standards for Multicolor/spot colors with measured color data, first select
the desired patch on the measured test chart in "Measure > Test chart". Then select your new
process standard in "Process standard" and in "CIELab color values and density values" the item
to which you wish to assign the measured value. The values are applied with "Import from mea-
sured data"; you only have to customize the name of the color.
IMPORTANT: After every import of measured data, you must first save the process standard
before you go back to "Measure" to select another color patch for import.
• PANTONE® color from measured data
The function combines the "Import from measured data" and the color table: Like in "Import
from measured data", you first select the desired color patch on the measured test chart in
"Measure > Test chart". Then select your new process standard in "Process standard" and in
"CIELab color values and density values" the item to which you wish to assign the measured

Process standard
value. When you choose "Pantone color from measured data", the data of the color patch
selected in "Measure > Test chart" are used for the automatic search for the spot color whose
values are closest to the measured data. The "Import from color tables" dialog then opens auto-
matically, showing you the spot color found. When you click "OK" in this dialog, this spot color
is then used as a new primary color, and the Lab values of the color table are set for this new
primary color.
IMPORTANT: Like with the import of measured data, you must first save the process standard
before you go back to "Measure" to select another color patch.
Show/hide print order

The order of printing defined for the process standard is shown by a press with a maximum of eight
printing units. Active printing units are numbered from right to left and marked by the respective col-
ors.
You can modify the printing unit setup by clicking the printing unit colors. The color changes each
time you click.
Click through to the color you want for every printing unit, going from right to left.
i
i
Note: This is shown for your information only and will not be gone into detail.
Use values from measuring area

The current color data of the test chart or control element open in "Measure" are automatically
entered as the reference data (standard) as well as the tolerances when you click "Use measurement
values".
You can also enable "Use tonal values, if available".
i
i
Note: You can delete a user-defined printing standard only in the view mode or in the
"Administration" view.
How to Create a Spot Color/Multicolor Process Standard
i
i
Note: You can create process standards manually as described below or using an Assistant
that automatically runs through the majority of the settings, leaving you no or few settings
to do yourself (see "Creating a Process Standard for Spot Colors", page 54).
You can create process standards for a maximum of seven process colors (CMYK plus red (orange),
green and/or blue).
1. Choose a CMYK process standard and a suitable printing material in the overview or in admin-
istration.
2. Click "Edit".
3. Select "Multicolor" or "Spot colors" in the left "Standard" list box and edit the name for the stan-
dard on the right.
230 Version 2017

Process standard
4. Type in all required parameters:

• Dot gain
Dot gains cannot be edited if the process standard is imported from Calibration Tool.
The dot gain targets (process curve set) can be specified as follows:
· Define the targets yourself in local mode when no MDS is used.
· Do this via Calibration Tool when MDS is enabled in the Preferences.


When "any other spot color" was enabled in Calibration Tool (MDS enabled), you can
choose from the following:
– CMY target curve (default for standard process curve sets)
– K target curve
– User-defined target curve
– No target curve (the first existing primary color is used; if it is not present, the K curve
is used.)
You can also select target values for spot colors by the respective names (orange, green, blue...)
using specially created dot gain curves.
• Paper white
• CIELab color values and densities if applicable
i
i
Note: You can also import the color data from color tables or measured data (see Import
from color table, page 229 and Import from measured data, page 229).
5. Click "Save" to save your input.

6. Check the new process standard in the "Measure > Process standard" main function.
i
i
Note: When you open the respective test chart or control strip, some process standards
might not be assigned automatically. In such a case you must manually assign colors.

Process standard
7. Choose the desired color in the list boxes. 

Click "OK" to assign this color to the respective color channel.
'Administration' View
You can open this view by clicking the "Administration" tab.
Select and edit process standard
This part of the dialog displays a tree structure with all existing process standards.
The printing process type is indicated in square brackets:
• [CMYK]: Process standard for conventional four-color printing
• [Multicolor]: Process standard for 5-color, 6-color or 7-color printing (CMYK + red (orange),
green and/or blue)
• [Spot colors]: Process standard for a maximum of 8 colors (CMYK + max. 4 spot colors or max.
8 spot colors)
Some of these process standards are defined for a number of printing materials. The following paper
grades are defined by default:
• PT1 - glossy coated; PT2 - matt coated
Each standard defined by printing material is filed in its own folder. You can open or close these fold-
ers with a single click on an arrow or a double click on a folder icon.
You go to the overview if you double-click the name of a process standard. All the diagrams and data
tables of this process standard display.
232 Version 2017

Process standard
You can select, import or export a process standard in the "Administration" view. You can edit a
selected process standard in the edit mode in "Overview". After you makes your changes, you can
write the process standard back to the MDS.
Delete process standard
You can delete a process standard selected in the list if it is a user-defined process standard and if it
is not currently open in the "Overview". You cannot delete process standards included in the ship-
ment.
Import a standard
Click "Import" to open a dialog where you can select a file that has a process standard.
The process standards included in the shipment are filed either in the local and/or external MDS.
You can access the process standards directly through the local and/or external MDS if you are work-
ing with the new Prinect Image Control (2).
If you are working with Prinect Image Control as of version 5.0/5.1 and/or QualityMonitor 2.5, you can
import the shipped or user-defined process standards to Prinect Color Toolbox. All the process stan-
dards are located in the "ProcessStandard.ini" file. They are converted automatically during import.
The dot gains are generated automatically from the existing dot gain curves.
i
i
Note: Process standards from older QualityMonitor versions 1.1 and 2.0 are not compatible
and cannot be imported.
You can import a process standard only if you haven't already one with the same name. If you have,
you must delete or rename the existing process standard first.
Export a standard
Click "Export" to open a dialog where you can save (export) your user-defined process standard.
The process standards included in the shipment are write-protected and cannot be deleted. You can
save custom standards you created either in the local or external MDS, as you set in the "Preferences"
dialog.
You can export process standards for data backup, archiving or data exchange with external media.
You must save the process standards as a separate file for every printing material that is defined. You
can give the file any name. It doesn't have to be the name of the process standard.
The name of the process standard and the selected printing material are written together with all
other data to the "ini" file. These details are used when you import an exported process standard to
Prinect Color Toolbox and the process standard is added accordingly to the list in "Administration".

Process standard
Calculate wet process standard

Values measured on a wet sheet cannot be applied to a dry sheet because of the penetration behav-
ior of inks. .
The process standards defined by ISO/Fogra, however, apply only to the dry state of sheets. For that
reason, a suitable wet process standard must be defined for a wet sheet.
To increase your production reliability, it is helpful if you can determine as early as possible, e.g.
during printing, whether the (dry) process standard will be reached.
Problem:
• The wet values comply with the process standard.
• The dry values do not comply with the process standard.
• The greatest deviations are found in black and yellow inks (depending on the color and printing
material).
Procedure for the Wet-Dry Assistant

1. Print a job with the CS4i or FOGRA4 control strip
· Proof print of a test chart is not necessary
· Use of a production job
2. When the job is finished, print an inking series with Prinect Image Control or Prinect Axis Control
The density range you will set can vary depending on the ink set and paper used and, as a result,
an inking difference of 2% or a density difference of 1% per zone may not be enough. You
should then check whether the standard can be reached with the maximum density or inking
during drying. If this is not the case, you should use a bigger range.
3. Measure the wet control strip with Prinect Image Control or Prinect Axis Control (inking series).
4. Wait until the sheet is dry (at least six to eight hours, perhaps even longer)
5. Measure the dry control strip
234 Version 2017

Process standard
6. Check whether your inking range is sufficient.

Prinect Color Toolbox: In "Measure > Ink zones > Show ΔE", check whether the ink stability
curve intersects the process standard curve in every color channel. If this is the case, the pro-
cess standard is reached during drying. If not, you must increase the density/inking range.
7. Go to the "Process standard" main function.

8. Start the Prinect Color Toolbox Wet-Dry Assistant in the "Process standard" main function by
clicking "Dry -> Wet".
9. Open the color data of the control strip that was measured when wet.
10. Open the color data of the control strip that was measured when dry.
The optimal zones for the dry standard are found with the help of these two measurements and the
selected process standard. The table then shows the degree to which the dry standard can be
reached with the present paper and ink set. In addition, the ink zone of the optimal inking displays
for each color. You can then use these zone details in the measuring device for the definition of a wet
ink set.
11. Save the calculated wet process standard.
If you cannot calculate a wet process standard, the color channels causing this are red. The density/
inking range used was then too small. The "Save" button is dimmed.

Process standard
After the wet process standard is calculated, you can see in the "Administration" view ("Process stan-
dard" main function) that the wet process standard was generated and set up automatically.
236 Version 2017

Process standard
When this standard is saved to the MDS, Prinect Image Control (NG), for example, can now access it
automatically and work with it. In other words, printers can check whether their wet sheets comply
with the process standard. In this case they can be sure that the dry sheet also complies with the pro-
cess standard. Consequently, Analyze Point (Prinect Pressroom Manager) also can work with this wet
standard and check the effect of the process standard on production.
"Use tonal values from Calibration Manager"

To view or edit a process standard you can import dot gains (curves and associated data) from Cali-
bration Manager. To do this, you must first set up a connection to the external MDS. Proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Open the "Preferences > MDS" dialog, see "'MDS' tab", page 268.
2. Select "Save process standards in the Master Data Store".
3. Enter the computer name on which the external MDS is located.
4. Test the connection, if necessary.
5. Enable "Use tonal values from Calibration Manager".
6. Close the Preferences and restart the program.
7. Open the "Process standard" main function and choose a process standard.
Editing dot gain curves is only possible when you create and save process standards locally. "MDS"
must be disabled in the Preferences for this purpose.
In the Preferences, you can choose from the following options:
• "Save process standards locally" is enabled: Prinect Color Toolbox and MDS are located on the
same PC. Calibration Manager is not involved.
Dot gain curves are created and edited in Prinect Color Toolbox.
• "Use tonal values from Calibration Manager" and "Save process standards locally" are enabled:
Prinect Color Toolbox and MDS are located on the same PC. Calibration Manager provides the
dot gain curves but is not involved otherwise. You cannot edit dot gain curves.
• "Use tonal values from Calibration Manager" and "Save process standards in the Master Data
Store" are enabled: Prinect Color Toolbox, Calibration Manager and MDS can be installed on dif-
ferent PCs. Calibration Manager provides and edits the dot gain curves. You can select but not
edit them in Prinect Color Toolbox.

Process standard
Migrate local process standards

In the "'MDS' tab", page 268 in "Preferences", you can choose whether user-defined process stan-
dards will be saved locally or externally in the MDS (Master Data Store). You can migrate process
standards that are stored locally if you wish to make them available in the external MDS.
To do this, you must first set up a connection to the external MDS. Proceed as follows:
4. The "Migrate local process standards" button is now enabled. Click it to open the "Process stan-
dard migration" dialog.
5. Select all the process standards that you wish to migrate by checking the appropriate boxes.
6. Click "OK" to start migration. The dialog closes.
The migrated process standards are now available on the external MDS.
238 Version 2017

Tools
Tools
Functions of the 'Tools' Menu

The "Tools" menu is found in all the main functions and contains the following functions:
• Tools > "Color calculator", page 239: You can use the color calculator to view color data and
tonal values calculated using profile conversion tables.
• Tools > "DeviceLink Profile", page 246: Two CMYK device profiles are connected to a DeviceLink
profile in this dialog.
• Tools > "Profile smoothing", page 250: Press profiles are smoothed with a low-pass filter in this
dialog.
• Tools > "Process parameters", page 251: You can define the printing process parameters (data
about output device, type of paper, process color, screening and plate).
• Tools > "Ink Limit Calculation", page 253: You can open and edit measured data to determine
ink limits.
• Tools > "Spot color control strips", page 254: You can create custom control strips for use as ref-
erence data in "Control strip > User-defined" in the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dia-
log.
• Tools > "3D spot color view", page 255: You can select a reference profile and a color table for
the mapping of spot colors in the 3D view.
• Tools > "Gray balance calibration", page 255: In this dialog, you calculate gray balance data for
gray balance calibration in the Calibration Manager.
• Tools > "Gray balance optimization", page 260: In this dialog, you calculate gray balance data
for gray balance optimization in the Calibration Manager.
Color calculator
You can display the color calculator with the "Tools" menu in all the main functions. In the color cal-
culator, you can view color data and tonal values calculated using profile conversion tables:
i
i
Note: You can open several color calculator dialogs at the same time with the menu and
use them to compare different profiles and color data.
Spot color evaluation with the color calculator

The following items must be remembered during evaluation, depending on the presses available in
your shop:
• How big is the difference between the actual print result and the desired reproduction of the
spot color in a print using available color material (paint pot) on the target printing material?

Tools
• Can the spot color be replaced by CMYK or, when required, by Muticolor (5c, 6c, 7c) and what
deviations are there in this (important in digital printing, for example)?
The analysis results can help you decide which print process is best suited on which machine for a
job or whether the supplied paint pot batch of a spot color can be used.
Two options for evaluating the spot color are available to you in the color calculator:
• "Calculate color values" lets you analyze how well the measured color can be replaced by a
CMYK print process or with Multicolor ("Color calculator > Calculate color values", page 241).
• "Compare color values" shows you how far off a measured spot color is from the matching value
in the color table/color fan and consequently from the desired result ("Color calculator >
Compare color values", page 245).
The following video tutorials give you visual descriptions of this:
• To assess whether a new batch for a spot color can be used
• Replace a Spot Color or Not
Simulation of reproduction of spot colors

If you use the color calculator on several press profiles, you can determine which profile is best suited
to obtain a selected hue if the latter is changed by gamut mapping. You can open the color calculator
several times for this.
For that reason, this function is very suitable for simulating the reproduction of spot colors and in-
house colors.
For example, you want to decide whether a certain hue can still be printed true-to-color on a less
expensive type of paper or whether you have to select a different quality. By selecting the appropriate
profile, you simulate the various types of paper and can then judge how much they deviate by com-
paring the reproduced colors.
Manual copying of color data from tables
You can type in the values you want into the "Input" and "Output" boxes. If the values are available
as a table (e.g. in Microsoft Excel), you can also copy and paste them in blocks.
1. Select the row(s) with the values in your table. The entries can be found individually in several
rows or with separators in one row (e.g. 69.0\-18.0\-37.0 as Lab values), and you can copy your
selection to the clipboard (Ctrl+C).
2. Mark the first target box in the color calculator (e.g. Input > L).
3. Paste the copied values with Ctrl+V. All other boxes are also filled with their values from the clip-
board.
This is a fast, simple and less error-prone way to copy your data, especially when copying multicolor
values.
Replace spot color from the color table in print
• You can also use the color calculator for evaluation if you wish to replace a spot color from the
color table in the print process by CMYK/Multicolor:
240 Version 2017

Tools
In "Calculate color values" select the table and the name of the spot color to check (for example,
a PANTONE® color set in a PDF of your customer). The Lab values of the table color display in
"Input" and in "Changes" you see automatically the deviation values when the spot color is
replaced by CMYK or Multicolor.
• You can also type the Lab values of a spot color directly into the boxes below "Input". Then click
the "Lab to CMYK" button to apply the values to the analysis.
Color calculator > Calculate color values
Reference profile
The color calculator can only be used for press profiles. You must open a press profile to view source
and target color values. For CMYK, you can use the standard profile set by default, "ISOcoat-
ed_v2_eci.icc", in most cases.
Click "Open..." to open the profile browser where you can select and open a press profile.
i
i
Note: The profile browser shows details about the process properties if these process
parameters are also saved in the ICC press profile.

Tools
In the "Profile Browser Configuration" dialog, you can define which parameters you want displayed
and in what order.
If you select a Multicolor profile as a reference profile, you can check how a better result can be had
in a 5c, 6c or 7c replacement.
Rendering Intent
Rendering intent defines the approach taken in color reproduction. The target value can be calculated
for four different rendering intents:
• Perceptual: reproduction is based on perception or is photographic (separations). In this vari-
ant, the colors you wish to reproduce are mapped to the color gamut of the reproduction pro-
cess (gamut mapping) so that there is no loss of definition in the image when it is reproduced.
Normally, the very chromatic colors are desaturated slightly and a pure (neutral) white is repro-
duced on the white of the medium (for example, of the paper).
• Relative colorimetric: color matched to the medium through lightness and color cast. All col-
ors that cannot be displayed as a result of these measures are located along the outer edges of
this gamut and lose some of their definition.
• Saturation: widely used option for reproducing chroma in colors, with less importance attached
to retaining lightness. This method is not really suitable for traditional color reproduction but
rather for synthetically produced images such as business graphics. Now and again, the "Satu-
ration" intent is implemented in profiles in such a way that you obtain the same results as with
"Perceptual".
• Absolute colorimetric: refers to colorimetrically accurate reproductions. This is particularly

important for proofs or soft proofs. All colors that are in the displayable range of the process are
reproduced without any colorimetric changes. However, to obtain this result, all non-displayable
colors must be confined to the outer edges of the gamut, and as a result, a greater loss of defi-
nition can occur here in this restricted color gamut than with "Relative Colorimetric".
i
i
Note: To evaluate a spot color, "Rendering Intent" must be set to "Absolute colorimetric".
This is automatically set with "Import from measured data"; you may have to set it yourself
for other modes.
Table
You can select a PANTONE® or HKS color palette in this list box. The names of all colors in this pal-
ette are then show in the "Name" box. Select "manually" to enter your own color values. In this case,
the "Name" box is disabled.
Name
Select a color from the currently selected palette in this list box.
Some of the spot color tables listed above have very different structures. For example, PANTONE®
solid is sorted by numbers whereas PANTONE® PLUS is sorted by saturation. You can simply type in
the color number or part of the color name into the box instead of looking for the color in the (long)
list. The color calculator automatically shows a matching color from the list.
If your input is not clear, the color calculator proceeds as follows in its search:
242 Version 2017

Tools
1. Items that start with the number or name you entered

2. Items that end with the number or name you entered
3. Items that contain the number or part of the name you entered
Only the first item displays if the search result is ambiguous, in other words if several items matching
the search criterion were found. You can go to the other items using the left or right arrow keys on
your keyboard. To start a new search, click the list box again and type in a new string.
Input
As a source value, type any Lab, XYZ or LCH value (from existing color samples or known color data).
The values are automatically converted when you switch over the model in the popup menu.
When color data are imported from a color data file, the data are copied directly to the input boxes.
Output
The target value is then calculated for the source value using the loaded profile. The CMYK value and
the ΔE deviation to the reference profile that display depend on the profile that was selected.
"S1" thru "S4" refer to the spot color channels. These boxes are enabled only if a multicolor profile
(Multicolor option) is open. These display the additional colors.
If the names of the colors are known, they appear as a tooltip when you point the mouse pointer at
the initial letter.
Changes
The color box on the very right shows you a preview of the two colors, giving you a first impression of
the difference between the target and measured values (displayed on the monitor using a fixed sRGB
profile; original value on the top, calculated value on the bottom). All the analysis values are listed
below "Changes" to the left of the box.
The accuracy that is possible for the reproduction of the source value is calculated for the print pro-
cess set by means of the profile and shown as color difference values (color distance) ΔEab or ΔE00
(2000), ΔL, Δa and Δb, ΔH (hue distance) and ΔC (chroma distance).
The value for ΔE00 is particularly important for evaluation of a spot color because this value describes
the color deviation in saturated colors more accurately than ΔEab. Values of ΔE00 < 1 show that the
spot color is within the color gamut of the process or very close to it and can be replaced satisfactorily
by CMYK.
The greater the ΔE00 values, the harder it is to replace the spot color, in other words, color deviation
would be all the more noticeable.
With ΔE00 > 1 it is possible to replace the color without any problems; in most cases this is also appli-
cable for ΔE00 between 1 and 2. With ΔE00 > 3 you must decide in the field whether the deviation is
still tolerable, with ΔE00 > 6, however, it is only possible to replace the color with Multicolor.
i
i
Note: The color difference values calculated are specified as ΔEab as well as the newer ΔE00
(2000). ΔEab is the current definition for calculation of color distance based on the ISO stan-
dard of 1976. The more recent formula, ΔE 00, is significantly more complex and produces
more accurate values. ΔE00 is more suited than ΔEab especially when replacing spot colors.

Tools
Import from measured data

The color data of the selected patch in an open measurement file are copied to the input boxes when
you click this button, for example, to compare a spot color you just measured with the color table.
Include quantization effect
The ΔE values are calculated from the comparison of the original CIELab values with the result of the
internal conversion of CIELab to CMYK and the transformation of CMYK back to CIELab. Normally,
these values are calculated with the highest level of accuracy possible but which cannot be achieved
in real conditions.
Example showing quantization effect excluded/included for a 7c multicolor profile and a Pantone
spot color:
Calculation
Click the "Lab to CMYK" button to convert the input color value (Lab, XYZ or LCH) to the output tonal
value (CMYK and, if necessary, S1, S2, S3).
i
i
Note: You must start conversion only if you enter the values manually. Conversion runs
automatically when data are imported or taken from the color table.
244 Version 2017

Tools
Click the "CMYK to Lab" button to convert CMYK and, if necessary, S1, S2, S3 to Lab, XYZ or LCH.
Color calculator > Compare color values
The values for spot colors depend on the printing material on which they are printed. In addition,
deviations between the various batches can occur because of the production process. "Compare
color values" lets you compare the color values of patches with the table entries.
1. Measure the hue you wish to analyze.
2. Start the color calculator with "Tools > Color calculator" and select the "Compare color values"
tab.
3. In "Table" select the spot color table used that you want for comparison.
4. Click "Import from measured data". The Lab value of the selected patch is imported to the color
calculator (Lab values displayed below "Input").
The color calculator now automatically looks for the color in the table that best matches the imported
values (Lab values displayed below "Table").
(5). Select the correct color name if the item you want was not found in the color table (because, for
example, the deviation is greater than the distances between the table colors).

Tools
The two Lab values are now compared by the color calculator and the deviations display in "ΔEab"
and "ΔE00" below "Changes". In addition, the differences for single channel, chroma and saturation
display as well.
These values let you evaluate how close the actual print result of the spot color on the printing mate-
rial comes up to the matching value in the table.
In the field, deviations of approx. 1 for ΔE00 can be classified as satisfactory, and values below 3 as
still within the ISO standard. The spot color probably cannot be used with ΔE00 values of 5 thru 6 or
higher.
You can also use "Compare color values" to compare two colors without using the color table. To do
this, simply enter the Lab values of the second color in the boxes below "Table".
To compare several color patches of a measure run, click the next color patch in the test chart, click
"Import from measured data" again and analyze the next color.
i
i
Note: The other setting options are described in Color calculator > Calculate color values,
page 241.
Keep color
The current comparison is buffered when you click "Keep color". In this way, you can import as many
as eight colors from measured data or define them by entering values and compare the color data
with the color table.
Afterwards, you can save the data to a csv file using the Export function. The table in the csv file then
contains the patch name, the related Lab values from "Input" and "Table" and the deviation ΔE00.
Click "Reset" to clear the buffer without exporting the data.
DeviceLink Profile
You can open the "DeviceLink profile" dialog using the "Tools" menu in all the main functions. Two
CMYK device profiles are connected to a DeviceLink profile in this dialog. RGB profiles are also pos-
sible. You can also set special options for keeping black plus CMY and RGB colors in this dialog.
246 Version 2017

Tools
Calculation of DeviceLink profile

DeviceLink profiles describe the reproduction properties of an entire process chain. You can use
them, for example, to simulate newsprint on a proof system.
In the method used in this case, the DeviceLink profile will be calculated from existing profiles of the
two processes or print conditions. Total dot area and gamut mapping can be taken from the press
profile, and black can be set with the appropriate parameters.
First of all, the profiles you want to link are opened. "Profile 1" is the profile that describes the color
space of the input device and "Profile 2" is the profile that describes the color space of the output
device.
Following that, the options for totaling the profiles are selected (rendering intent, preserve black, pre-
serve colors and black point compensation).
Profile 1
Click "Open" to open the profile browser where you can select and open a source profile.
Profile 2
Click "Open" to open the profile browser where you can select and open a target profile.
Rendering Intent
Then select one of the four rendering intents for this target profile. The rendering intent defines the
approach taken in color reproduction (see "Rendering Intent", page 242 for a description).
Preserve black
During a device color space conversion, you can select four different options for keeping black:
• None: Black of the source profile (Profile 1) is not preserved and is replaced by that of the target
profile (Profile 2). This is always a good idea if the processes differ a lot, for example, going from
offset printing (chromatic reproduction) to newspaper printing (achromatic reproduction).
• K=K: Black remains identical. Only the chromatic colors C, M and Y are converted to the target
CMY color space, K is not converted, so that the hue effect is kept as far as possible. This option
makes sense, for example, whenever one of the chromatic process colors is to be replaced by a
similar color and all the other process conditions are to stay the same. This setting is also ideal
for documents with a large amount of text and line art. Through K=K, you can avoid that black
elements suddenly have a considerable amount of chromatic colors. The total dot area of the
output profile is NOT preserved in this process! For example, CMY 100%, 100%, 100% becomes
95%, 100%, 85% + 100% black.
i
i
Note: This setting can cause problems during output if the black inks have different densi-
ties in the source and target color spaces.
• Basic: Like with K=K, C, M and Y are converted to the target CMY color space, K is converted to
the target density with the help of a gradation curve. This setting is also ideal for documents with
a large amount of text and line art (grayscale images). The gradation curve solves any problems
you may have with differing black ink densities. The total dot area of the output profile is NOT
preserved in this process! For example, CMY 100%, 100%, 100% becomes 95%, 100%, 85%
+ 100% black.

Tools
i
i
Note: With this method, it is possible that a 100% black may not be reached and text and
graphics may be reproduced inadequately in some cases.
• Special (default): This is a special setting that works as follows:
· C, M, Y are converted to the target CMY color space for mid-range and light hues. K is
converted by means of a gradation curve. The lightness curve is kept in this process.
· A special four-dimensional model keeping K is used for dark hues. The original black is
kept in the shadows. The chromatic colors are converted in such a way that color per-
ception is preserved as far as possible.
The overall performance is a mixture of the "None" and "Basic" settings in "Preserve black".
Extensive tests have shown this procedure to be the best. The "Special" parameter eliminates
most of the problems in complex documents. This parameter is only provided by the Heidelberg
CMM. This setting is suitable for documents with text, color and gray images. The total dot area
of the output profile is preserved.
Preserve colors
You can choose from five different options for keeping colors when creating DeviceLink profiles:
• None: The colors of the primary and secondary tonal values of the DeviceLink profile are taken
from "Profile 2", the press profile. The color composition of the input profile is overwritten. This
is always meaningful when the processes differ greatly from each other.
• Primary The solid tints of the primary chromatic colors (cyan (C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y))
are kept.
• Primaries and tonal values: The smooth shadings (blends) are preserved as well as the solid
tints. These are single-color tonal gradations of the chromatic colors going from 0% to 100%.
• + Secondary: In addition to the solid tints of the primary chromatic colors (cyan, magenta and
yellow), the two-color overprints red (MY), green (CY) and blue (CM) plus the overprints of a
chromatic color with black (CK, MK, YK) are preserved.
• Secondaries and tonal values: The two-color smooth shadings of the chromatic colors or of a
chromatic color plus black are preserved in addition to the primary colors (cyan, magenta and
yellow) with single-color smooth shadings and the secondary colors (red, green and blue).
You should prefer this setting in day-to-day operations when you want to save chromatic inks
and preserve the overprint properties by creating special color compositions in the data to be
printed (achromatic composition).
• + Tertiaries with K setup Colors that are composed only of two primary colors (CY, CM or MY)
and black are ignored by color management and stay as they are in this composition. This
means there is no four-color setup following conversion.
Such colors are mainly used in logos or similar cases where an accurate adoption of the color
data is desired.
248 Version 2017

Tools
Rich black
This option enhances the detail contrast in image elements that are made up solely of K. The contrast
is increased by adding cyan but without a color cast becoming noticeable. You can choose between
three different levels. "30% Cyan" means that areas with 100% black are given a supplementary
30% cyan. Cyan decreases more rapidly than K, meaning that the cyan value is already at zero if you
have a middle K value.
Higher cyan values produce a higher contrast. In practice, values of 30% or 60% are sufficient in
most cases. Objects made up of more than one color are not affected by this setting. This means that
the option normally does not affect color images at all.
Caution: Because text is handled just like graphics, the addition of cyan also affects pure
text elements. For that reason, you must define the appropriate settings in the PDF Toolbox
if such a profile is used for printing pure black text elements.
Black point compensation

The "Black point compensation" option is only effective in combination with the "Rel. colorimetric"
rendering intent. With this option, the different shadows (the maximum achievable four-color black in
the print) in the input and the output processes are mapped to each other. The same is done with the
chromatic colors. This makes black point compensation a special form of gamut mapping (linear
gamut mapping). Apply this option is feasible if the gamut differences between two processes are not
too great and the objective is to obtain a reproduction as uniform as possible.
Keep GCR
In GCR (Gray Component Replacement), conversion from the Device Link is by default to the target
GCR values. In PDF documents that already have elements with a higher GCR value or have user-
defined elements with a high amount of K, this can result in a reduction of the calculated K percent
compared to the initial value. If you enable "Keep GCR", the GCR values and consequently the per-
centage of K are preserved for these elements. The total dot area of the output profile is preserved
(normally, logos or the like are elements with a high GCR and are to remain unchanged).
Standard process:
"Keep GCR" enabled:

Tools
Keep black text

This option applies only to RGB input profiles. It makes sure that pure black text from RGB
(R=G=B=0) is converted automatically to 100% K in the CMYK profile.
Profile description
The profile description is generated automatically from the names of the source and target profile and
the profile parameters. This entry is suggested as the file name of the ICC target profile when it is
being saved.
Use this name or type any description for the ICC target profile into this box. We recommend that
your description shows you at once what type of profile it is.
i
i
Note: If you use a DeviceLink profile as a source profile in MetaDimension or Prinect Pre-
press Manager, any existing target profile will be ignored. For that reason, we recommend
that you assign a name that contains a reference to a link profile.
Calculate DeviceLink profile

RGB is calculated to CMYK or CMYK to CMYK when you create DeviceLink profiles.
Click "Calculate" to link both selected ICC profiles and calculate the DeviceLink profile.
An appropriate message appears if calculation is successful.
Save profile
Click "Save" to open the "Save file" dialog.
The start folder for ICC profiles set in "Preferences" displays showing all items. By default, the file
name box displays the profile description. "ICC profile (.icc)" is selected as the file type.
If needed, you can change these settings.
Click "Save" (in the "Save file" dialog) to save the DeviceLlink profile.
After calculation of the profile is finished, close the dialog box by clicking "OK".
i
i
Note: DeviceLink profiles are not supported by all applications. However, numerous work-
flow programs and RIPs support DeviceLink profiles (e.g. Heidelberg's Prinect Integration
Manager and MetaDimension).
You can find more information in the brochure "Prinect User Guides – Color and Quality: DeviceLink
Profiles".
Profile smoothing
You can filter ICC profiles with a low-pass filter in Prinect Color Toolbox. This function is optional and
you can display it in all the main functions using the "Tools" menu. The filter creates smoother tran-
sitions in the color space and is applicable mainly for press profiles.
250 Version 2017

Tools
'Correct profile by smoothing' Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Tools > Profile smoothing" menu.
Convert profile with filter properties
This is where you set a low-pass filter to make the color space even smoother and thus enhance the
profile quality.
Input profile name
Click "Open..." (beside Input profile name) to open the profile browser where you can select and open
an input profile.
Output profile name
The name of the input profile appended by "_Filtered" automatically displays in the text box.
You can overwrite this name or click "Open" (beside Output profile name) to open the profile browser
where you can select the output profile.
Rendering Intent
Profile conversion occurs with the "Perceptual" rendering intent. Enabling this option also lets you
enable the additional calculation with the "Rel(ative) colorimetric" and "Abs(olute) colorimetric" ren-
dering intents (see "Rendering Intent", page 242 for a description).
Profile smoothing
You can set a value between "0" (no smoothing) and "10" (maximum smoothing) using the slider.
Process parameters
You can call up this dialog in all main functions with the "Tools > Process parameters" menu. The
function is enabled only if "Setup of the process parameters and save in measurement data and ICC
profile" is checked (default) in the "'Preferences' Dialog", page 264 ("General" tab).
You can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade, process color,
screening and plate) in this dialog. The process parameters are saved in the color data file or the ICC
profile.
Click "Store" to display the "'Store parameter set' Dialog", page 252 where you can save your current
process parameters to a parameter file you name. These settings are then available for other color
data files/ICC profiles, making it unnecessary to retype the parameters. You can, of course, make
parameter set with saved process parameters.
Click "OK" to confirm your process parameter setup and close the dialog. The process parameters are
also saved in the color data file or the ICC profile.

Tools
Process parameter settings

You can select the process parameters in list boxes that have defaults based on the current ICC spec-
ification (e.g. output process, paper grade, process standard). Some items are in the process of being
approved for future ICC specifications. 
Type more details in the text boxes (e.g. manufacturer).
The process parameters are also saved in the data file or the profile. However, they do not change
the color conversions in the profile or influence processing by certain CMMs.
The items are of a purely informative nature and are only for the record. They are displayed in the
profile browser during profile selection (you can configure the display as required) and help you
select and sort different ICC profiles.
i
i
Note: You can enable/disable how the process parameters will be saved ("Setup of the pro-
cess parameters and save in measurement data and ICC profile") in the "Preferences > Gen-
eral" dialog. You cannot call up the "Process parameters" dialog in the "Measure" and "Cre-
ate" main functions if the option is disabled. The button and menu are then disabled
(dimmed). It's also not possible to edit the process parameters in the "Edit" main function.
'Store parameter set' Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Store" if you wish to save a complete set of parameters. The
parameters displayed in this dialog (e.g. process parameters) depend on which ones are currently
set. All the saved sets containing process parameters are displayed in the list box.
You can type any name for the new parameter set in the text box.
You can delete a selected set from the list by clicking "Remove".
Click "OK" to save your current settings as the parameter set under the name you defined and close
the dialog.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without saving the parameter set.
'Load parameter set' Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Load" if you wish to load a saved parameter set. The param-
eters displayed in this dialog (e.g. process parameters) depend on which ones are currently set. All
the saved sets containing process parameters are displayed in the list box. You can select and load a
parameter set from this list.
Double-click the file name or select the file and click "OK" to load the parameter set.
The dialog closes afterwards.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without loading a parameter set.
252 Version 2017

Tools
Ink Limit Calculation

You can call up this dialog in the "Measure" main function with the "Tools > Ink Limit Calculation"
menu. With ink limits you set the maximum inking for each process color, something which is import-
ant mainly for ink jet and digital printing processes. For example, on presses like the Labelfire 340
only a certain volume of ink can be cured using UV dryers, meaning that the maximum inking must
be limited accordingly.
The data for the process colors of the current measurement file display. Click "Open" in the dialog if
no file with data is currently open or if you wish to select a different file.
On the right, you can see the tonal values, i.e. the ink limit, calculated from the measured data. The
related density value displays in each case in the box below.
You can view the measured data in the middle. Densities and tonal values are shown by way of com-
parison there. The present ink limit is visualized by a red line. In the top of the view, you can see
which file data are displayed. Use "Open" to open a different file for determining the ink limit.
You can set your own ink limits by entering the relevant data in the boxes. The red line in the diagram
moves accordingly. Use "Reset" if you wish to rest the data to the value they initially had after the
color data file was loaded. "Save" lets you save the ink limits to an IT8 file. You can import the data
from the set file location with the Calibration Manager.
With linearization strips, the lower part of the "Ink Limit Calculation" dialog is expanded by a view of
the dot gain in the Lab color space. This lets you estimate how much a curvature in the locations
depends on the tonal value.

Tools
Spot color control strips

In the "Measure" main function, you can invoke a dialog for creating custom spot color control strips
with "Tools > Spot color control strips".
You can then use these custom control strips in "Control strip > User-defined" in the "Color Toolbox
> New measurement file" dialog as reference data for new measurements.
This gives you a fast way to compare the spot colors you use with the desired result, allowing you to
check deviations in paint pot batches or the quality when replaced by CMYK or Multicolor.
You can define as many as eight spot colors for a control strip. If a number greater than that is
entered in the "Spot colors" box, the dialog automatically switches to the maximum setting of eight
colors.
When you first create such a control strip, you select only a profile you want for an initial calculation
of separation values, enter the number of spot colors and then define the values in the table.
There are three ways to define the values:
• Enter the Lab values directly into the boxes in the table (the separation values are calculated
from this and cannot be edited directly)
• Import the values from a color table (select "Table" and "Name" of the color from the list box,
mark the spot color you want in the lower table and click "Set color" beside "Table")
• Import from measured data
In this case, the measurement file you want must be open.

1. Mark the patch in the measurement file whose value you wish to use .
2. Click "Import from measured data" (a preview of the color displays on the right).
3. Mark the spot color item you want in the lower table.
4. Click "Set color" beside "Import from measured data".
You can manually match the Lab values in the table after you import from measured data and use
values from the color tables.
The finished control strip is saved as a txt file. At the same time, a reference file (".ref") is also gen-
erated that can then be found in "User-defined" in the control strips.
Click "Import reference data" in the dialog if you wish to edit an existing custom control strip or use
one as the basis for an advanced strip. The reference profile, number of spot colors and defined color
are taken from the reference file.
You can now, for example, increase the number of spot colors, define additional colors or just edit
the existing inputs. When you click "Save", the "Storage location & base file name" dialog always
opens, allowing you to decide whether to replace the old reference or to save it as an additional ref-
erence under a new name.
254 Version 2017

Tools
3D spot color view

In this dialog you can select a reference profile and a color table so that you can visually compare the
locations of the spot colors from the table with the color gamut of an ICC profile.
i
i
Note: At present, this function is available only in the "Measure" main function.
After you click "OK", you will see a 3D view with statistical results in the caption bar.
You can rotate the view holding down the left mouse button or view a parallel projection holding down
the right mouse button. You can scale up and scale down the view with the mouse wheel. When you
move the mouse pointer to one of the dots, the index of this dot displays below the caption bar, with
the Lab values if applicable.
Gray balance calibration

You can open the "Gray balance calibration" dialog using the "Tools" menu in all the main functions.
In this dialog, you can set gray balance data for process calibration (see "Calculate correction data",
page 258).

Tools
General Information about Gray Balance

The gray balance is defined as a set of tonal values for cyan, magenta, and yellow that results in an
achromatic color when printed and viewed according to specified conditions. Print conditions are
defined in the applicable process standards (Process Standard Offset published by bvdm, German
Association of Print and Media) based on ISO standards (ISO12647-2:2004/Amd1 2007).
Gray balance optimization does not contradict the ISO standard and the Process Standard Offset
(PSO) but is a sensible complementary method. The correct perception of gray values is a key quality
feature of a printed product. Gray values deviating from the printing material regarded as neutral
color are rated disturbing.
There are special control strips for visual and metrological checking of the gray balance, such as
ECI_GrayConS_FOGRA39.
Gray Balance in Real Printing

As a rule, prepress uses standard profiles for defined print conditions. These standard profiles apply
to defined tints and dot gains on a defined paper grades.
One example is the "ISOcoated_v2_eci" profile based on "FOGRA39L" characterization data for paper
grades 1 and 2 (coated papers). This profile features a specific chromatic gray axis resulting from the
overprinting of the Cyan, Magenta and Yellow process colors.
But deviations in gray rendition (paper white, inks, ink absorption, screening, etc) occur again and
again in daily print shop practice. This means the gray balance in a print process is not a static but
rather a dynamic factor depending on various parameters and therefore is prone to more or less read-
justment as need be.
The rendition of gray will vary on different paper whites (e.g. due to optical brighteners) and with dif-
ferent inks in spite of correctly set tints and correctly calibrated dot gains.
Processes where defined dot gains are replaced with a defined gray balance cannot be correctly
described by conventional process calibration methods and require new methods.
Gray balance calibration

Heidelberg's gray balance calibration is a method for setting up the gray balance for a four-color print
process. The advantage of this method is an even gray balance and a continually optimized layer
thickness or color of primary inks:
• Color values remain unchanged.
• Dot gain is adapted.
Gray balance calibration is suited for visually mapping print conditions that do not exactly meet the
standard:
• paper grades and paper tints deviating from the reference
256 Version 2017

Tools
• inks deviating from the reference
• screens deviating from the reference
• ink absorptions deviating from the reference
Workflow
1. Linearize the platesetter and plate making (Calibration Tool)
Linearize the platesetter as usual.
2. Image a plate set with a test chart without process calibration

Imaging is done with linear printing plates and the ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual/Random or
ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual/Random test chart. The IDEAlliance P2P25 test chart is now
also supported. In addition, the printing plates should have elements for a process check (print
control strips, step wedges) and for a visual check of the gray balance.
3. Run the press to a standard printing condition

Linear plates are run to standard values for inking using the color bar.
4. Press proof the plate set using the process standard

After sheets are up to color and conform to standard values (usually run several hundred to a
thousand sheets to stabilize the press conditions) several samples are pulled and inspected for
any possible defects.
5. Measure the test chart (Prinect Color Toolbox)

The test charts are measured with Prinect Image Control or a suitable external measuring device
and averaged, smoothed and analyzed in the Quality Monitor of Prinect Color Toolbox.
6. Optional: Calculate an ICC profile (Prinect Color Toolbox)

A standard ICC profile can be created from the linear test forms using the Profile Tool. The profile
settings for area coverage, black composition and gamut mapping are of no significance here as
only the absolute color values from the ICC profile are used for gray balance optimization.
7. Calculate gray balance optimization (Prinect Color Toolbox)

The gray balance optimization feature in the Prinect Color Toolbox calculates and saves a cor-
rection data record by analyzing the characterization data or the ICC profile of the reference
printing condition and the characterization data (ISO 12642-2 or P2P25) or the ICC profile of the
linear print.
8. Import the color data of gray balance optimization to Calibration Tool

In the Calibration Tool a process calibration is calculated based on a linear set of process curves
and saved in the internal database.
9. Output and print a set of calibrated printing plates

When the process calibration is activated, the calibrated set of plates is output again and printed
according to the process standard in use. Again the sheets are brought up color using the same

Tools
standard condition as the linear run, and again the press is allowed to stabilize. When sheets
are ready several samples can be removed and checked both visually and metrological. At this
point to the results can be compared to a proof which corresponds to the reference printing con-
dition.
10. Measure the test chart again

The calibrated test chart can be used for process monitoring and creating a profile of the printing
process during production. The inking values of the printing process and the (various) tone value
increase curves can be saved as target values in the Quality Monitor.
11. Check process in print

Besides a check of the color values and the (different) dot gains, it is also possible to use an ECI/
BVDM special gray control strip. This strip (large, medium or small) must be placed on the press
sheet for the check. After it is measured, it can be evaluated with the Quality Monitor.
12. Iterative gray balance optimization

Iterative optimization of gray balance is a feature worth using if you discover that gray has to be
constantly readjusted during a day's work. For this purpose, place the ECI/BVDM gray control
strip for the appropriate print condition on a press sheet (see Gray balance optimization).
i
i
Note: You can find more information in the following leaflet:
Prinect User Guide – Color and Quality
Gray balance optimization
Fundamentals and Application (3rd Edition)
Calculate correction data

1. Open the "Gray balance calibration" dialog with "Tools > Gray balance calibration".
2. First of all, open either a reference profile or reference data (characterization data).
3. Then open the color data or the ICC profile of the print process to be calibrated.
4. Select the correction data format in the "Data format" list box. Gray correction data can be cal-
culated with 5 or 8 reference points.
If gray balance calibration with five reference points is selected, corrections are calculated at
25%, 50% and 75% (the values relate to cyan; magenta and yellow are lower at 19%, 40% and
66%). This would seem to be adequate in most cases. Gray balance calibration with eight ref-
erence points is slightly more accurate. In this case, corrections are calculated for 15%, 30%,
40%, 50%, 60% and 75%.
Gray balance calibration at values greater than 75% is not advisable because at these values
black already dominates in the usual color separations. This can cause unnaturally sharp cor-
rections if the three-color overprint deviates greatly from the reference values in the shadows.
At the same time as gray balance calibration, the dot gain of black is corrected. The number of
reference points here is also five or eight, with these values geared towards cyan.
258 Version 2017

Tools
Calculation starts after you have set your data. After that you can save the correction data for further
processing in Calibration Tool.
You can view the correction data in the tables on the right of the dialog. Interpretation of the numbers
is somewhat unusual: You must now correct the reference tonal values on the left by a calibration
curve to produce the process tonal values on the right. Calibration has to change the reference value
C = 25% into the process value C = 21.6%. This also applies to the values for magenta and yellow.
This behavior becomes clear if you take a look at the dot gains again in the diagram below (the dot
gains are clearly too high).

Tools
Gray balance optimization

You can open the "Gray balance optimization" dialog using the "Tools" menu in all the main func-
tions.
In this dialog you can calculate the required gray balance optimization data for process calibration in
order to optimize the gray balance.
Gray balance optimization is used in cases where it is clear that manual correction of gray must be
done at the press on a regular basis.
Gray balance optimization optimizes existing process calibrations to enhance their gray balance.
Suitable minispots are also printed on the production jobs for this (ECI-GrayCON_L. M or S). The use
of a G7-compatible print control strip is now possible if you are printing compliant with the G7 spec-
ification. These measured data are evaluated in Prinect Color Toolbox. After that, the correction data
for process calibration are calculated. These data are then imported to the Calibration Tool and set
off against the existing process calibration. Afterwards a new plate set is imaged and a new proof
print is made to check dot gain and gray balance.
ECI together with BVDM developed gray control strips for the usual print conditions for a visual check
and a technical one with an instrument. For this purpose, the color data for specific black patches
(30%, 50%, 70%) were determined on the printing material and chromatic color combinations with
the same degree of brightness were calculated from the ICC profile. These two patches (black, chro-
matic gray) were placed side by side, making a visual comparison possible. A technical comparison
using an instrument is also possible and implemented in the Quality Monitor.
Gray balance optimization in the Prinect workflow

Print minispots
• use a calibrated process as a basis
• use ECI_GrayCon_L/M/S (see "'ECI_GrayConL', 'ECI_GrayConM' and 'ECI_GrayConS' with 52, 32

or 6 Patches", page 310) if you are printing using ISO 12647-2 or Process Standard Offset (PSO)
or use a G7 print control strip if you are printing compliant with the G7specification.
Gray balance optimization

The color data of the minispots and a reference print condition are used in the Profile Tool to
calculate the correction data.
Correction data
The correction data are saved in Prinect Color Toolbox and imported to the Calibration Tool.
260 Version 2017

Tools
Calibration Tool
In Calibration Tool, the existing process calibration is optimized using the correction data from
Prinect Color Toolbox.
Prinect Workflow
The new calibration is enabled for plate output.
Procedure
1. The color data of the minispots are checked in the Quality Monitor in the "Analysis" main func-
tion. The data of five to eight press sheets are used for this. Ideally there are two ECI-Gray-
CON_xx control elements on each press sheet. The data outliers are disabled; the remaining
data sets are averaged to generate the correction data.
2. Go to gray balance optimization with the "Tools" menu. First, open the reference profile of the
target process and after that the data that were averaged beforehand. Then calculate the correc-
tion values that will display in the table on the right. To conclude, save your correction data.
3. In the Calibration Tool open the process calibration matching the process. Select "Curve Modifi-
cation" and "Correction of Gray Balance". A window for the import of the correction data opens.
After the correction data are included, image a new plate set and make a proof print to check
the enhanced gray balance.
New minispots for the evaluation of gray balance

Four variants of a new minispot are also available for the evaluation of the gray balance:
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_39: Paper grade 1 and 2, gloss coated and matt coated
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_43: FM screen, paper grade 1 and 2, gloss coated and matt coated
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_44: FM screen, paper grade 4, uncoated white
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_47: Paper grade 4, uncoated white
The advantages of these minispots are that there are 10 color patches for each color channel, in addi-
tion six color patches for the evaluation and calculation of the gray balance: K30, K50, K70 as well
as CMY30, CMY50 and CMY70. You can measure these strips with the X-Rite EyeOne strip in two
measure runs.

General Information about Preferences

"File > Preferences" invokes the function for basic settings in all the main functions. The "Prefer-
ences" dialog displays and you can define the following defaults after selecting the tab you want:
• General settings such as set file locations, select the language of the GUI, switch to the easy
mode (see the 'General' tab)
• Settings for measuring colors in "Measure" (see the 'Measurement' tab)
• Selection of a reference file for data comparison in "Compare" (see the 'Compare' tab)
• Selection of maximum four hot folders and their backup folders for the analysis results in "Anal-
ysis" (see the 'Hotfolder' tab)
• Settings for MDS (Master Data Store) for editing process standards (see the 'MDS' tab)
• Selection of a License Server (see the 'License Server' tab)
• Settings for the proof report (see the 'CIE Report' Tab)
• Settings for the CIE report in "Compare" (see the 'CIE Report' Tab)
• Setting of tolerances for ink zones and gradual fading in "Measure" (see the 'Tol [%]' (tolerance)
tab)
• Settings for a custom process standard index that you can use to customize the weighting of the
quality criteria (dot gain, ΔE (Delta E) and gray balance) (see the 'Individual Quality Index (IQI)'
tab)
You can define preferences in every main function, irrespective of whether they are to be applied at
once. Some of the preferences do not affect the current document but only new ones you create or
the next document you open. Some preferences require that you restart the application, for example,
for a language switchover.
i
i
Note: After installation and initial launch of the application, we recommend that you cus-
tomize your preferences to your needs.

'Preferences' Dialog
'General' tab
In the "General" tab, you can define the following settings:

• Define locations separately for color data files, ICC profiles and series (Open/Save).
Click the button with the three dots to change the default location and select the one you want
for the data in the dialog that appears.
• Enable or disable a filter for files coming from Prinect Image Control.
When this function is enabled, the "Image Control Filechooser" window displays with six sorting
criteria that you can use for fast file selection: "Machine", "Job", "Date", "Print", "Sheet" and
"Element". Files created with Prinect Image Control are automatically given a name when saved
and, as a result, have the necessary information for the sorting criteria. The names of color data
files are broken down and the identifiers are added to the relevant lists.
• Select the language for the user interface.
Afterwards, you must restart the program.
264 Version 2017

• Switch to the easy mode.
Only the overall results of the quality assessments (reports and proof statistics) are displayed in
the "Compare" main function.
• Enable the function for setting and saving process parameters.
If this function is enabled, you can enter process parameters and save them along with the mea-
sured data. Likewise, the process parameters and the measured data are saved within the gen-
erated ICC profile.
The dialogs for entering process parameters are disabled if the function is not selected, and pro-
cess parameters are not saved along with the measured data.
Recommendation: Enable function
• Enable the function for calculating tonal vales based on ISO 12647-1 if there are no tonal values.
Dot gain is determined from measured density values. If no density values were measured and
this function is disabled, you can calculate the density values from the spectral values or, if the
latter were also not measured, by general approximation from the Lab (xyz) values.
Recommendation: Enable function
• Allow suppression of message dialogs
Messages that are issued when non-conform data are imported are suppressed when this func-
tion is enabled.
You can suppress further messages by checking the box in a message if this function is disabled.
• Fixed axis scaling in trend (CIE report)/Fixed axis scaling in trend (dot gain report) and/or Fixed
axis scaling in trend (density report)
A fixed axis scaling instead of a dynamic one is used for all diagrams if this function is enabled.
This lets you identify the analysis results more easily (especially for dot gain analysis) and com-
pare them with each other.

• Show in "Measure" as well
When these options are enabled, the ab diagram and/or dot gain table views are added to the
"Measure" tab.
ab diagram: You can also view the ab diagram without having to first go to the "Compare" main
function to do this (see 'ab diagram' View, page 84).
Dot gain table: This table is equivalent to the table that you can view in "Measure > Dot gain" in
addition to the curve diagram when you drag the lower part of the view upwards (see Data Table,
page 76) Because dragging the lower part of the view upwards causes the curve diagram to be
squashed, it may be clearer to toggle between the two view modes for dot gain using the tab bar.
'Measurement' tab
i
i
Note: The settings for color measurement (which values will be measured) and measure-
ment conditions (density status, filter, backing and density display) depend on the device
you use and are only possible in this dialog as they must be set before the instrument is ini-
tialized. Changes to the instrument settings will apply to the next document to be mea-
sured!
In the "Measurement" tab, you can define various preferences for measuring colors in documents:
Measuring conditions
• Spectral measurement conditions for CIELa*b* values compliant with the ISO-13655 standard:
M0 (undefined, most of the old measuring devices), M1 (D50, daylight illumination), M2 (UV cut
filter) or M3 (M2 + polarization filter)
Your selection does not affect calculations.
• Density status, e.g. ISO 5-3 Status T or Status DIN16536 (NB). Your selection impacts some cal-
culations.
266 Version 2017

i
i
Note: If you change the type of filter in the "Color measurement" dialog, this change is
applied automatically to the Preferences.
• White or black backing. Your selection does not affect calculations.
• Density display (absolute or relative). Your selection impacts some calculations.
Measurement - Options
• Remember last instrument used
When this option is enabled, the last instrument used is used for the next measurement.
• Which color data are to be measured and saved to the data file?
Normally, XYZ and Lab values are measured. Optionally, density and/or spectral values (remis-
sions) can also be measured if this is supported by the device.
• Show a message if an inconsistent density status is found when you open a file?
• Check spectral remission values
Measured spectral data must be normalized for further evaluation. Peaks above 100% can occur
in the UV<->Blue range. This can be caused by the measuring device whose calibration or print-
ing material (especially papers with UV optical brighteners). In such cases, you cannot distin-
guish whether or not the data are correct or whether errors occurred because of incorrectly cal-
ibrated or defective instruments.
When this option is enabled, the input spectral data are examined closely and the tolerance for
peaks above 100% is kept very small. This prevents the use of faulty data, although correct mea-
sured data may also be rejected in the process.
Preferred measurement devices

Prinect Color Toolbox supports a wide range of colorimeters. Following the introduction of the new
ISO 13655:2009 standard, all manufacturers brought out new measuring devices that work in com-
pliance with this standard. The disadvantage of the large number of colorimeters supported by
Prinect Color Toolbox is the long list of devices for selection in the measure function. If only one mea-
suring device is used, you can work around this issue by enabling "Remember last instrument used".
However, if you use several different measuring devices, we recommend that you match the "Pre-
ferred measurement devices" list to the devices you use. For example, you can click "Deselect all" and
then enable only the measuring devices that you really use. In the measure dialog, the list of measur-
ing devices then only has those devices that you enabled in the preferred list and as a result is much
clearer.
'Test chart' tab

Like you did in "Measurement" for the measuring devices, in the "Test chart" tab you can set which
test charts will display in the selection dialogs to confine the lists to the test charts that you actually
use and, by doing so, to keep the lists clearer.

The other two tabs let you make the same preliminary selection also for control strips and lineariza-
tion strips.
In the lower section, you can set which test chart will be used as the default in the list boxes. This
makes your work easier if you use one test chart more frequently than others.
To set this, first choose between "Test chart", "Control strip" or "Linearization strip" as your test chart
type and then set the standard you want and the type. The box on the right displays a preview of the
test chart for easier detection.
'Compare' tab
In the "Compare" tab, you can select a color data file or an ICC output file that has measured data.
When the application launches, this file loads automatically as the reference file in "Compare".
You can either enter the file name with its full path in the text box or click the three dots to the right
of it and select the reference file from the "Reference file for comparison" dialog. The file name with
its full path is automatically entered.
'Hotfolder' tab
In the "Hotfolder" tab, you can select a total of four different folders and their backup folders. These
hotfolders are monitored in "Analysis" and can be started for the analysis results. After the data in
the hot folder are evaluated and displayed, they are copied automatically to their backup folder.
i
i
Note: In Prinect Image Control, the data for quality control (quality data) are stored in the
"Results" folder (D:\cpc24\QualityMonitor\Results). This folder often has a large data vol-
ume because the quality data of different jobs are stored there and up to four presses can
access this folder. For that reason, to have a better overview of your data, you should not
define this "Results" folder as the hot folder. Select any other folder to which you can copy
the data you wish to evaluate from the "Results" folder.
If you are working with the new Prinect Image Control, you can set any output folder for the
quality control data in "Service > Integration/System > Prinect Configuration". Write per-
missions are required for this folder.
'MDS' tab
In the "MDS" tab, you can define settings for editing process standards.
The "Master Data Store" (MDS) was introduced at Heidelberg for the centralization of common soft-
ware resources to enable their general integration. The MDS is one of the PIL components (Prinect
Integration Layer) which the Messaging Service and the JDF Storage Service are also part of.
An MDS server is always installed (locally) along with Prinect Color Toolbox.
The Calibration Manager process curve sets (aim curves) are used if you enable "Use tonal values
from Calibration Manager". You can set your own custom dot gains, tolerances and spreads if the box
is not checked.
268 Version 2017

By enabling the appropriate radio button, you can choose whether the process standards will be
saved locally or in the MDS (Master Data Store). You must enter the name and port of an external
MDS server if you wish to save to it. You can test the connection with the appropriate button. The Cal-
ibration Manager dot gain values are always used when process standards are saved externally.
i
i
Note: You must restart the application if you switch to MDS.
Process standards that are saved locally can be sent to the MDS where they can then be evaluated
when you click "Migrate local process standards".
You can edit and save a process standard in the "Process standard" main function. All changes can
be written back to the MDS.
Migrate local process standards

You can migrate process standards that are stored locally if you wish to make them available in the
external MDS.
To do this, you must first set up a connection to the external MDS. Proceed as follows:
4. The "Migrate local process standards" button is now enabled. Click it to open the "Process stan-
dard migration" dialog.
5. Select all the process standards that you wish to migrate by checking the appropriate boxes.
6. Click "OK" to start migration. The dialog closes.
The migrated process standards are now available on the external MDS.
MDS backup
You can import and export the MDS with the "Add or Remove Programs" dialog (in the Control Panel).
The following options are available after you select "Heidelberg Prinect Master Data Service 2.5.36.7"
and click "Change/Remove":
• Restore/Import: This option lets you restore the master data archives (current MDS data will be
replaced) and/or import the master data to the Master Data Store (will be added to the current
MDS data).
• Archive: You can select the Master Data Store in a master data archive with this option.
• Remove: This option lets you remove components that were installed by the Heidelberg Prinect
Master Data Service (only for a full uninstall).
'License Server' tab

You can select a different License Server in the "License Server" tab.
• Server: This displays the name of the currently used License Server.

• New Server: This is where you enter the name of the License Server you want.
• License Information: This displays the name and location of the license file used.
• Apply: If the new License Server is available, it is used after you click "Apply".
i
i
Note: You can find more details in the License Manager User's Guide and Help.
'CIE Report' Tab

In the "CIE Report" tab, you can define which data will be shown in "CIE report" (in the "Compare"
main function) by checking the boxes you want:
• Show/hide dot gain at 25%
• Show/hide density values
• Show/hide CIELAB color values
• Show/hide analysis
• Show/hide proof report
The sections you selected are shown even if they have no data. For a better overview, these sections
(except for "Total results") are minimized to a caption bar and can be shown or hidden by clicking
this bar.
'Tol [%]' (tolerance) tab

In the "Tol [%]" tab, you can enter tolerances for the "Ink zones" and "Gradual fading" views in the
"Measure" main function.
The tolerance range of the process standard is green in the views and can be hidden.
i
i
Note: These tolerances for ink zones and gradual fading do not refer to the process stan-
dard when you assess density. This is where you define a threshold that refers to an evalu-
ation diagram that displays for the single views (see "Show density", page 79 in "Ink zones"
and "Show density", page 82 in "Gradual fading").
you selected.
270 Version 2017

'Individual Quality Index (IQI)' tab

In the "Individual Quality Index [IQI]" tab, you can set custom values for weighting the quality criteria
(dot gain, ΔE and gray balance).
The valuation system is applicable for all the available process standards, "CMYK", "Multicolor" and
"Spot colors". The IQI system (scoring model) provides a systematic method for the comparison and
valuation of the quality level of your print production. All decision-related criteria are listed and
weighted in this process; each property of the features is assessed using points. Scoring models try
to quantify quality and subjective expectations and make them comparable.
The sum of all single values (Scoring) produces the index (Maximum Value). This includes color val-
ues, dot gains, paper white and gray balance.
The default value is 3.0. Values ranging between 3.0 and 4.0 make sense. The permissible values for
the evaluations lie between 0 and 10.
"Gray balance" displays the tolerance for the gray balance check within the process standard check
(displays for your information only; you edit the gray balance parameters in the "Process standard"
main function in "Show gray balance parameters", see Show/Hide gray balance parameters, page
225).
i
i
Note: If the factors evaluated by IQI are not complied with in the color control strip or mini-
spot you are checking, as for example in the Prinect 4GS strip, the maximum value that is
possible is automatically matched accordingly.
Example for setting the individual quality index
Compilation of the maximum value for IQI in the "Preferences"
The maximum value is the sum of all enabled single valuations:

• Score for Solid ink, 5.0 each for cyan, magenta, yellow and black results in 20.

• Score for Dot gain (20%), 3.0 each for cyan, magenta, yellow and black results in 12.
• Score for Dot gain (40% and 80%), 5.0 each for cyan, magenta, yellow and black results in 40.
• Score for Gray balance, 5.0 each for K30, K50 and K70 results in 15.
• Score for Gray balance, 3.0 each for L, a and b results in 9.
This results in a maximum value of 96 that displays below in the middle of the dialog. In addition, the
"Type" and the currently set process standard also display.
General Information about Printing Your Data

Prinect Color Toolbox calculates quality characteristic values, e.g. statistical parameters from ΔE
(Delta E) evaluations, based on a comparison of color data sets. The results are shown in different
lists and diagrams in an easy-to-understand way and can also be printed as a record. This lets you
create quality reports, for example, as are required for certified businesses.
You can call up the print dialog in all the main functions with "File > Print". The "Print" dialog appears
where you can select the diagrams and tables you wish to print by checking the appropriate boxes.
In addition, you can define settings relating to the job (job name and number, sheet number and com-
ment).
'Print' Dialog
You can print various diagrams and tables or labels with this dialog. The diagrams you can select and
their contents depend on the main function you are in when you call up the print function. After you
selected your diagrams and clicked "OK", a print preview is generated and displays everything you
selected (diagrams, data tables, reports and logs) one below the other, if necessary, on several pages.
The lower border of the print preview displays the current page number and total number of pages.
Depending on what you have selected and on your printer, you can print the diagrams and tables to
paper or archive them to a file using the "Print" button (at the bottom right). You can generate a PDF
file with "Adobe PDF" if you have a suitable application like Adobe Acrobat.
The arrows at the top left of the preview let you scroll to the next or previous pages or go to the first
or last page.
You can set the view of the print preview at the top right: whole page or just a section, scale up or
down using the magnifying glasses or select a default factor from the list.
The print function is available only if you loaded at least one color data file or profile. Quality results
from comparisons (e.g. reports) are printed with empty templates if reference and comparison data
are not open at the same time. The data of the open file are listed in the relevant table.
i
i
Note: The "Label printer (Dymo LabelWriter)" can only be selected in the "Measure" main
function (see also "Labels to be printed", page 274).
272 Version 2017

Diagrams to be printed
The following table shows you which diagrams and tables can be printed in each of the six main func-
tions:
Print Diagrams/Tables Measure Compare Analysis Create Edit Process

standard
Color quality certificate – – –
Process standard – – –
Dot gain report – – –
Ink zones – – – – –
Gradual fading – – – – –
xy diagram – – – –
ab diagram – – – –
La/Lb diagram – – – –
ΔLab Report – – – – –
CIE report – – – – –
Proof report – – – – –
Statistical results – – – – –
Data table – – –
Profile parameters – – – – – –
Analysis report – – – – –
Production check conform with – – – – –
ISO 12647-2
Please note the following items:

• Some diagrams can only be printed if the relevant data are loaded.
• You can print some diagrams and tables in "Compare" if two color data sets or two ICC profiles
are open, in "Analysis" if a series is open.
• You can only print the xy, ab and La/Lb diagrams and data tables if you have measured data.
Select the diagrams and tables you want to print by checking the appropriate boxes. All selectable
diagrams and tables are enabled automatically if you selected "Color quality certificate". A flyleaf is
also generated with the following details:
• a graphic of the test chart or test strip used
• the names of the loaded files
• process standard used and paper grade

• the measuring method
• the job/customer
i
i
Note: Take note of the number of pages that will be printed for the color quality certificate
or data table. For example, more than 40 A4 pages are required to print all the color data
of a large test chart.
Job number, Job name, Sheet number and Comment

You can assign every diagram and table a job number, a job name, a sheet number (if present) and
any comment that will also be printed. Check the appropriate boxes and type in your text.
You can also check the boxes and not type anything if you want line spacing that you can later fill out
by hand.
You can print a proof report with the Dymo LabelWriter in the "Measure" main function. To do this,
in the print dialog select "Label printer (Dymo LabelWriter)" as the current printer.
Labels to be printed
If a Dymo LabelWriter is connected, you can print proof reports to labels that you can then use to
mark your proofs. The label printer can only be selected in the "Measure" main function. It is neces-
sary first to select a proof process standard.
Check the "Proof Report" box in the "Print" dialog.
i
i
Note: Always install the latest driver for the Dymo LabelWriter for printing your data.
Change Logo
You can print the diagrams and data tables with the Heidelberg logo at the bottom right margin.
Example:
You can also print the pages without this logo or with a custom logo.
Proceed as follows:
1. Create a "gif", "jpg" or "png" file that has the logo you want.
The optimal width-to-height ratio for the logo is 60:5.
2. Name this file "ReportImage.png" (.jpg or .png). This file name is case-sensitive. "R" and "I"
must be upper case.
3. Copy the file to this location:
"<Drive>:\Prinect Color Toolbox\Color Tool xx.0\settings\preference"
The logo you set will be printed the next time instead of the Heidelberg logo. The image is scaled
automatically.
274 Version 2017

i
i
Note: The Heidelberg logo displays if the image cannot be loaded. There is no error mes-
sage. Create a file with a white background if you do not want a logo.


In this chapter, you will find useful information about the test charts supported by Prinect Color Tool-
box, what they look like, their use, advantages and disadvantages and other features.
How to Record a Printing Process

The properties of a printing process can be determined by measuring its chromatic features and its
linearity. To do this, a test chart is printed with a color scale where the combinations of the four pro-
cess colors cyan, magenta, yellow and black are systematically graduated, each going from 0% to
100%. Following the proof, this color scale must be measured with a colorimeter and analyzed.
What are Test Charts?

Test charts, often referred to as targets, are reference originals that are used for the characterization
of color output devices such as color printers, presses and proofers.
There are different types of test charts, depending on the printing process:
• CMYK test charts are used for profiling printing processes in normal four-color printing with
cyan, magenta, yellow and black (e.g. offset and newspaper printing).
The test charts have various graduations of the four primary colors cyan, magenta, yellow and
black.
• RGB test charts are used for printing processes with output devices that only support RGB data
(e.g. slide imagesetters, desktop printers).
The test charts have combinations of red, green and blue.
• CMY test charts are used for output devices that only print three colors, cyan, magenta and yel-
low, achieving enough saturation with them to give satisfactory results (e.g. sublimation print-
ers).
The test charts only have graduations of the three primary colors cyan, magenta and yellow but
no black.
• Test charts for spot colors (e.g. Hexachrome) are used for printing processes with more than
four primary colors (spot colors, HiFi Color).
Test charts were developed for these cases, differing in the number of patches and their layout. Most
of the profiling software manufacturers use their own test chart that can only be evaluated with a
matching program. In addition, test charts based on international standards were developed such as
the ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 test charts (ANSI = American National Standards Institute) or the ISO
12642-2 / ECI 2002 test chart.
The drawback of test charts that are arranged in blocks of similar colors (visual layout) is that there
are often problems with an uneven distribution of ink.

Since it's not possible for a printing expert to intervene and make specific corrections, there are
scrambled versions of these charts (random layout, rearranged) where the patches are arranged in
such a way that the ink is always applied evenly to the ink zones during printing. However, adjacent
colors in these test charts are no longer located beside each other, something that could be visually
disturbing when viewing the test charts.
The random version is recommended for characterization of conventional printing processes.
A proof print is made of the test chart matching the printing process that is then measured with a
spectrophotometer.
There are test charts with a small number of patches that can be measured simply with a hand-held
instrument and others with more than 800 patches (large test charts) where automatic measuring is
recommended.
The test chart that you will use for profiling basically depends on
• the profiling software
• the printing process
• the spectrophotometer used
• the profile quality you expect
• the time involved
Overview of the Test Charts
CMYK Test Charts Patches

ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual 928
ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Random 928
ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual 1617
ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Random 1617
ISO 12642-2 plus
ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual 1485
ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random 1485
PrintOpen Basic 135 135
PrintOpen Basic 210 210
PrintOpen Standard 210 210
PrintOpen Extended 840 840 (4 x 210)
278 Version 2017

Especially for packaging Patches

HD Packaging 5C 1485
Multicolor test charts Patches

PrintOpen Multicolor 5-C 2 x 1229
CMY Test Chart Patches

PrintOpen CMY 135
RGB test charts Patches

PrintOpen RGB Standard 135
PrintOpen RGB Extended 840 (4 x 210)
Overview of the Control Strips
CMYK Control Strips Patches

ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip L Coated/Uncoated/ 52
Coated FM/Uncoated FM
ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip M Coated/Uncoated/ 32
ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip S Coated/Uncoated/ 6
ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip M i1 Coated i1/Uncoated 39
i1/Coated FM i1/Uncoated FM i1
ECI/bvdm TVI_10 45
G7 P2P25
IDEAlliance DCS 2009/2013 54/84
HD Proof Color Bar 32
MB_100_80_40_CMYK 13
MB_100_70_40_CMYK 13

CMYK Control Strips Patches

MB_100_75_50_25_CMYK 17
PCM Gray Control Strip L i1 Coated i1/Uncoated i1/ 54
Coated FM i1/Uncoated FM i1
PCM Gray Control Strip L G7 52
PCM Gray Control Strip M G7 32
PCM Gray Control Strip M G7 i1 31
PCM Gray Control Strip S G7 6
PCS40 Gray i1 39 40
PCS19-100-80-40-Gray Coated/Uncoated 19
PCS control strip 40AB/40A 40
PCS control strip 60AB/60A 60
Prinect 4GS strip 29
Prinect/Fogra 4 strip 41
FOGRA MediaWedge CMYK
V3.0 / V3.0 -1row / V3.0 -2rows
User defined  variable
(user-defined control strips)
User-Spot_PW  2
(for evaluation of spot colors)
Overview of the Linearization Strips
Linearization Strips Patches

PCM Type 13 4 x 13
PCM Type 25 4 x 25
PCM Multicolor 5-C 13 5 x 13
HDM Inkjet CMYK/CMYKOV * 4 x 22
MB_Process Type Standard 7
MB_Process Type 13 13
280 Version 2017

Linearization Strips Patches

MB_Process Type 25 25
MD_C2_TotalInkLimit *
MD_C3_InkLimitchannel *
MD_C4 *
MD_C5_QualityControl *
* These linearization strips are not available as PDF or Tiff files in the "Testcharts" folder. They are
also printed to the output devices, e.g. Labelfire340. Color Toolbox has suitable reference files so that
these linearization strips can be selected and measured directly in Color Toolbox.
CMYK Test Charts
'ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3' Test Chart with 928 Patches

Advantages
• Standardized ISO/ANSI test chart
• Optimized for offset printing and general application
• Many different combinations of black with CMY
• For special black calculations, e.g. PrintOpen 4.x for PC and Mac OS X 
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
• Very good profile quality for prints and proofs
Disadvantages
• Problems with the distribution of ink because of the regular arrangement of patches
• CMY colors only 6 x 6 x 6
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 70%, 100%
• CMY colors often not enough for high-end proofs
• Measuring 928 patches takes longer
Recommended for
• automatic measurements only

• profiling prints and proofs in general
Test chart structure

The test chart is divided into 27 blocks with a total of 928 patches which are marked by a two-digit
number (00 to 26). The name of each color patch is made up of:
• the two-digit block number (00 to 26)
• the letter referring to the row or column (A to max. N)
• the two-digit number for columns or rows (01 to max. 13)
Group Patches (928) Function

00 7 (CMYK and RGB) Solids (primary and secondary colors) for measuring
A1 - A7 density
00 10 Patches with CMY combinations with same amounts
A8 - B4 of 70%, 40% and 20%
00 8 Patches with CMY combinations with same amounts
B5 - B12 of 100%
00 1 Paper white
B13
00 4 x 13 = 52 C, M, Y and K step wedges for checking the dot gain
C1 - F13
00 43 Patches with CMY combinations of 20%, 40%, 70%
G1 - J4 and 100%
00 37 Patches with neutral grays (CMYK) for checking the
J5 - M2 gray balance
00 24 Patches with CMY combinations of 20%, 40%, 70%
M3 - N13 and 100%
01 - 06 6 x 6 x 6 = 216 Saturated patches without black
07 - 12 6 x 6 x 6 = 216 Saturated patches with 20% black
13 - 22 10 x 5 x 5 = 250 Patches for checking the shadows
23 - 26 4 x 4 x 4 = 64 Patches with a lot of color for checking the dot gain
282 Version 2017

Notes
• If possible, print the test chart in the recommended direction (direction of arrow).
• The regular arrangement of the patches causes the ink to be distributed unevenly over the areas.
You can eliminate this problem either by
· printing the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual" test chart once in longitudinal direction
and once in cross direction and then using the mean values or by
· using the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Random" test chart.
'ISO 12642 / IT8.7/3 Random' Test Chart 

(Rearranged IT8.7/3) with 928 Patches
Advantages
• Test chart with standardized color data
• Optimized for offset printing and general application
• For special black calculations, e.g. PrintOpen 4.x for PC and Mac OS X 
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
• No problems with the distribution of ink because of the irregular arrangement of patches
Disadvantages
• Arrangement of patches not standardized
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 70%, 100%

• CMY colors often not enough for high-end proofs
Recommended for

The "ISO12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Random" test chart contains the same 928 patches as the "ISO12642
/ ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual" test chart. However, the patches in this test chart are rearranged so that ink
is always applied evenly to the ink zones during printing. The test chart can be printed both in longi-
tudinal and cross direction.
'ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual' Test Chart with 1617

Patches
Advantages
• New test chart as an extension of ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3
• Contains all the patches of ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3
• Contains all the patches of ISO 12642 / ECI2002
• Contains the CMY patches of PrintOpen Extended
• For special black calculation as of PrintOpen 4.0.5.2 for PC and Mac OS X 

(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
• Very finely stepped CMY patches 9 x 9 x 9
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• Contains special patches with combinations of 3% and 7% for packaging printing
• Compared with ISO 12642 / ECI2002 contains 132 additional combinations each with 10% black
• Specially for high-end proofs
Disadvantages
284 Version 2017

Recommended for

The "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Visual" or "Random" test chart contains all 928 patches of "ISO
12642 / ANSI IT8/7.3" as well as all 1485 patches of "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002". It also contains the
CMY patches of "PrintOpen Extended 840".
Like the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8/7.3" and "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002" test charts, "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI
IT8/7.4" comprises several blocks with a total of 1617 patches that can be grouped as follows:

1 9 x 9 x 9 = 729 Patches without black in CMY combinations 0%,
10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85% and
100%.
2 6 x 6 x 6 = 216 Patches with 20% black in CMY combinations 0%,
10%, 20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
40%, 70% and 100%.
40%, 70% and 100%.
7 4 x 20 = 80 C, M, Y and K step wedges at 100%, 98%, 95%,
90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%,
30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 7%, 5%, 3% and 2% 
(for checking the dot gain)
8 1 Patch with paper white
9 37 Patches with neutral grays (CMY) and black overprint
at 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100%. 
(for checking the gray balance)
10 9 Patches with primary colors and 70% black (com-
patible with ISO 12642)
11 11 Patches with all CMY combinations of 0% and 3%
(without repeats from group 1 thru 7)


13 50 Patches with all CMY combinations of 0%, 3% and
40% (without repeats from group 1 thru 7 and 11 thru
12)
14 4 x 33 = 132 Patches with CMY combinations and 10% black
Notes
· printing the "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Visual" test chart once in longitudinal direction
and once in cross direction and then using the mean values or by
· using the "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Random" test chart.
'ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Random' Test Chart with 1617

Patches
Advantages
• Contains all the patches of ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3
• Contains all the patches of ISO 12642 / ECI2002
286 Version 2017

• For special black calculations, e.g. PrintOpen 4.0.5.2 for PC and Mac OS X 
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• Compared with ISO 12642 / ECI2002 contains 132 additional combinations each with 10% black
Disadvantages
Recommended for

The "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Random" test chart contains the same 1617 patches as the "ISO
12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Visual" test chart. 
However, the patches in this test chart are rearranged so that ink is always applied evenly to the ink
zones during printing. The test chart can be printed both in longitudinal and cross direction.
ISO 12647-2 plus Test Chart with 1700 Patches

ISO 12647-2 plus was developed on the basis of ISO 12642 ANSI IT8.7/4 Random with additional
cross-centered dot gain patches. This gives you an even better check of gradual fading and ink stabil-
ity in the measurements.

To be found in "...\Data\Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\ISO 12642-2 (IT8.7-4) Charts\i1-iSis".
'ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual' Test Chart with 1485 Patches
Advantages
• Contains the patches of ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
288 Version 2017

Disadvantages
Recommended for

The new "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual" or "Random" test chart was developed by an ECI workgroup
in cooperation with Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG. They are a superset of the present "ISO 12642
/ ANSI IT8/7.3" test chart. All 928 patches of this test chart are found in the 1485 patches of the new
"ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002". It also contains the CMY patches of PrintOpen Extended 840.
Like the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8/7.3" test chart, "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual" comprises several
blocks with a total of 1485 patches that can be grouped as follows:

1 9 x 9 x 9 = 729 Patches without black in CMY combinations 0%,
10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85% and
100%.
10%, 20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
40%, 70% and 100%.
40%, 70% and 100%.
7 4 x 20 = 80 C, M, Y and K step wedges at 100%, 98%, 95%,
90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%,
30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 7%, 5%, 3% and 2% 
(for checking the dot gain)
8 1 Patch with paper white
9 37 Patches with neutral grays (CMY) and black overprint
at 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100%. 
(for checking the gray balance)
10 9 Patches with primary colors and 70% black (com-
patible with ISO 12642)


13 50 Patches with all CMY combinations of 0%, 3% and
40% (without repeats from group 1 thru 7 and 11 thru
12)
Notes
· printing the "ISO 12642 / ECI 2002 Visual" test chart once in longitudinal direction and
once in cross direction and then using the mean values or by
· using the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random" test chart.
'ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random' Test Chart with 1485

Patches
Advantages
• New test chart as an extension of ISO 12642 / IT8.7/3
• Contains the patches of ISO 12642 / IT8.7/3
• Contains the CMY patches of PrintOpen Extended 840
290 Version 2017

(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• No problems with the distribution of ink because of the irregular arrangement of patches
Disadvantages
Recommended for

The "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random" test chart contains the same 1485 patches as the "ISO 12642-
2 / ECI 2002 Visual" test chart. 
However, the patches in this test chart are rearranged so that ink is always applied evenly to the ink
zones during printing. The test chart can be printed both in longitudinal and cross direction.
'PrintOpen Standard 210' Test Chart with 210 Patches

Advantages
• Basic PrintOpen test chart (since 1992)
• Measuring 210 patches is fast and simple
• Not much space required on the signature
• CMY colors 5 x 5 x 5 and black combinations optimized for print
• Even distribution of ink
• Good profile quality for printing (smoothness)
Disadvantages
• Not sufficient enough for high-end proofs

• Not enough black combinations for special black calculations
Recommended for
• manual measurements in particular
• profiling printing processes, giving an average of the color data

The "PrintOpen Standard 210" test chart has a representative selection of 210 patches and, conse-
quently, contains all the important color areas for color conversion. The test chart is structured in
such a way that the ink is applied evenly to the ink zones during printing, running parallel to the
direction the paper moves.
The first 135 patches are three-color CMY and are identical to those of the three-color "PrintOpen
Standard 135" (CMY) test chart. The remaining 75 patches are combinations with black.
This test chart is found as a single test chart (POXT1_CMYK) in the "PrintOpen Extended 840" test
chart.
'PrintOpen Extended 840' Test Chart with 840 Patches

Advantages
• Finely stepped CMY patches 9 x 9 x 9
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• Flexible positioning on the signature
• Very good profile quality for proofs
Disadvantages
• Not enough black combinations for special black calculations
• Problems with black with a lot of color cast
Recommended for
• profiling proofers without making any special allowance for black (color cast!)
292 Version 2017

The "PrintOpen Extended 840" test chart comprises four single test charts, each with 210 patches.
The first test chart (POXT1_CMYK, top left) is identical to the "PrintOpen Standard 210" with 210
patches.
The test chart is structured in such a way that the ink is applied evenly to the ink zones during print-
ing, running parallel to the direction the paper moves.
'PrintOpen Basic 210' Test Chart with 210 Patches

Advantages
• CMY colors 5 x 5 x 5
CMY: 0%, 20%, 40%, 70%, 100%
• Black combinations optimized for PrintOpen calculations (as of version 4.x)
Disadvantages
• Black combinations not compatible with previous PrintOpen Standard 210
Recommended for

The "PrintOpen Basic 210" test chart (CMYK) has a representative selection of 210 patches and, con-
sequently, contains all the important color areas for color conversion. The test chart is structured in
direction the paper moves.
The first 135 color patches are three-color CMY. The remaining 75 patches are combinations with
black.
'PrintOpen Basic 135' Test Chart with 135 Patches

Advantages
CMY: 0%, 20%, 70%, 100%
• Black combinations optimized for PrintOpen calculations (as of version 4.x)
• Profile calculation possible for printing (smoothness)
Disadvantage
• Not sufficient enough for proofs
294 Version 2017

Recommended for
• profiling printing processes
• for quality assessments
• profile conversion
The "PrintOpen Basic 135" test chart (CMYK) has a representative selection of 135 patches and, con-
sequently, contains all the important color areas for color conversion. The test chart is structured in
such a way that the ink is applied evenly to the ink zones during printing, running parallel to the direc-
tion the paper moves.
CMY Test Chart
'PrintOpen Standard' Test Chart with 135 Patches

Advantages
• Basic PrintOpen test chart
• CMY colors 5 x 5 x 5 optimized for printing

Disadvantages
Recommended for

The "PrintOpen Standard" test chart (CMY) has a representative selection of 135 patches and, conse-
direction the paper moves.
RGB test charts
'PrintOpen RGB Standard' Test Chart with 135 Patches

Advantages
• Basic PrintOpen test chart
• RGB colors 5 x 5 x 5 optimized for printing
Disadvantages
Recommended for
296 Version 2017


The "PrintOpen RGB Standard" test chart has a representative selection of 135 patches and, conse-
such a way that the ink is applied evenly to the ink zones during printing, running parallel to the direc-
tion the paper moves.
'PrintOpen RGB Extended' Test Chart with 840 Patches

Advantages
• Finely stepped CMY patches 9 x 9 x 9
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• Flexible positioning on the signature
• Very good profile quality for proofs
• For PrintOpen 4.x for PC and Mac OS X (not for Mac OS 9)
Disadvantages
Recommended for
• profiling transparency imagesetters, desktop printers

The "PrintOpen RGB Extended" test chart comprises four single test charts, each with 210 patches.
The first test chart (POXT1_RGB, top left) is identical to the "PrintOpen RGB Standard".
The test chart is structured in such a way that the ink is applied evenly to the ink zones during print-
ing, running parallel to the direction the paper moves.
General Information about Special Test Charts
i
i
Note: You need special test charts for some colorimeters, for example, for strip readers.

Special Test Chart for Strip Readers

You need special test charts for GretagMacbeth iCColor and EyeOne (strip) as well as X-Rite DTP41.
You can find these test charts as a data set on the test chart CD in the relevant subfolder of the "Test-
charts PDF" or "Testcharts TIFF" folder.
On this special test chart, the color patches are arranged in strips and are separated by ribs. The
strips either have 15, 30 or 45 color patches.
You can print the strip test charts in different formats. Afterwards, you must cut the strips along the
cutting marks.
The "PrintOpen Standard" test chart (CMYK, 210 patches) is an example of a strip test chart with 15
patches per strip used on X-Rite DTP41 and GretagMacbeth iCColor.
298 Version 2017

Example of the printed "PrintOpen Standard 210 (CMYK)" special test chart for X-Rite DTP41 with 15 patches per strip.

Example of the printed "PrintOpen Standard 210 (CMYK)" special test chart for GretagMacbeth iCColor with 15 patches per
strip.
300 Version 2017

Multicolor Test Charts

Multicolor test charts are available as PDF and TIFF files in Prinect Color Toolbox. They consist of two
pages and are used for profiling Multicolor processes.
The example shown above shows the pages of the test chart for 6c CMYK-Orange-Green and can also
be used for the combination CMYK-Red-Green. The patches in the top right corner show the colors
for which the test chart is defined.
The additional colors for Multicolor are:
• Orange(O) or Red(R)
• Green(G)
• Blue(B) or Violet(V)
The following two-page test charts are available:

• 5 colors (5 C): test charts (2x1229 color patches) for:
· CMYK+O or CMYK+R
· CMYK+G
· CMYK+V or CMYK+B
To be found in "...\Data\Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\MultiColor Charts\5C".

• 6 colors (6 C): test charts (2x1407 color patches) for:
· CMYK+OG
· CMYK+OV
· CMYK+GV
• 7 colors (7 C): test chart (2x1259 color patches) for CMYK+OGV or CMYK+RGB
You will find a description of the procedure in "Measuring and Evaluating Spot Colors", page 53.
They can be measured with Prinect Image Control or X-Rite i1-IO. You can also measure multicolor
test charts with X-Rite i1-ISIS. In this case, however, you need special test charts (to be found in
"...\Data\Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\MultiColor Charts\5C\i1-iSis", "Testcharts PDF\MultiColor
Charts\6C\i1-iSis" and "Testcharts PDF\MultiColor Charts\7C\i1-iSis").
Special 7c test charts for i1-ISIS
Test Charts for Packaging

The usual multicolor approach contains additional saturated colors like orange, green and violet. In
other words, it is outside the gamut of a normal 4c CMYK process.
However, there are cases, especially in packaging, that use an additional spot color that is within the
gamut of the 4c CMYK process. This fifth color can be:
• Beige, used for
302 Version 2017

· Cosmetics / skintones
· Food industry (e.g. bread)
· Furniture
• Brown or
• Gray / silver (non-metallic)
This product color can be found in labels and in images. The usual procedure is:
• process images with the classic 4c approach and
• process pure areas with the product spot color.
In this procedure, reproduction of the spot color in both areas is different. To have a homogeneous
reproduction of the product color, five colors, i.e. CMYK + spot color, must be processed throughout
the whole process.
Normally, multicolor test charts cannot be used for this. This is why a special two-page test chart is
needed for this packaging case. The generated profile is used for the whole print job. This means that
five separations are produced also in the image areas.
The following two-page test charts are available for this:
• CMYK+beige
• CMYK+brown
• CMYK+non-metallic-silver
To be found in "...\Data\Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\Packaging\5C".
They can be measured with Prinect Image Control or X-Rite i1-IO. You can also measure multicolor
test charts with X-Rite i1-ISIS. In this case, however, you need special test charts (to be found in
"...\Data\Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\Packaging\i1-iSis").
Control Strips
'Ugra/FOGRA media strip' Version 1.2 with 52 Patches

Advantages
• Standardized test strip for checking digital proofing
• CMY: 0%, 40%, 70%, 100% primary and secondary colors 

Mixed colors K: 0%, 3%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 70%, 80%, 100% 
(and gray balance values)
• Manual measuring of 52 patches is fast and simple
Disadvantages
• Some patches are not in the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart.
• Licensing by FOGRA necessary (strip replaced by Ugra/FOGRA V2.0)
Recommended for
• proof and print quality assessments (solid tints, dot gain, color gamut).
'Ugra/FOGRA media strip V2-agx' Version 2.0 with 46 Patches
Advantages
• Standardized test strip for checking digital proofing (bvdm/FOGRA)

Mixed colors K: 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, 100% 
(and gray balance values from IT8.7/3)
• All the patches are in the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart.
• Single-row strips are also available
Disadvantages
• Does not contain K 70% (for process check at 40% and 70%)
• Licensing by FOGRA necessary
304 Version 2017

Recommended for
'FOGRA MKV 3' for Epson Printer (1-2 Rows)

FOGRA media strips for checking proofers and digital printers; the standard strip with normally three
rows is now also available with only one or two rows for EPSON inkjet printers. They can also be used
for other proofers and in general because they are identical to the standard media strip.
Fogra MediaWedgeCMYK V3 1row_HDM (version with one row; because of its length it can be mea-
sured only in the spot mode):
Fogra MediaWedgeCMYK V3 2rows_HDM (version with two rows):
This version can be measured both in the spot and in the scan mode. It has been tested successfully
in the scan mode with TECHKON SpectroDens Premium and in the spot mode with X-Rite eXact, i1-
Pro V2 and TECHKON SpectroDens.
'PCS control strip 40AB/40A' with 40 Patches
Advantages
• Contains 40 patches of the ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 test chart

Mixed colors K: 0%, 40%, 70%, 80, 100% (and gray balance values)

• CMYK process check at 40% and 70% possible
• Single-row strips are also available (PCS 40A)
Disadvantage
• Not a standardized test strip but is similar to the "Ugra/FOGRA media strip"
Recommended for
'PCS control strip 60AB/60A' with 60 Patches
Advantages
• Contains 60 patches of the ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 test chart
• CMY: 0%, 20%, 40%, 70%, 100% primary and secondary colors 
Mixed colors K: 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 70%, 80, 100% (and gray balance values)
• CMYK process check at 40% and 70% possible
• Single-row strips are also available (PCS 60A)
Disadvantage
Recommended for
306 Version 2017

'MB_100_70_40_CMYK' and 'MB_100_80_40_CMYK' Color

Control Blocks with 13 Patches and 'MB_100_75_50_25_C-
MYK' with 17 Patches
DIPCO MB_100_70_40_CMYK color control block
DIPCO MB_100_80_40_CMYK color control block
DIPCO MB_100_75_50_25_CMYK color control block
Advantages
• CMY: 0%, 40%, 70% (80%), 100% only primary colors and white
• CMYK process check at 40% and 70% (80%) possible
• Not much space required on the signature (color control block often at different positions on the
signature)
• Manual measuring of 13 or 17 patches is fast and simple
Disadvantage
• Measuring not possible with automatic devices 
(exception: Prinect Image Control)
Recommended for
• quality assessments in print (dot check).
DIPCO 'Prinect 4GS strip' with 28+1 Patches

Advantages
• Mainly on the signature when printing with a Speedmaster
• The same test strip section for Speedmasters 102, 74 and 52
• CMY solid tints of primary and secondary colors (Lab color gamut)
• CMYK solid tints and 70% color steps (final density, dot gain)
• Manual measuring of 28+1 patches is fast and simple
• Automatic measurement with Prinect Image Control is possible.
Disadvantage
• Contains the (most important) CMYK color steps for process check
Recommended for
• print quality assessments (solid tints, dot gain, color gamut).
• print profile conversion
308 Version 2017

'Prinect/Fogra 4 strip' with 40+1 Patches
Advantages
• Mainly on the signature when printing with a Speedmaster
• The same test strip section for Speedmasters 102 and 74 (but not for Speedmaster 52)
• CMY solid tints of primary and secondary colors (Lab color gamut)
• CMYK solid tints, 40% and 80% color steps (final density, dot gain)
• Manual measuring of 40+1 patches is fast and simple
Automatic measurement with Prinect Image Control is possible.
Disadvantage
• Contains the (most important) CMYK color steps for process check
Recommended for
• print quality assessments (solid tints, dot gain, color gamut).
• print profile conversion
'HD Proof Color Bar' with 32 Patches
Advantages
• Linearization strips for checking proofer calibration
• CMYK: 0%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% only primary colors
Secondary colors: 50%, 100%, some gray balance values
• Not much space required on the signature (automatic positioning by MetaDimension)

Disadvantages
• Only a few patches in the ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 test chart
Recommended for
• checking the quality of proofer calibration
'PCS 19_100_80_40_Gray' with 19 Patches
Advantages
• Combined minispot with 19 patches:
· MB_100_80_40_CMYK for dot gain analysis
· ECI_GrayCon_S for gray balance analysis
• You can also measure the test strip with GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) with scanning ruler.
Disadvantage
• Not a standardized test strip
Recommended for
• quality assessment for processes
· FOGRA39 - coated papers
· FOGRA29 - uncoated papers
'ECI_GrayConL', 'ECI_GrayConM' and 'ECI_GrayConS' with

52, 32 or 6 Patches
310 Version 2017

Advantages
• Minispots for a visual and metrological check of gray balance
· ECI_GrayconL: Large ("L") variant with 52 patches (graduations of 10%), especially

suited for checking ink balance and any faults in gray balance
· ECI_GrayconM: Medium ("M") variant with 32 patches (graduations of 20%). This strip
should be used only if there is not enough room for the "L" version.
· ECI_GrayconS: Small ("S") variant with only six patches (three gray balance pairs); only
for a visual check
• Array of specific black patches (30%, 50%, 70%) beside chromatic color combinations with the
same degree of brightness (composite gray) for a visual check
• Manual measuring is fast and simple
Recommended for
• Minispots for a visual and metrological check of gray balance
'PCM_GrayConL_i1' Control Strip with 56 Patches
Advantages
• Combined minispots with 56 patches for process monitoring:
· ECI/bvdm_tvi_10 for monitoring dot gain in steps of 10%, checking primaries/secondar-

ies/tertiaries, paper white
· ECI_GrayCon_S for checking gray balance
Properties
• One column wide for positioning in the fold between pages
• For measuring with scan handheld instruments
• 56 color patches = too long for a strip reader/ruler, in other words strip measured in two steps
of 28 patches each

• PDF file in Prinect Color Toolbox: "Prinect Profile Tool Test Charts > Testcharts\Testcharts
PDF\GrayCon"
Recommended for
• Quality assurance for processes and profile matching
· FOGRA43 - coated papers, non-periodic screening
· FOGRA44 - uncoated papers, non-periodic screening
· GRACOL G7/CGATS - coated papers
'PCS40_Gray_i1' Control Strip with 52 Patches
Advantages
• Combined minispot with 52 patches:
· PCS40 for checking process (primaries/secondaries/tertiaries, dot gain, paper white),

checking color gamut and process monitoring
· ECI_GrayCon_S for checking gray balance
• This minispot is the smallest control strip for characterization and monitoring of the print pro-
cess because it contains not only paper white, primaries and single-channel dot gain values but
also secondaries, tertiaries and quaternaries. It can be used to check all process-relevant
parameters. It is also suited for the following tasks:
· Replacing a process color (CMY) by another color

To do this, print the minispot with the new color and measure the minispot. Using the
measured data, you can then match your ICC profile to the new color(s).
· Monitoring the press sheet
Disadvantage
• Not a standardized test strip
Properties
• One column wide for positioning in the fold between pages
312 Version 2017

• 52 color patches = too long for a strip reader/ruler, in other words strip measured in two steps
of 26 patches each
PDF\Qualitymonitor Charts"
• Quality assurance for processes and profile matching
"TECHKON" Control Strip with 16 Patches
Advantages
• Control strip (minispots) for fast checking of the process standard (primaries/secondaries, dot
gain, paper white)
Properties
• Reference file in "User defined"
PDF\Qualitymonitor Charts"
'User-Spot-Paperwhite' Block with 2 Patches for Evaluation of

Spot Colors
Minispot with two color patches for evaluation of spot colors, consisting of:
• a patch for any spot color
• and paper white
A patch with paper white is needed because the spot color values depend on the printing material.
Normally, this minispot does not have to be printed on the sheet, that is why no PDF is available. Sim-
ply look for the spot color on your sheet and measure it and do the same for paper white.
This minispot lets you measure spot colors to compare them with the color fan or the values in the
spot color table (reference file in "User defined > User_Spot_PW").
See also Measuring and Evaluating Spot Colors, page 53.

CMY-K Linearization Strips
'PCM 13 CMYK' and 'PCM 25 CMYK' Four-color Linearization

Strips each with 13 or 25 Steps
PCM 13 CMYK (MB_Process_13_CMYK)
PCM 25 CMYK (MB_Process_25_CMYK)
Advantages
• Linearization strips for creating and checking print and proof calibrations
• PCM 13 CMYK: CMY-K 13 steps with
· 0% and 5%
· 10% steps between 10% and 90%
· 95% and 100%
• PCM 25 CMYK: CMY-K 25 steps with
• Manual measuring of four times 13 or four times 25 patches is fast and simple
314 Version 2017

Recommended for
• creating and checking calibrations.
'MB_Process_13' and 'MB_Process_25' Single-color Lineariza-

tion Strips with 13 and 25 Steps
MB_Process_13
MB_Process_25
Advantages
• Linearization strips for creating and checking film and plate calibrations
• MB_Process_13: CMY-K 13 steps with
· 0% and 5%
· 95% and 100%
• MB_Process_25: CMY-K 25 steps with
• Manual measuring of 13 or 25 steps is fast and simple
Recommended for
• creating and checking calibrations.

Linearization Strips for Color Proof Pro

Linearization strips for creating and checking base linearizations for proofing devices with Color Proof
Pro. The linearization strips are also printed on the press and for that reason are found in Prinect
Color Toolbox only as a reference file (can be selected directly in "New measurement file > Lineariza-
tion strip").
• MD_C2_TotalInkLimit V1/V2: Linearization strips for determining the total ink limit.
• MD_C3_InkLimitChannel: Linearization strip for determining the optimal ink limit for each pri-
mary color.
• MD_C4_Lin4c/Lin6c/Lin7c: Linearization strips for linearization (4, 6 or 7 colors).
• MD_C5_QualityControl: Linearization strip for checking the quality of linearization.
'HDM_Inkjet' Linearization Strips

Two versions of the "HDM_Inkjet" linearization strip were created especially for digital web presses
like Gallus Labelfire 340: CMYK with four rows with 22 patches each and CMYKOV (orange, violet)
with six rows with 22 patches each. The linearization strip is also printed on the press and for that
reason is found in Prinect Color Toolbox only as a reference file (can be selected directly in "New
measurement file > Linearization strip").
i
i
Note: With updates, you might have to first enable "HDM_Inkjet" in the preferences in "Test-
chart", "Linearization strip" tab.
316 Version 2017

Index
Index
Display of ab plane 127, 194

"Conversion of color data - paper white" Display of the La/Lb diagrams 128, 194
Dialog 98 Display of the xy diagram 126, 193
"Compare" (main function) 119 CIE color space diagrams 191
"Edit" (main function) 201 CIE report 139, 162
3D color space 128 Analysis 141
3D color space (with central projection/ CIELab color values 141
animation) 132 Density values 141
3D spot color view 255 Dot gain 141
Proof report 142
A ab diagram 84, 127, 194 Total results 140
ab plane 127 CIELab color values
Analysis (CIE report) 141 Import from color table 229
Analysis (main function) 153 Import from measured data 229
CIE report 162 Select PANTONE® color 229
Density report 164 CIELab color values (CIE report) 141
Dialogs 155 Color calculator 239
Display of the result 157 Calculate color values 241
Dot gain report 163 Compare color values 245
Print preview Production check 169 Color values 73
Production check 165 Colorimeter, Setup 87
PV CIE report 167 Colorimeters
PV dot gain report 168 Konica Minolta FD-7 40
PV Overview 166 TECHKON SpectroDens Premium 45
Averaging color data 91 X-Rite eXact 47
X-Rite i1Pro 2 40
B Black X-Rite i1Pro 2 - IO 42
Generation ColorScout A+ measuring table 49
with GCR 179 Compare (main function)
with length and width 181 3D color space 128
Length 182 ab diagram 127
Long (full range) 182 CIE report 139
Narrow 182 Data table 149
Standard 182 La/Lb diagrams 128
Wide 182 Proof statistics 143
Width 182 Error distribution (trend) 144
Black point compensation 249 Error histogram 143
Black width 182 Statistics 137
Button bar 23 Error distribution (trend with mean) 139
Error distribution (trend) 138
C Calculate color values 241 Error histogram 137
Calculate correction data 258 Test chart 122
Calculate ICC profile Tonal values 148
Gamut mapping 176 Density curves (density profile) 149
Optimized 176 Dot gain 149
Global setting 183 Printing characteristic 149
Gray Component Replacement (GCR) 180 Views and diagrams 122
Multicolor 62 xy diagram 126
Calculate wet process standard 234 ΔLab report 145
Chroma 183 ΔLCH report 147
CIE color space Compare color values 245

Index
Context-sensitive menu in curve Gray balance calibration 255

diagrams 76, 160, 197, 198 Gray balance optimization 260
Correction of proofer profile 212 Ink Limit 253
Correction/smoothing of color data, Load parameter set 94, 252
example 189 Preferences 264
Create (main function) 171 Print 272
ab diagram 194 Process parameters 251
Dot gain/Printing characteristic 195 Profile Generation Setup 172
Gray balance/Density curves 198 Profile parameters 206
La/Lb diagram 194 Smoothing of color data 94, 187
Test chart 191 Store parameter set 252
Views and diagrams 191 Dot gain 73, 74, 77, 148, 149, 195, 197,
xy diagram 193 207
CIE report 141
D Data Formats of Measured Data 16 Curves 75
Data table 149 Dot gain curves 207
Delta E Type 227 Dot gain report 163
Delta Lab report, ΔLab report 145 Dot gain table 84
Delta LCH report, ΔLCH report 147
Density curves (density profile) 149 E Edit (main function)
Density report 164 Dot gain 207
Density status 227 Global gradation 210
Density values (CIE report) 141 Gray balance 209
DeviceLink profile 246 Lightness gradation 211
Diagram Printing characteristic 207
Miscolors 124 Process parameters 216
Diagrams Profile information 202
ab diagram 194 Profile modifications 207
ab plane 127 Edit the process parameters 216
La/Lb diagram 194 Error distribution (trend with mean) 139
La/Lb diagrams 128 Error distribution (trend) 138, 144
Print 272 Error histogram 137, 143
xy diagram 126, 193 Explorer panel 23
Dialog
Change entry 155 G Gamut mapping 176, 183
Color Toolbox - New measurement file 85 Global setting (darker/lighter slider) 185
Merging of test chart data 91 Global setting of color saturation (gray/
Save table as CSV file 151 colored slider) 185
Dialogs Keep gray axis (min/max slider) 185
Color measurement of test chart 87 Optimized 176, 183
Conversion of color data 97 Setting for dark colors (darker/lighter) 184
Conversion of color data - Calibration Setting for light colors (preserve lightness/
data 100 preserve contrast) 183
Conversion of color data - color values 98 GCR (Gray Component Replacement) 180
Conversion of color data - Test chart Global gradation 210
values 99 Global settings 183
Correction of color data 95, 185 Gradual fading 82
Edit control strip 86 Gray balance 198, 209, 256
Extracting test chart data 93 Gray balance calibration 255, 256
Gamut mapping 183, 185 Calculate correction data 258
GCR setting/Black generation 179 Workflow 257
318 Version 2017

Index
Gray balance optimization 260 Measured data

Gray Component Replacement (GCR) 180 Check for compliance with process
Gray values 77 standard 103
Measuring table ColorScout A+ 49
H Header/menu bar 21 Merging of color data 91
Help Multicolor 57
HTML5 functions 28 Functions in Color Toolbox 59
Process colors 58
I Import from color table 229 Test charts 62
Import from measured data 229 Multicolor profiles
Include optical brightener 96, 186 Create 62
Ink Limit 253 Multicolor test charts 301
Ink zones 78
Internal reference file 227 O Offline measurement
ISO measurement condition 39 Procedure 38
Online measurement
K Keep black text 250 Procedure 38
Keep GCR 249 Output profile 177
Keep paper white 215
Konica Minolta FD-7 40 P Paper white correction
Include optical brightener 96, 186
L La/Lb Diagrams 128, 194 Lightness adaption for proofs 187
Length of black 182 Preserve black 247
Lightness adaption for proofs 187 Print
Lightness gradation 211 Diagrams 272
Log printout 272 Reports 272
Print preview
M Main function Production Check 169
Analysis 153 Printing Characteristic 73, 74, 76, 77, 148,
Dialogs 155 149, 195, 197, 207, 208
Display of the result 157 Printing process General 277
Production check 165 Printout of the logs 272
Compare 119 Process color modification
Views and diagrams 122 Dot gain 207
Create 171 Global gradation 210
Views and diagrams 191 Gray balance 198, 209
Edit 201 Lightness gradation 211
Profile information 202 Printing characteristic 208
Profile modifications 207 Process colors with Multicolor 58
Measure 31 Process parameters 216
Process standard 219 Edit 216
Main function bar 21 Process standard 103, 219
Measure (main function) 31 Check measured data 103
Color values 73 CMYK 219
Dot gain/Printing characteristic 74 Export 233
Gradual fading 82, 84 Import 233
Gray values 77 Multicolor 219
Ink zones 78 Create 230
Process standard 103 Overview 221
Substrate 73 Process standard (main function) 219
Test chart 71 Process standards

Index
Edit 226 T Tabs 23

Show 223 TECHKON SpectroDens Premium 45
Profile calculation Test chart
Gamut mapping 176 Calculate mean data 91
Profile Information 202 Combined 87
Profile Modifications 207 Example of a special test chart, PrintOpen
Proof report Standard (CMYK) for
in CIE report 142 GretagMacbeth iCColor 300
Proof statistics 143 X-Rite DTP41 299
Error distribution (trend) 144 Test chart data
Error histogram 143 Average 91
Proofer profile, correction 212 Test chart display 71, 122, 191
ProofTuner 204 Test chart view
PV CIE report 167 with absolute values 123
PV dot gain report 168 with differential values 124
PV Overview 166 Test strip
User-defined 86
R Reference file, internal 227 Tonal values 148
Rich black 249 Display of the density curves (density
profile) 149
S Select PANTONE® color 229 Display of the dot gain curve 149
Slider Display of the printing characteristic 149
Gamut mapping Tools menu
Global setting (darker/lighter slider) 185 Color calculator 239
Global setting of color saturation (gray/ DeviceLink profile 246
colored slider) 185 Gray balance calibration
Keep gray axis (min/max slider) 185 Calculate correction data 258
Setting for dark colors (darker/ Total results (CIE report) 140
lighter) 184
Setting for light colors (preserve light- U User interface 20
ness/preserve contrast) 183
GCR 180 V View
Smoothing of color data ab diagram 194
Example 189 Dot gain/Printing characteristic 74
Special functions Edit
Gray balance calibration 255, 256 Global gradation 210
Workflow 257 Gray balance 209
Gray balance optimization 260 Lightness gradation 211
Special test chart, PrintOpen Standard Printing characteristic 207
(CMYK) for GretagMacbeth iCColor 300 Process parameters 216
Special test chart, PrintOpen Standard La/Lb diagram 194
(CMYK) for X-Rite DTP41 299 Test chart 191
Special test charts for scan mode 49 xy diagram 193
Spot colors in 3D 255 View profile parameters 206
Standard black 182 Views
Statistics 137 3D color space 128
Error distribution (trend with mean) 139 3D color space (with central projection/
Error distribution (trend) 138 animation) 132
Error histogram 137 ab diagram 84, 194
Status bar 24 ab plane 127
Substrate 73 CIE report 139, 162
320 Version 2017

Index
Color values 73 xy diagram 126, 193

Data table 149
Density report 164 Z Zoom 27
Dot gain curves 207 Zoom in view of test charts 27
Dot gain report 163
Dot gain table 84
Dot gain/Printing characteristics 73, 74,
77, 148, 195
Edit
Dot gain curves 207
Gradual fading 82
Gray balance/density curves 198
Gray values 77
Ink zones 78
La/Lb diagram 194
La/Lb diagrams 128
Overview of process standards 221
Patches 71, 191
Print preview Production Check 169
Process standard 103
Process standards 221
Proof statistics 143
Error histogram 143
PV CIE report 167
PV dot gain report 168
PV Overview 166
Statistics 137
Error distribution (trend with mean) 139
Error histogram 137
Substrate 73
Test chart 71, 122, 191
with absolute values 123
with differential values 124
Tonal values 148
Density curves (density profile) 149
Dot gain 149
Printing characteristic 149
xy diagram 126, 193
ΔLab report 145
ΔLCH report 147
W Window
3D color space (with central projection/
animation) 132
Workspace 23
X X-Rite eXact 47
X-Rite i1Pro 2 40
X-Rite i1Pro 2 - IO 42

Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG
Kurfuersten-Anlage 52 - 60 
69115 Heidelberg 
Germany 
Phone +49 6221 92-00 
Fax +49 6221 92-6999
heidelberg.com
Copyright © 2016 Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG.

No part of this book may be reproduced without prior written permission.
Important Notice:
We are dedicated to improving and enhancing our products. Consequently,
the information in this manual is subject to technical modifications and
other changes without notice. Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG assumes
no responsibility for information and description as far as third-party
products are concerned.
The information contained in this manual about performance and speed
as well as technical data concerning application of our products is not
legally binding as it does not constitute a written contract of features. If
any problems occur with the product described in this manual, please 
contact the Heidelberg agency which is responsible for you.
Revision 1.0
Version 2017
Impressum
Fonts: Heidelberg Antiqua Ml, Heidelberg Gothic Ml
Trademarks
Heidelberg, the Heidelberg logotype, Prinect, Suprasetter and 
Speedmaster are registered trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen
AG in the United States and other countries.
Adobe and PostScript and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
PANTONE and Hexachrome are registered trademarks of Pantone Inc.
All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
Subject to technical modifications and other changes.

Prinect ColorToolbox Users Guide Us

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Prinect ColorToolbox Users Guide Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Color Toolbox

Prinect Signa Station 1

Before you start ...

Structure of this Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Functionality of Prinect Color Toolbox

Zoom in View of Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Prinect Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 3

Views and functions in the 'Measure' main function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Notes on the measurement conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Spot Color Evaluation

Creating a Process Standard for Spot Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Definition of the Process Colors for Multicolor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Multicolor test charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

'Dot gain' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Minispots for the evaluation of gray balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Prinect Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 5

Show Delta E table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

'Dot gain table' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

'Color Toolbox - New measurement file' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

'Edit control strip' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Loading a Combined Test Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

'Mean calculation of test chart data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

'Color patch editor' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

'Conversion of color data' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Information about the Conversion of Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Setting the Process Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Substrate (paper white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Views and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Notes on the Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Prinect Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 7

Dot gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Information about Long-term Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

'Change entry' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Notes on the Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

'PV Overview' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

'PV CIE report' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

'Profile calculation' dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Set Parameters for Print or Proof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

'Test chart' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Prinect Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 9

'Profile info.' View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

View profile parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Process Color Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Notes on the Shipped Process Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

'Overview' - View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Import a standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Export a standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Calculate wet process standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Procedure for the Wet-Dry Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Color calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Color calculator > Calculate color values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Profile smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

'Correct profile by smoothing' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

'Store parameter set' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Spot color control strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

3D spot color view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Gray balance calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

General Information about Gray Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Gray balance optimization in the Prinect workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

'Preferences' Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Prinect Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 11